Home

Agilent Technologies 8510C Network Analyzer

1. D15 D15 D15 MOTORRTN DGND D13 D13 D13 D11 D11 D11 09 D9 D9 D7 D7 D7 DS DS D5 D3 D3 D3 D1 D1 D1 DGND x DGND b DGND ii LDG LDG LDG 518 J J 118 J A18 J J DISC DRIVE SECURITY KEY Alu Alu E Alu p E 1 5 10 10 DGND 8 z A8 b 7 N DENSITY gt J J lt J lt J lt J lt gt J2 1 lt gt J J lt J lt Ae J lt J N gt J2 3 lt MEDIAID gt lt J lt J lt J lt gt 22 5 lt DGND gt lt BOND J lt BEND lt lt gt 42 7 lt 417 1 J gt J J lt J lt J lt J lt gt J2 9 J lt
2. ri oc aol quel a doble T E 1 3 Related Sal Use ite uio a Peek VIXI ep IX EEG Erde ua ddp dented vd ded dnb ad 1 3 Reseslina d 7 4 Loading the Controller Basic Language 7 4 a 7 4 Loading Basie 30 or HIghep a uu s u RR 7 4 Procedure 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments 7 10 Procedure 2 CRT Display Degaussing 7 12 Procedure 3 CRT Display Intensity 7 14 Background Intensity Black 7 14 Operating Default Intensity 7 15 Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain 7 16 Procedures IF Mixer Ads BITE yu u u u d adobe sie dado AR AERA 7 19 Procedure 6 IF Amplifier AdjustMent LER RIDERE RR
3. 8 43 Swept Frequency Accuracy 44 15 8 43 bar Banz Santas L u PRAE Ru di 8 44 For All Other 8360 Seres SyritliasIZBIS Rer ae 8 45 Far 8340 41 Series Synthesizers uu ROGO RO 8 45 Por P 8 45 Far 8340 41 Series Synthesizers E X 4 OA KC CR Rd 8 46 In Case ARR 8 46 Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure 8 47 Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the Perfanmanee Venice DIO VICE acq denne ne tween 8 50 Interpreting the Performance Verification 8 52 If the System Fails Performance Verification 8 54 Contents 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties 8 56 Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts 8
4. 8 89 Dynamic Sccuraey Ertor Mel ur us u 8 91 PIBASUIENICNE ISCBSDE inn os IAG were ade dented EORR 8 91 Substitution of System Components 404 00000000 seen ee 9 ERR 8 92 cut HB RITU 25 pt adus Dd dade 8 92 Cable eb a ede hater bade pip EE 8 92 uo ioca ical dada A Ae dote arx olo Bea RR Rc UR Ros 8 93 CalbranG MCCC rcc 8 93 Reference Information for Performance Verification and 8 94 8510 System Specification Criteria 5 8 94 ab MAHZ Calibrator and WMenifieatiaii acid xa Fe E dees Es 8 94 B O dB or 180 Degree ER REPRE RIP E ER YE 8 94 Aborting Plots and Printouts with the ABORT 8 95 Adapters Test POM Abbas REIR EE ded E b E CE E E sens 8 95 Attention Messages and SCPP Setungs oc ccs sce ul asa ster EX GURG ER hee dak wean 8 95 BASIC 5 0 and HP UX Systems se
5. STOP 25228 9 Stee 25822200578 Good Cable Bad Cable 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 37 Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Magnitude and Phase Stability of Cables 1 To measure magnitude and phase stability press the following keys on the analyzer DISPLAY DUAL CHANNEL SPLIT CHANNEL 1 LOG MAG RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON 6 4 x1 CHANNEL 2 PARAMETER 511 FORMAT PHASE RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON 6 4 X1 Connect a short at the end of the cable Hold the cable in a straight line and press the following keys to normalize the displayed traces CHANNEL 1 DISPLAY DATA MEMORY 1 MATH CHANNEL 2 DISPLAY DATA MEMORY 2 MATH Make a gradual 90 bend in the middle of the cable NOTE The specification in the cable manual is determined from a transmission measurement not a reflection measurement and using a particular radius of a bend 5 To change the scale of the displayed traces press CHANNEL 1 RESPONSE SCALE STEP repeat arrow key CHANNEL 2 RESPONSE SCALE STEP repeat arrow key To mark the end of the cable s specified range place a marker on the highest specified frequency of the cable Press MARKER enter the specified frequency G n Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes above and below the reference line and is within the specified frequency range See Figure 8 9 f
6. 4 8 Cabling eer ape qawas 4 8 st REPE PCIE RE PES MU UE C Dad pK 4 12 Obvious Failure 8 22554 4 20 Verity the 951016 Display PIOCesBSOF us ek xke eher Ka Edo CEA A OR AUG 4 20 Verify thie 85102 P U BEBCDGE REPE benaderd E PPM 4 20 EDO C aber SE ERE 4 22 Test Sat Emillatal Fo RUE 4 22 Sauce 4 22 Other Tests fortha Sous oci 4 22 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block 4 25 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram LCD 4 27 8510C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram 4 29 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram 0 0 4 31 85102C IF Detector Overall Block Diagrami 4 33 8510C
7. 6 13 Motherboard Card Cage Assembly 6 14 Assembly 2 5 2 Rag SE 6 16 LCD Assemb 6 18 85102B Replacement 6 21 Front Panel RE 6 22 Rectifier Board Replacement 6 23 Contents 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents Capacitor Discharge Procedure 6 24 Power Supply Capacitor Replacement C2 and 4 6 26 Capacitor Discharge Procedure i eh a RR RAE AERA 6 26 Rear Panel Replacement u u REF ER EVERY VY rer 6 27 Related Adjustments 6 28 7 Adjustments USES 7 2 Soe aba NON ONG caeno SN pacc vlde t E deen te Sa owen aid d 7 3 2325 hoe pb e deb 7 3 PATHS PONE ROS
8. LED Pattern No Name of Test 32 16 8 4 2 1 1 5 Processor EPROM no code 2 5 Processor RAM I 0 3 A7 Data Bus i 0 0 4 4 14 Display Processor 0 5 4 A14 Display Ram 0 0 6 A7 Timer Clock RS 232 0 0 7 7 Public GPIB 0 0 0 8 A7 System Bus 0 9 Interrupt System 0 0 10 5 Multiplier 0 0 11 A7 Disk Controller 0 0 0 12 6 Nonvolatile Memory 0 0 13 IF Detector Data 0 0 0 14 Keyboard 0 0 0 performed after test 2 LED off 0 LED on The following paragraphs list the most likely cause of failure for each test The percentage in parentheses is the probability that a particular item is at fault The percentages may not always total 10096 One percent 1 means very low probability Supplemental troubleshooting help is provided by these features Additional troubleshooting hints part of each test description System level troubleshooting block diagram Service program menu of the firmware and the Service Program section in this manual 4 48 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Test 1 Ab Processor EPROM Most likely cause of failure e 5 EPROM failure 60 e Ab processor board failure 40 e A8 motherboard trace connector failure 1 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 1 Additional troubleshooting hints e Check the seating of the 5 board In the main Service Functions test menu press 2
9. P XP RERRdP X PPFNM RP 4 111 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting 4 112 Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator 4 112 Check the 5 V Test Pointe on A24 Interface died RERO E dac RR C ado 4 113 Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier 4 113 acd 4 115 85101C Power Supply Detailed Block 4 117 851020 Power Supply Detailed Black Diagram s em e Re RE en ees 4 118 Test Failis 1 22 asses 0 Pob ox dep Pd Ra 4 119 IUIS s n unga EE reer ye Seren eee mer 4 119 oc ior E bie beeen de ki 8 4 119 EBI BS us ain ue dU UR Ra Ra 4 121 Errem 4 121 How to Resolve Software and Firmware 4 121 li d Eat dadas 4 121 PTT 4 122 PMS x niu
10. FR HA GRE dees HR EE REDE EEA 4 66 Service Command 22 Run Sarvica Program DER ER 4 66 Service Command 23 Diagnose a 4 66 Haw te Reload the Operating Systemi u ches bianni ews YR RUE UE RE RA GO cR EROR 4 67 Running 2 Ua 4 69 Running Error Messages as Built In 0 4 69 Different Types of Running Error Messages 4 69 Error Message Dharacferistibs Q er PRSE REPRE 4 70 Caution Tone ioc Leld de IR KE i iei gee 4 70 Eran qos DISSE SBUBA Luo sc cn teens ek Rode ke doe CR RR EE AER Rd RS db ELON dake dd 4 70 Tell Whe M amp SS886S i u usussqsssrsassssssssasawsppapashasaqapasaphassanhtupqaaphquaqqapsq ak 4 70 aa d sas duo ad Ba Ropa ac D do dus 4 70 Things to Remember about Running Error 4 71 Categories of Caution Running Error 065 4 71 Phase Lock Running Error usasuayaskukaqqaqaqaaqaqaqq
11. 1 5 Preventive Maintenance Chapter 10 1 5 Definition of an gB u u REA 1 5 Senice Tapis AMI SD aus esa u y b PEDIR E 1 5 Table of Service EORR HI S E E STO q PE ide is 1 6 2 Safety Licensing Sane Br u u ee RE ORG De RU Rah dab e RO 2 3 Hazardous Instrument Areas with Power 2 3 Compliance with German FTZ Emissions 2 6 Compliance with Canadian 2 6 3 Theory of Operation RSME CE ER MES 3 2 The use dU SEED uu iu IM Ie ES 3 3 PIC PEPPER UO IP eM PHP PIRE RES 3 4 Synthesized M RM ER RESI dd ERRARE 3 4 Sweep Ub SES sae RUOREU NOE ERE UE IM Rs ERE I DM EC FEE 3 4 IIIS Tcp HEC ca ES E ee T 3 5 Sampler Based 3 5 Mixer Based Test StS TAGE RR EU ER
12. Jacket K KB Keyboard L a 2 Left I BE aee tete Label Left m M eiit eret Black Male Metric BNC Type of Connector Mach Machined BP Band Pass Manufacturer MISC Miscellaneous Bushing Millimeter Misi Metal Oxide 5 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Table 5 1 Reference Designations Abbreviations Multipliers and Manufacturer s Code List Mounting aae Reference System Metalic Radio Frequency T nies ld ee Radio Frequency Tisi ttes Thickness Teeth Interference N RGB Red Green Blue o Tantalum E A dn Number 2 2 TC L 1hermoplastic Negative Positive RPG Rotary Pulse Generator TID Thread Negative Transistor NY D uuu a usay Nylon RE e Rear TH usun u asya s Thick 0 Right THKNS Thickness DD Outside Diameter 5 2 22424 Thermal P Source TNG ants Tongue PAN Panel SCR Screw Silicon Controlled MPG nne Tapping Rectifier Pan Head
13. 8 17 Performing System 22 55 2 OEREN EEE ERE 8 18 Changing Error Term due ER ob ese eck 8 18 Handling Customized Error 8 18 Using the Error Term Table esce eee x Aaa db dark e 8 19 Saving Edited Emor TRCIT EXEC UK RE TR anon dd 8 20 Recalling a Custom Error Teri Ile Eat ORE ERES 8 20 Using th Sotware A ERR Ge RE AERA LER ORE RR RR 8 21 Selecting the Hardware for an 8510SX System 8 21 Examining Error Term Tables Exarcisa A Doa orden a anaes de 8 21 Computing Uncertainty Curves Exercise 2 24 4 8 22 Editing 8 23 Using a Custom Calibration Kit 8 48 22222222224 2 42 24 42 PU RR Ry REG GE 8 23 Using a Special Test Set Exercise JI iui l so dere hri ERU ORE RR oak Bh 8 24 Using Non Standard Test Cables Exercise 3 8 25 Using Non Ideal Test Device Exercise 34 8 27 Answers t
14. 8 99 Omit Isolation Measurement for 8350 Sources 8 99 Parameter Step Resolution Software Configuration 8 100 Verifieationm isola d esce heeds ea OR bol 8 100 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents 9 Contents Ad rp 8 100 Plat Label cnt ok 225 ex EP E PEN Our rU DES Rdg We oe IER 8 100 oat TEILTE 8 101 Plot Traces on the Controller Display isses o0 010625464 Re RRRER XX exa 8 101 Program Modifications 8 101 Ramp Mode Operation for 8 101 Remote or Local Operations 2 8 101 System Hang Ups Other 1 8 101 Test Set Channel Signal Path Specifications a1 b1 2 2 8 102 Test Set Rear Panel Extension LINKS esd PLE RE AG E DRE PER RE 8 102 TERRESTRE BL aeri o acad eu EG Ed ae Ap E RR od cx RR UOS P RU ER s i Rea 8 102 Unc
15. A iori PLATE BARES 3 16 Phase Lock ee nope de GH Rd 3 16 Pretune IF Count Sequente R F FERE 3 18 Main Phase Lock Seguente 25 uu a usus 3 19 Monitoring Phase Lak 225 3 19 Boro nd e 3 20 Phase Lock Learn REP ETE BEER 3 20 Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages 3 21 4 Main Troubleshooting Procedure ede PM TX EI ETE n wad en aa q punk anata 4 2 Troubleshooting QUINE MP 4 3 asas EEE ET EK Scrap dua E at anto Ue did 4 4 Self aci err 4 4 Running Emor N IS888868___ us uuu bx op eR RES 4 6 Unratined Power Falll ks bore ke sede ds ERR e RM XR URL QE bes 4 6 Der DEOS Faime MES as u ut uu aos EAE OUR E Red ce eel EGER d Rotae X Re ard Kee 4 6 Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational 4 8 Front and Haar Panel
16. 1 22 Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector 7 25 Procedure B 522255452 done CRI a ERES RE 7 28 8 Performance Verification and Specifications system d ood i eR ended e YE ck oe aed hie dade eens REN eS 8 3 lndividual System Components i e ena eases nes seer GE PEE GE 8 3 ur p PR k aba 8 3 Measurement Process 222222225425 005 inb 8 3 Measurement dace TEX I RE yaru u u yo 8 3 System Performance Verification 50540006 cds n hn e ERAS MER 8 5 Operational Checks Description 8 5 Frequeney Tests Description banded 8 5 Total System Uncertainty Test Description ce vanes p RENE REY EE dines 8 5 Recommended Process Checks 8 6 Spe EDO os iid Rd PUMA MH RI E e P RP 8 7 Software for Performance Verification and 8
17. Serial TTL Transistor Transistor Log Printed Circuit Single Torx Py ass Pad Palladium Pitch SHP uiii ts Shaft U Diameter Power Dissipation Perforated Silicon UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc Package Sink 4 2 1 Undercut PL Phase Lock Plain Plate sawaka Skirt Socket Plug PNP Positive Negative Positive SLDB Solder Ni ani baa Volt Transistor Polyurethane SMB Subminature type B VGA Video Graphics Adapter Snap on Conductor Pozidrive aimed Sample Processor SP Glenan Special Watt Width Polyvinyl Chloride Strapped Stop WD tete Width PAN ene Power Wirewound SUBMIN Subminature X Power OW s Switch Transducer R pite Sweep XS TR noss Transistor loue Right Synchronous 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 5 Replaceable Parts Table 5 2 Abbreviations Multipliers and Manufacturer s Code List Multipliers Abbreviation Prefix Multiple Abbreviation Prefix Multiple Abbr
18. penne secereesassccanorrscvecnsnsaenss t Factory User Diff Total Factory Ussr Diff Total Freq Meas d Uncert Meas d Meas d Phase Uncert GHz FA 81 1 al 1 500 1 01317 01115 00202 81254 1 91 87 98 59 6 72 58 28 2 000 01503 0i219 00284 01235 1 70 02 79 93 04 N 50 33 3 000 01791 01482 00293 01709 32 88 31 61 1 39 61 87 4 500 92206 01782 00523 01776 75 84 12 63 6 79 47 85 6 808 02280 01533 00756 01778 1 47 38 50 93 11 6 N 48 53 7 500 1 82180 01516 00584 091774 89 14 86 16 2 98 53 75 8 000 1 02 56 01220 00836 01774 1 104 17 105 72 1 55 55 16 9 008 01887 01441 00446 02124 131 76 108 12 23 66 680 20 10 500 01984 02020 00026 482125 1 158 87 139 57 29 49 73 77 12 000 1 02107 02779 00672 02125 1 163 47 171 06 25 47 68 65 13 500 02398 03423 01025 02127 138 67 147 41 8 74 58 77 15 000 02581 03584 00703 02131 1 116 05 109 97 6 09 N 46 65 i 05283 83251 80032 02134 1 94 42 69 98 24 44 N 41 41 23520 02459 01061 02135 1 78 96 44 87 26 88 40 17 03494 F 82144 2 68 40 79 1 02354 1 48 22 45 68 3 42
19. the PARAMETER area of the analyzer to further confirm that the system is ready for performance verification or operation The trace should drop to the bottom graticule of the display 2 Press AUTO in the RESPONSE area of the analyzer The trace should reappear near the center of the display probably with a change in scale 3 Connect an RF cable to ports 1 and 2 of the test set The trace should rise toward the top of the display 4 Press AUTO again The trace should reappear near the center of the display probably with another change in scale User Parameters Unratioed Power Check Refer to Unratioed Power Failures in the troubleshooting chapter for a procedure to check the unratioed power This concludes the basic system tests To thoroughly check the performance of the system refer to procedures in Chapter 8 Performance Verification and Specifications To operate the system refer to the operating manual In Case of Difficulty Incorrect operation can be indicated by Error messages or error codes on the analyzer display Abnormal system response or operation The most likely causes of problems for newly installed systems are poor cable connections or system bus address errors Switch off the line power to all instruments and carefully recheck all cable connections and GPIB addresses referring to Figure 9 6 Then power up the system instruments again in the correct sequence If the problem still exists
20. 5 An 85101C equipped with a liquid crystal display LCD requires C 08 XX or greater 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 101 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Other Failures Other Failures Overview This section presents additional tests that can be used for the small percentage of failures that are not resolved by the other troubleshooting sections Noisy Display Trace Test Whenever the noise on the trace is greater then 1 dB when you first turn the instrument on it means that the 85102 A18 ADC board may be faulty If the line power is cycled off then on again the noise may go away If this occurs there is probably a fault with the 85102 A18 ADC board although no apparent symptoms are present Also there may be no running error messages no self test failures and no service program test failures If the trace noise disappears when the power is cycled replace the 85102 A18 ADC board 20 Hz Sine Wave Test This test checks the 85102 17 sample and hold 85102 A18 ADC and the 85102 A19 ADC control board assemblies This procedure describes how to inject a signal into 85102 17 J1 J2 J3 and J4 in order to test the 17 sample and hold capability for each of the four synchronous detector inputs The procedure also tests the 85102 18 ADC linearity and ability to do analog to digital conversion If this test passes the 85102 19 ADC control board is also functioning properly A signal generator is require
21. Slow down the sweep time e Change ramp sweep to step sweep mode Change the number of points Change the frequency span Probable cause of failure Operator error The 8510C maybe operated in manual mode with the source power too high samplers are receiving excessive RF power e There is no 20 dB pad on the thru cable for an R T test set 8512 e IF gain is too high Access the IF gain test and control by pressing AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS IF GAIN Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Initialization Failed This message occurs when a disk will not initialize in the 85101C disk drive Most probable failure e 85101C disk drive disk media No IF Found This error is detected by the level detector and the 85102 A21 IF counter board This is done using an algorithm in the 85101C math CPU to calculate the IF frequency The A21 counter and the CPU check if the IF is within range and has enough power If not the CPU initiates a search mode that attempts to relocate the test set VTO harmonic to re establish the 20 MHz IF This message is displayed if the IF is not found or is not within range Probable cause of failure RFsource signal may be absent low in power or at an incorrect frequency 85102 A21 IF counter board Test set samplers Be sure that the test set A3 summing amplifier assembly has not biased the samplers off Measure the voltage
22. tapi 3 5 Sold Freguencu ul l u u l Ou hess di 3 5 Test oet Control E Aa E AY 3 6 Test Set Power On 2 2 gt 55 lt gt 95 3 6 Testset BE Palins 2 RR VET RN 3 6 52 n a at s ukhu 3 8 Signal Path 3 8 3 9 Phase Look Assembles bow anand 3 9 Miscellaneous Assemblies cose u u Se eta xc FORE sas 3 9 85107 Display PIeSSl Ed Ga RR dase ae 3 10 Processor Assembli amp g nx omes ope RU PR 3 10 Display Assemblies dees 3 10 Display RYE ER Hee CD AARON IX MSS EUER RU 3 11 Input Output Assemblies rst PRO RE IC PRA Nae dad 3 11 Power sr pr bx R3 bo ea PE EP MS Pee PIE 3 12 8510 Typical System Measurement 3 15 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents 1 Contents System Phase Lock Operation
23. 5 0 x1 4 Disconnect and then reconnect the cable to the test port Tighten the connection to the specified torque for the connector type 5 To add the data trace of the reconnected cable to memory press DISPLAY DATA MEMORY 1 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times to look for modes Modes appear when a harmonic of the source fundamental frequency is able to propagate through the cable or connector Any mode that appears each time the cable is connected and reconnected will affect measurement integrity Refer to the example plot in Figure 8 10 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 39 Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures NOTE The connector repeatability measurement should be done at the test port as well as at the end of the test port cable Figure 8 10 Connector Repeatability Examples 5 30 0 dB 4 19 8 Siberian gees LI Pan P FN al Myla ne f TAR AA WM IN Good Cable Bad Cable Dynamic Range Check This check requires a full 2 port measurement calibration with isolation and 1024 averages Since the total measurement uncertainty test also requires the same measurement calibration this check should be done in the first portion of that test NOTE Each system configuration has a different dynamic range specificatio
24. Remove the two screws and washers item 2 exposed by the previous step Remove the bezel item 3 from the frame Remove the trim strip from the top edge of the front frame by prying under it with a flat screwdriver Remove five screws two from the top edge of the frame two from the bottom edge of the frame and one from the side edge of the frame item 4 To Reassemble 7 Disconnect the two ribbon cables from the motherboard by pressing down and out on the connector locks Disconnect the disc drive power cable from the motherboard Remove the front panel by pulling it straight out of the frame To install a front panel reverse the preceding steps Torque all screws to 113 N cm 10in Ib 6 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Figure 6 1 Disk Drive Jumper Position 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 7 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Rotary Pulse Generator RPG Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver 7 16 in open end wrench or nut driver No 6 Allen wrench 1 16 in T 10 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 Perform the front panel 1 disassembly procedure 2 Using a 1 16 in Allen wrench loosen the screws in the RPG knob item 5 Pull the knob off the RPG shaft 3 Remove the PTFE s
25. 9 E8 E7 E6 ES 2 5 UNREG 15V UNREG 15 UNREG UNREG Next measure the four unregulated output voltages of the rectifier Measure at either side of the fuses see Figure 4 19 The voltages should measure approximately 22 Vdc out of the 15 V rectifier and 11 Vdc out of the 5 V rectifier If all the voltages low check the line voltage selector setting for the proper line voltage fthe A26 voltages are correct but one or more A15 LEDs are off or the voltages on A15 are incorrect the problem is in A15 or the interface between A26 and A15 If the voltages are present but not correct continue with the next paragraph 4 94 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Check Connector 1 The line voltage may be loaded down by the A26 rectifier Unplug P1 from A26J1 Refer to Table 4 11 and check the open end of P1 for unloaded ac secondary voltages from transformer T1 Table 4 11 P1 RMS Voltages Approximate Measure Between P1 Pins Wire Color ac Voltage RMS Approx 1 Yellow 37V 2 Yellow 1 Yellow 18 5V 4 Red 2 Yellow 18 5V 4 Red 3 Blue 19 5V 6 Blue 3 Blue 10V 5 Grey 6 Blue 10V 5 Grey e Ifthe voltages are approximately correct replace 26 e Ifthe voltages are incorrect the problem is in the power line module transformer 1 or the connections 8510C On Site Service Man
26. Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board Tests A5 Test 11 A7 Disc Controller Most likely cause of failure 71 0 board failure 50 e disk drive 50 Additional troubleshooting hints e Check the power supply to the disk drive If out of tolerance check the supplies on the power supply board In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests 1 A2 Test 12 A6 Nonvolatile memory Most likely cause of failure 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 51 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures nonvolatile memory board failure 70 Nonvolatile memory not initialized 30 Additional troubleshooting hints Make sure the A6 board is properly seated In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the Non Volatile Memory Board Tests A6 Test 13 IF Detector Data Most likely cause of failure 85102 interconnect cable missing or damaged 50 85102 A24 failure 20 85101 A71 0 board failure 2096 85102 failure 10 85102 motherboard or connector or
27. Determine Why the Red LED 10 Is On or Flashing If the red LED is on the problem may be in the A10 preregulator the A3 post regulator the 5 V digital supply or any of the assemblies obtaining power from the supplies Continue with Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse and then continue this procedure with the next paragraph Disconnect A10W1 Refer to Figure 4 15 Turn off the 85101C and disconnect cable A10W1 from the post regulator Turn on the 85101C fthe red LED goes out after removing A10W1 the 5 V digital supply A10 is verified The problem is probably in the A3 post regulator or one of the assemblies obtaining power from it Refer to Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies to verify that the inputs to A3 and associated assemblies are correct e Ifthe red LED is still on or flashing after removing A10W1 the problem is probably in the A10 preregulator or the 5 V digital supply Replace the A10 preregulator NOTE An 85101C with an LCD does not have W1 or A4 A10 A3 A10W1 A10W2 are the same in both CRT and LCD designs See Figure 5 12 on page 5 27 for a top view of an 85101C equipped with an LCD Figure 4 15 Location of 85101C Cables and Board Assemblies CRT Only A10 PREREGULATOR A10W2 A10W1 1 AS POST REGULATOR GSP 5 CPU A6 EEPROM A7 1 0 4 84 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power S
28. Post Regulator A3 filters and regulates the dc voltages received from the preregulator It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies It distributes regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the instrument Five green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies 65 V for CRT display not used for LCD 15V for the fan and dropped to 12 V for RS 232 ports 5 PREREG digital supply also called 5 VDIG e 12 V variable for the fan and fixed for RS 232 ports 5 DSK MTR for the disc drive motor The post regulator consists of these circuits among others Shutdown circuit Variable fan speed circuit Low power circuit 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 13 Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor Shutdown Circuit is triggered by overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage or overtemperature It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to be shut down The voltages that are not shut down are the 5 VDIG digital supply from the preregulator and the fan supplies If a fault occurs in any of the post regulated voltages except 65 V all but the 65 V and 5 VDIG shut down The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes But do so quickly and carefully or components may be damaged Variable Fan Speed Circuit and an air flow detector provide fan power as needed Fan power is derived
29. Sources other than those listed in the source compatibility table in the System Installation chapter are not compatible with the 8510 system communication Therefore there can be no source substitutions for a system performance verification Cable Substitution The test port cables specified for an 8510 system have been characterized for connector repeatability magnitude and phase stability with flexing return loss insertion loss and aging rate Since the performance of test port cables is a very significant contributor to the system performance substituting specified cables with cables that have not been carefully characterized will increase the uncertainty of your measurement verification If a substitute cable is used that is of lesser quality than characterized in the verification program the performance verification is no longer valid Refer to the plots in the cable checks earlier in this 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 87 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties chapter that show the difference in performance between good and bad cables It is highly recommended to periodically check test port cables to determine if they are good If the system verification is performed with non Agilent cables and fails but is then repeated with Agilent cables and passes the non Agilent cables are at fault It must be documented in the comments area of the performance verification printout that non Agilent cab
30. 0001 2 NUT HEX 6 32 28480 2420 0001 MP11 0570 0111 2 SCREW MACHINE 6 32 28480 0570 0111 05 1854 0072 1 TRANSISTOR NPN 2N3054 SI 0 66 PD 25W 28480 1854 0072 R1 0764 0016 2 RESISTOR 1K 5W MO TC 0 200 28480 0764 0016 R2 0764 0016 RESISTOR 1K 5W MO 0 200 28480 0764 0016 0764 0015 2 RESISTOR 560 5W TC 0 200 28480 0764 0015 R4 0764 0015 RESISTOR 3 3 PW TC 0 400 28480 0764 0015 R5 0811 1672 6 RESISTOR 560 5W MO TC 0 200 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R6 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R7 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R8 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R9 0811 2048 1 RESISTOR 25 15W PW 0 90 91637 RH25 T2 1 4 F R13 0811 1667 1 RESISTOR 1 2 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 1R2 J R15 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R16 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J RT1 0837 0126 1 THERMISTOR DISC 1 4 4 28480 0837 0126 U1 1820 2075 IC MISC TTLLS 01295 SN74LS245N U2 1826 0061 IC TEMP XDCR 0 52 PKG 24355 AD590KH W1 2 8151 0013 2 WIRE 22 1X22 28480 8151 0013 X1 1200 0639 1 SOCKET IC 20 DIP DIP SLDR 28480 1200 0639 XA2 XA24 1251 7882 23 CONNECTOR PC EDGE 2 ROWS 28480 1251 7882 5 52 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 28 85102 Motherboard 1 of 2 R16 R8 R7 10 11 R6 2 5 8 R5 2 places
31. 2 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 3 1 Theory of Operation Overview Overview This chapter describes the operation of the 8510 network analyzer system The Base System describes one complete system in broad terms This is the basis of all 8510 systems Some systems are more specialized and complex such as millimeter systems and pulse systems These are explained in separate system manuals However disconnecting the specialized components of most 8510 systems will reduce them to the base system described here Other parts of this chapter describe the individual instruments within the system in detail sufficient to aid troubleshooting In this manual sources and test sets are troubleshot to the instrument level The IF detector and display processor are troubleshot to the assembly level For additional source or test set information refer to their manuals The final sections of this chapter describe a typical measurement sequence and explain the system phase locked loop NOTE In this chapter RF signal and RF signal path refer to the main RF signal from the source Depending on its place in the path the RF may be RF one of two IFs or a digitized signal 3 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation The Base System The Base System The 8510 network analyzer base system used in this example consists of a source a test set the 85102 IF detector and the 85101 display proc
32. 4 This is the same test as self test 10 except for one difference If there is an error it displays the expected and received data rather than just the fact that it is faulty due to an error Circle Test Exercises Multiplier 5 This sets up a data pattern to the multiplier bus in order to troubleshoot the multiplier circuits This test was designed for factory troubleshooting only Signature Analysis Multiplier 6 Signature analysis is intended for factory use only This test generates a pattern that can be used to check math processor signatures on the 5 CPU 4 108 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program Signature Analysis Address Bus 7 Signature analysis is intended for factory use only This test provides a stimulus for checking signatures on the address bus Signature Analysis Data Bus 8 Signature analysis is intended for factory use only Provides a stimulus for checking signatures on the Display Generator data bus 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 109 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 85101 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests A1 A2 A7 The A7 1 0 board is located in the card cage The A1 front panel board includes the keyboard and 2 is the disk drive assembly These assemblies work together to perform front panel commands and disk media transfer operations Disc Controller Bus Test A7 1 This test reads and writes to registers on the A7 1
33. Entering S parameters of the DUT You can edit the S parameter values for your specific device under test Refer to the steps below 1 2 Press System Uncert in the Main menu Locate the S parameter data fields in the middle of the display Notice the default values of 511 522 0 and 521 512 To enter an S11 value press Previous until the asterisk beside S11 lin blinks indicating the data field is activated Use the keyboard to enter the new S11 linear value 8 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance Move to the next data field and press Next or Previous as needed to edit the remaining S parameter data fields and to enter the device length in cm Notice that 511 S22 are in linear units while S21 S12 are in dB Press Done to display the DUT s system uncertainty Entering User Labels or Comments on Plots If desired use the features in this software to enter your own titles or comments on plots The label you enter appears on the 31 or 4 line of the title at the top of the plot 1 gc Press System Uncert in the Main menu Move to User Label 1 and press Previous until the asterisk in the data field blinks From the keyboard enter the label or title you want to appear on the output If desired repeat the above two steps to enter User Label 2 Press Done when you are finished entering user
34. The phase lock cycle occurs at every start frequency at every band crossing and at every point in step mode as follows Pretune Phase Lock Sequence pretunes a harmonic to the source frequency 20 MHz locks the frequency and checks for proper lock If unsuccessful PRETUNE FAILURE Pretune IF Count Sequence counts the IF searches for it if unsuccessful and checks the harmonic and sideband following a valid count If unsuccessful NO IF FOUND Main Phase Lock Sequence holds the pretune frequency locks the main phase locked loop and checks for a 20 MHz IF If unsuccessful PHASE LOCK FAILURE If phase lock is lost during a sweep PHASE LOCK LOST If the VTO reaches the end of its range before band crossing OVER RANGE 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 21 Theory of Operation Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages 3 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 4 1 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Overview eC Overview This Main Troubleshooting Procedure provides a systematic series of checks to follow if the 8510 system appears to be faulty If you follow these checks in the sequence given here it will help you to isolate the cause of a problem in the least possible time The checks in this main section are relatively brief Wherever a problem is indicated you will be referred to more detailed information in the following sections The service flowchart is an abbrevia
35. 00814 97 87 31 21 00968 01351 66 02 180 00 Note Uncertainties for frequency data points below 500 Mnz PASSED 511 Verification Measurement of the 70 ut Atlennatar do not apply when used with 6512 or 6514 test sets Table 8 10 Comparing Measurement Uncertainties Freq GHz Total Uncertainty Factory System Measurement Uncertainty Uncertainty 0 045 0 01348 0 00484 0 00864 1 000 0 01242 0 00378 0 00864 2 000 0 01241 0 00378 0 00863 8 50 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Table 8 11 Table for Comparing Measurement Uncertainties Freq GHz Total Uncertainty Factory Uncertainty System Measurement Uncertainty 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 51 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Interpreting the Performance Verification Results Two example printouts are used to explain the various columns Example 8 1 Performance Verification S21 Measurement HPBS1 B PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 19 11 47 10 Aug usssas ss s sa Verif Std 20 dB ttenuator Ser 01371 Verif Kit 5053 3 5mm Ser Netuork Analyzer HP85108 S N Test Set HPSSISA S N Source S N Calibration Kit 850520 S N Calibration Technique BL Test Por
36. 1 After editing error term tables press the Done key to save edited terms 2 From the Main menu press Edit Specs Save Eterms 3 Enter a file name and directory if needed for the new data in the space provided NOTE To enter a file name press Next or Previous until the blinking asterisk appears beside the blank input field The blinking asterisk indicates that you can edit the current field The program allows you to choose a previously entered file name or type in a new one Use the Next and Previous keys to select another file name Recalling a Custom Error Term File After saving the custom file to disk you can recall it for use whenever the system you plan to use matches your current hardware configuration To recall a customized error term table file use the steps below 1 From the Main menu press Edit Specs Recall Eterms 2 Editthe file name and directory if necessary 3 Press Done to retrieve the file At this point the user can make any of the following choices Edit more specifications Return to the Main menu and choose System Specs System Uncertainty or Verify System To use edited specifications you need to select user parameters The user parameters are available within the following menus nthe System Specs menu for table type choose User Parameters Inthe menu under Compute Using select User Parameters nthe Verify System menu press Select Standard t
37. 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board Tests A5 Test 2 Ab Processor RAM Most likely cause of failure e 5 RAM failure 80 Ad processor board failure 20 8 motherboard trace connector failure 1 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Remove A4 A14 A6 and A7 from the instrument and rerun self test 2 If the failure clears suspect one of the boards removed In the main Service Functions menu press 2 2 2 MARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board Tests A5 Test 3 A7 Data Bus Most likely cause of failure e A7I 0 board failure 80 Ad processor board failure 20 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 1 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Minimize the system remove the A6 EEPROM board and A4 A14 graphic signal processor board Rerun test 3 If removing A6 or A4 A14 appears to fix the problem suspect A4 A14 A6 and A7 The interrupt circuits on A7 may be faulty but only appear faulty with A6 and A4 A14 installed In the main Service Functions menu press 2 2 to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests 1 A2 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 49 Main
38. 25 IN ID 375 IN GRV OD 28480 0400 0010 4 2950 0043 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 3 8 32 THD 094 IN THK 00000 Order by desc 5 7121 2380 1 LABEL SERIAL NUMBER 28480 7121 2380 6 7120 4835 1 LABEL INFORMATION 75 IN WD2 IN LG PPR 28480 7120 4835 7 3050 1094 1 WASHER FL MTLC 1 2 IN 505 IN ID 28480 3050 1094 8 00310 48801 2 SHOULDERED WASHER 28480 00310 48801 9 1251 2942 4 LOCK SUBMIN D CONN 28480 1251 2942 10 5021 8540 1 LOCK FOOT L RT 28480 5021 8540 11 0515 1402 2 SCREW SMM3 5 8 PCPNTX 00000 Order by desc 12 85102 00056 1 REAR PANEL 28480 85102 00056 13 0590 1251 5 NUT SPCLY 15 32 32 THD 1 IN THK 562 WD 00000 Order by desc 14 2190 0102 5 WASHER LK INTL T 15 32 IN 472 IN ID 28480 2190 0102 15 3160 0300 1 FINGER GUARD 28480 3160 0300 16 0510 0110 3 NUT CAP 6 32 THD 281 IN THK 312 00000 Order by desc 17 2190 0006 2 WASHER LK HLCL NO 6 141 IN ID 28480 2190 0006 18 2190 0007 4 WASHER LK INTL NO 6 141 IN ID 28480 2190 0007 19 2360 0205 2 SCREW MACH 6 32 75 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 20 3050 0227 4 WASHER FL MTLC NO 6 149 IN ID 28480 3050 0227 21 85102 20057 1 HEAT SINK 28480 85102 20057 22 5040 7221 2 FOOT REAR 28480 5040 7221 23 0515 2317 3 SCREW SMM3 5 12 PCPNTX 00000 Order by desc 24 2360 0115 36 SCREW MACH 6 32 312 16 PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 25 5021 8538 1 LOCK FOOT L LFT 28480 5021 8538 08360 60026 1 BD ASSY FP FLT BNC 28480 08360 60026 5 48
39. 4 115 IN ID 28480 2190 0019 3 2260 0001 2 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 4 40 THD 094 IN THK 28480 2260 0001 4 85102 00049 1 SUB PANEL 28480 85102 00049 85102 20072 1 AIR DAM 28280 85102 20072 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 51 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 17 85102 Motherboard 1 of 2 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 0180 3017 1 CAPACITOR FXD 045F 75 105VDC AL 28480 0180 3017 C2 0180 0453 1 CAPACITOR FXD 8700UF 75 100VDC AL 28480 0180 0453 C3 0180 2671 2 CAPACITOR FXD 012F 75 100VDC AL 00853 5001232U030AC2A C4 0180 2671 CAPACITOR FXD 012F 75 100VDC AL 00853 5001232U030AC2A C5 0180 1731 CAPACITOR FXD 4 7UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D475X9050B2 C6 0180 0116 CAPACITOR FXD 6 8UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D685X9035B2 C7 0180 1731 CAPACITOR FXD 4 7UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D475X9050B2 C8 0180 0116 CAPACITOR FXD 6 8UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D685X9035B2 C9 0160 4084 CAPACITOR FXD 1UF 200VDC CER 28480 0160 4084 J1 1251 5800 1 CONNECTOR 26 M POST 28480 1251 5800 J2 1251 3901 1 CONNECTOR 15 M POST 28480 1251 3901 MP2 1251 5595 5 POLARIZING KEY POST CONN 28480 1251 5595 MP4 0360 0124 3 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 MP5 0360 0124 2 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 MP8 2200 0105 2 SCREW SM 440 312PNPD 00000 Order by Desc MP9 1205 0421 1 HT SK TO66 28480 1205 0421 MP10 2420
40. 5 0 10MM FL PD 28480 0515 1132 11 5041 8820 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP REAR 28480 5041 8820 12 5062 3704 1 STRAP HANDLE 28480 5062 3704 13 5062 3842 1 COVER SIDE HANDLE 28480 5062 3842 14 5021 5806 1 REAR FRAME 28480 5021 5806 15 0515 2086 16 MACH SCREW 4 0 7MM FLP TX 28480 0515 2086 corner struts part of motherboard card cage assy part number 85101 60300 5 36 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 18 85101C Cabinet Parts with LCD 4 PLACES e 2 PLACES 7 8 PLACES 8 2 PLACES 7 lt 5 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 37 55428 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 19 8510C Cable Assemblies with LCD W27 W28 W29 W30 W65 55436 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number W27 8120 1348 2 CABLE ASSY 18 AWG 3 CNDCT BLK JKT 28480 8120 1348 W28 8120 3445 1 GPIB CABLE 1 METER 28480 8120 3445 W29 08510 60101 1 CBL AY IF DISPLAY 28480 08510 60101 W30 8120 2582 2 CBL AY BNC 48 INCHES 28480 8120 2582 W65 24542G 2 CABLE SERIAL RS 232 28480 24525G 5 38 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 39 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Part
41. A permanently off pixel is always dark and is displayed against a background of its own color How to Identify a Faulty Display The display test has a sequence of red green blue white and black backgrounds One or more of the following symptoms indicate a faulty display complete rows or columns of permanently on or permanently off pixels more than five permanently on or permanently off pixels not to exceed a maximum of two red or blue or three green two or more consecutive permanently on or permanently off pixels permanently on or permanently off pixels less than 6 5 mm apart If any of these symptoms occur replace the display Display Test Patterns Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments diagnostics and troubleshooting They may be used for field service as needed Test patterns are executed by pressing the following keys SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 2 2 MARKER 1 MARKER 3 MARKER 7 Z MARKER and enter the test number 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 35 Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures Table 4 3 Tests Pattern Descriptions Test Name Description Test Pat 1 Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output of the A15 display and checks for color purity Test Pat 2 4 Displays a red green and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the display and also the ability to independently control each color
42. A1201 1211 A125 9 The following prompt is displayed gt gt gt gt gt COARSE ADJUST lt lt lt lt lt ADJUST 11 TO PEAK TRACE 8510 10 Refer to Figure 7 8 for the location of L1 Adjust L1 so that the horizontal line on the analyzer display is at its maximum vertical location 11 Press CONTINUE 7 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment 12 The following prompt is displayed gt gt gt gt gt FINE ADJUST lt lt lt lt lt RE ADJUST L1 PEAK TRACE 8510 CRT re center trace with marker key if necessary 13 Repeat step 10 If necessary press ZMARKER on the analyzer to re center the trace 14 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE on the controller to return to the menu 15 If either of the following prompts is displayed check the equipment setup for configuration errors or refer to the troubleshooting chapter AMPLIFIER OUTPUT lt 30 dBm TOO LOW REPAIR BOARD OR TEST SETUP or AMPLIFIER OUTPUT gt 20 dBm TOO HIGH REPAIR BOARD OR TEST SETUP Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to tighten the screws when reinstalling the board into the mainframe loose screws can cause crosstalk in the instrument Also be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration e 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 23 Adjustments Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustme
43. After the 45 MHz data is loaded press Yes If your system does not operate at 45 MHz or if your verification kit does not contain device characterization data for 45 MHz press Bypass If you do not know if your verification kit disc has data for 45 MHz the software will automatically detect whether or not the disc contains the data 7 Insert the calibration kit data disc into the analyzer disc drive Press Resume 8 Measure the environmental temperature and record the results on the test record at the end of this chapter 9 After allowing a 1 hour warm up perform a full 2 port measurement calibration by connecting the calibration devices and pressing the corresponding keys on the analyzer Do not hold the calibration devices when the analyzer is measuring them Use a TRL calibration whenever possible Otherwise for the loads portion of the calibration use the sliding and lowband loads or the broadband load for economy calibration kits Refer to the operating manual for a detailed measurement calibration procedure NOTE If you are using a TRL measurement calibration technique be extremely careful not to move the test port cables Cable movement between measurement calibration and verification may introduce enough error to cause a verification failure If the highest accuracy measurement calibration is desired Agilent recommends that you place the cables in a fixture to prevent cable movement Save the measurement calibrat
44. Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier Four green LEDs should be on V Measure at fuses 22 V and 11 Vdc v Check line voltage selector Check Connector P1 v Unplug 26 4 80 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Disconnect the 85101 IF display interconnect cable at the 85101C display processor rear panel e Ifan error message appears on the display refer to Running Error Messages Ifthe fan is not working refer to Fan Troubleshooting near the end of this section Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator Turn on the 85101C display processor and look at the rear panel of the analyzer Check the two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the A10 preregulator casting by looking through the holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch see Figure 4 12 Normally the bottom green LED is on and the top red LED is off fthese LEDs are normal then A10 is 95 verified Continue this procedure at Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post Regulator e Ifthe red LED is on or flashing then refer Determine Why the Red LED on A10 Is On or Flashing e Ifthe green LED is not on steadily then the line voltage is missing or is insufficient to power the 85101C Continue this procedure at Determine Why the Green LED on A10 Is Not On Steadily in this se
45. Ef EfsS11 522 521512 2 521 Random Ro 521 Ctm2 t 111 2 Crm2 22 2 Rt 521 m y t 2 2 Crr1S11 2 Crr2S22 Nt EfntS21 Drift amp Stability Dm2b2S21 where Crt2 Connector repeatability transmission port 2 Crr2 Connector repeatability reflection port 2 Efnt effective noise on trace Efnf effective noise floor connector repeatability reflection Crt1 connector repeatability transmission Ctm1 cable 1 transmission magnitude stability Crm1 cable 1 reflection magnitude stability Ctm2 cable 2 transmission magnitude stability Crm2 cable 2 reflection magnitude stability Dms1 drift magnitude C source to port Efs effective source match error Eft effective transmission tracking error Efl effective load match error Efc effective crosstalk error 8 78 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties The detailed equation for each of the above terms is derived from the signal flow model in Figure 8 18 Due to the complexity of combining these terms manually the performance verification specifications software calculates the terms for you However the software makes some ideal device assumptions e For 11 and 522 uncertainties the device is one port device therefore the value of 521 and 512 are oo dB The v
46. Flashing LEDs on A3 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A3 post regulator is protecting power supplies from over current conditions by repeatedly shutting them down This may be caused by supply loading on A3 or on any other assembly in the 85101C Remove the A3 Post Regulator from Its Motherboard Connector Turn off the 85101C Remove post regulator A3 from its motherboard connector but keep the A10 to A3 cable A10W1 connected to A3 If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT remove display power cable W1 see Figure 4 15 Short to chassis ground any of the three common GND pins located on the top edge of the A3 post regulator Turn the 85101C on e post regulator green LEDs other than 5 V PREREG is still off or flashing continue with this procedure e Ifall LEDs are now on steadily except for the 5 V PREREG LED the A10 preregulator and post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at post regulator A3 Continue this procedure with Remove More Assemblies Check the A3 Fuses and Voltages If any of LEDs for the following supplies are completely off first check their fuses 65 V 12V 5 V DSK MTR The fuses for these supplies are all located on the top edge of the A3 post regulator board assembly Their supply circuits test points and current ratings are listed in Table 4 10 The part numbers of these fuses are in 4 88 8510C On Site Servic
47. N D N N N N N N N N N N N D N N N N N N C DGND LSHDN LPRST LNMI DGND CLK8MHZ DGND DGND MOTOR 5V MOTOR 5V MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 5V 5V 5V 5V DGND DGND LRFRINT LMBMINT LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE LLDS LUDS DGND DGND uM M AS AS AN AN IS IS AS IIS IS IS IS AS IS IIS ISIN IS IS HIS IS IIS IN IS IN IN IS IN IN IN IN IN S AS AN IN IS IS IS IS IIS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IN IN IN IN IN IN S lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt To Page 20f2 ss425c 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram LCD 1 of 2 To Page 1 of 2 EGULATOR PUT OUT DRIVE POWER MOTOR SV MOTORRTN SPARES SPARE 3
48. Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance Verification The performance verification software calculates the total measurement uncertainty for each measurement and determines if the system being verified meets that total uncertainty limit The results of the performance verification can be immediately viewed and printed When an 8510 system passes this test it does not ensure the system meets all the performance specifications However it does show the system being verified measures the same devices with the same results as a factory system that was verified in bottoms up approach The Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure is located later in this chapter Recommended Process Checks Description To assure the continued correct operation of the analyzer system the following process checks should be done periodically 8 6 Recertify your calibration kit at the interval stated in your calibration kit manual or more often depending on the amount of use Review the connector care information summarized on the blue connector care card Consult a calibration kit manual for more detailed information to ensure that you are using correct connection techniques Record the system raw error terms and compare them to periodically generated lists of the same raw error terms By tracking the error terms you can monitor when the system is beginning to drift and use the data to help troubleshoot the system Refer to th
49. R9 R13 W2 R15 Q5 MP9 RT1 U2 Ci R1 C2 R2 J2 C3 MP4 R3 C4 C8 C6 R4 c5 L S HZHH pp ERES MP4 CE XA10 xA9 ol el MP2 XA25 5 places ii xazi xas XA20 XAS XA19 Xu 18 XA17 orm XA16 ss442c J1 X1 U1 c9 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 53 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 18 Motherboard 2 of 2 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A25 85102 60229 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY MOTHER 28480 85102 60229 The following parts are not supplied when A25 is ordered A251 25 2 A25C3 A25C4 2501 2502 A2503 A2504 MP3 0360 0124 4 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 MP6 0360 0124 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 5 54 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 29 85102 Motherboard 2 of 2 8 places 2 places 900000000000000000000 90990000 0000000 00 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 55 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 19 85102 Cabinet Parts Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5062 3735 1 COVER TOP 18 28480 5062 3735 2 5062 3757 2 COVER ASSEMBLY SIDE 28480 5062 3757 3 0515 2086 8 SCREW SMM4 0 7 PCFLTX 28480 0515 2086 4 5021 8403 1 FRAME FRONT 28480 502
50. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MENU HARDWARE CONFIG PROGRAM RESET PRIOR MENU MAIN MENU SOFTWARE CONFIG 8 56 Menu Map of System Specifications and Uncertainties Program SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM SPECS SYSTEM UNCERT VERIFY SYSTEM QUIT PROGRAM SEE HOW TO VERIFY SYSTEM PERFORMANCE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION TABLE MENU SELECT OUTPUT TABLE NUMBER TABLE TYPE TABLE FORMAT OUTPUT DEVICE ETERM DIRECTION TOTAL UNCERTAINTY DYNAMIC ACCURACY MENU SELECT PARAMETER FORMAT UNCERTAINTY COMPUTATIONS PARAMETER STEP RESOLUTION OUTPUT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT ADDRESSES FOR SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS AND PEN NUMBERS AND COLORS 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program 1 Perform the How to Load the Software procedure located earlier in this chapter 2 To specify which type of system specifications you want to generate press System Specs The active highlighted window is used to choose the following The table you want type of table data sheet or specifications e table format linear or dB The output device display or printer The Eterm direction forward reverse or forward reverse The data sheet table is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded The tables can be generated in two diffe
51. TRIM SWEEP and adjust the front panel knob to position the highest frequency bandswitch transition point on the reference line Refer to the figure below Record the maximum trace variation on the test record located at the end of this chapter Figure 8 14 Typical Trace Variation for 8340 41 Swept Frequency Accuracy gr m 4 WORST CASE SWEPT FREQUENCY ACY 13 MHz HERE START 0 045000908 GHz STOP 25 500000900 GHz In Case of Difficulty If the measured values do not meet the specifications listed on the test record refer to the source manual for adjustment and troubleshooting instructions 8 46 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure The figure below shows a menu map of the performance verification program Step by step instructions follow Figure 8 15 START LOAD BASIC LOAD 5 5 8510 ENTER DATE AND TIME HARDWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT HARDWARE HP8510 TEST SET SOURCE CAL KIT CABLES VERIF KIT ETC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MENU HARDWARE CONFIG PROGRAM RESET PRIOR MENU MAIN MENU SOFTWARE CONFIG Performance Verification Program SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM SPECS SYSTEM UNCERT VERIFY SYSTEM QUIT PROGRAM SEE HOW TO VERIFY SYSTEM PERFORMANCE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION TABLE MENU SELECT OUTPUT TA
52. Test Pat 5 Displays an all black screen This is used to check for stuck pixels Test Pat 6 Displays a 16 step gray scale for verifying that the A14 display interface board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color in this case white The output comes from the RAM on the GSP board it is then split The signal goes through a video DAC and then to an external monitor or through some buffer amplifiers and then to the internal LCD If the external display looks good but the internal display is bad then the problem may be with the display or the cable connecting it to the display interface board This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits Test Pat 7 Displays the following seven colors Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta and White Test Pat 8 Displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A14 display interface board to display 15 colors plus white The numbers written below each bar indicate the tint number used to produce that bar 0 and 100 pure red 33 pure green 67 pure blue This pattern is intended for use with an external display Test Pat 9 Displays the three primary colors Red Green and Blue at four different intensity levels You should see 16 color bands across the screen Starting at the left side of the display the pattern is Black four bands of Red each band increasing in in
53. The 8510 self test sequence is a series of fourteen individual diagnostic tests that constitute the major part of the test menu The test menu also contains four system commands three disk commands and two service commands This section explains all of these tests and commands beginning with the self tests The self tests sequentially test most of the buses and circuits of the 85101C display processor and a few circuits of the 85102 IF detector The self test sequence is initiated automatically at power up but can also be run manually If the 8510 passes all of the tests in the sequence it loads and runs the operating system program How to Use This Section How you use this section depends on your situation These are the major topics Self Test and Other Failures describes what happens prior to and during the self test sequence It gives an example of a failed self test describes the power up self test sequence and explains what subtests are How to Identify a Self Test Failure tells how to spot a self test and subtest failure How to Troubleshoot a Self Test Failure explains how to troubleshoot the 8510 when a self test fails How to Access the Test Menu and Run a Self Test tells how to access and run one or all of the self tests System Disc and Service Commands explains how to access and use these commands Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting lists all of the self tests shows the most likely causes of failures with percentages an
54. later in this chapter Preconfigured Systems If the system is shipped in the system cabinet inspect for loosened connections and conclude the installation procedure with Checking System Operation later in this chapter Systems that Are Not Preconfigured 1 Place the empty cabinet in the operating area Then lower the feet at the bottom corners of the cabinet to prevent movement 2 Remove the instrument feet and pull out instruction card assemblies if any 3 Attach the rack mount flanges with the instrument placed partly on the support shelves of the cabinet Figure 9 3 Attaching Flanges to Instruments with and without Handles Slide each instrument into the cabinet and secure it with the dress screws provided See Figure 9 4 for a recommended cabinet configuration 9 12 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Recommended Cabinet Configuration Figure 9 4 illustrates a recommended system cabinet configuration Shown is a typical configuration of a standard 85107B system installed in an 85043C system rack Figure 9 4 85107B System in 85043C System Rack Typical Si apitont Technologies SYSTEMS 4 RU 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 25 RU AVAILABLE RACK MOUNTING 3 RU 85102B IF DETECTOR SPACE 1 RU FILLER PANEL 3 RU 8517B TEST SET 1 RU 1 75 INCHES RU Rack Unit 1 RU EE COEM SURFACE 1 RU FLLERPANEL PANEL 4 RU 83651B SOURCE 3 RU FILLE
55. the check step is performed If the check step is successful the main phase lock is released If the check step is not successful the search continues for two more sequences The IF may not be counted at the default location for several reasons It could be out of range or too weak Source linearity including band cross locations and sweep point quantization errors on the sweep ADC board are the two major sources of error in the location of the IF Bandpass filtering on the sampler preamps in the test set limits the available search window to about 20 MHz 10 MHz The filter is down about 15 dB at the edges Check Step Sequence algorithm determines 1 whether the IF is a product of the RF and 2 whether the IF is the correct sideband of the desired harmonic The algorithm initiates a second pretune to move the IF towards 20 MHz by approximately 5 MHz If the comb frequency is on the high side the correct side the IF decreases The processor begins the main phase lock sequence described below If the comb line is on the low side the wrong side the IF increases When the wrong sideband is detected the processor pretunes the IF 40 MHz higher Then it repeats the check step For example assume the first count is 23 MHz If the comb frequency is on the high side the check step count is 18 MHz it has moved toward and through 20 MHz If the comb frequency is on the low side of the RF the check step count is 28 MHz it has moved awa
56. verifying the shipment 9 6 vertical position and focus adjustments 7 10 voltage line 9 11 voltages A10 preregulator output 4 107 A26 rectifier 4 113 A3 post regulator 4 102 fan 4 111 hazardous locations 2 4 VTO over range 4 82 Index Index w wording in verification program tables definitions 8 97 Index
57. 0 000 0 000 low Freon Slooe Source io oort 8 20 5 00 0 20 0 99 Loss Dc Source to porti dB 21041 7 61 6 94 111 52 Loss sar F ghz Source to port dB iLfst 1 24 4 72 4 7 Drift Mag deg c Src to port dB Dms 0 0202 0 0090 0 0002 0 0 Drift Ph deg c Sre to port deg Dpsl 1618 1518 7518 1518 Orift Ph deg c F ghz Src pt deg 1 0146 014 0146 Connector Repeat Refl port dB iCrrt Connector Repeat Trans porti dB Connector Repeat Refi nort dB iCrr2 Connector Repeat Trans port dB Loss Dc port Cable Loss sqr iF ghz port Cable Loss Dc port Cable dB 3 Loss sqr F ghz port Cable dB IL Fle i Te SS aS Sa Sue sum re ase m le Sere se i Cable Refl Mag stab port dB iCrm i 493 10 Cable Trns Mag stab portt dB Ctm 200129 0013 0942 Cable Ph F ghz stab pt deg GHz Cpfl 0235 eI 8116 Cable Refl Mag stab port dB Cre2 54 00 43 10 44 50 Cable Trns Mag stab port dB iCim2 1 0010 0219 0042 0941 Cable Ph F ghz stab pt2 0234 012 0115 ez Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the test ports The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for The systematic error terms without measurement calibration including the drift connector and cable error
58. 0 that control the disk drive Disc Write Read Test A2 A7 2 This tests the status of the disk drive adjusts to high or low density disks and then writes and reads to one sector of the disk on each side It writes again in another location then reads back everything and verifies If there is no disk in the drive or if it is write protected then the status will be displayed and the test halted Timer Test A7 3 This tests all three sections of the programmable timer It is set up with a known value and then read back to see that it has counted down Serial 1 0 Test A7 4 A special interconnect electronic tool is required to perform this test This tool is not available to the field This tests the bi directional communication of the serial 1 0 ports on the rear panel of the 85101C Data flow is from RS 232 Port 1 to RS 232 Port 2 and then the data is sent back to RS 232 Port 1 Timer Clock Peripheral TCP Tests A7 5 This is a combination of seven tests that check out and set the TCP chip for beeper and time date functions CPU to GPIB HP IB Test A7 6 This routine creates a test pattern then initializes the GPIB chip to cause an internal echo of the data The resulting data is compared to the original and error messages are generated The above sequence is repeated for each port Nothing should be connected to the rear panel during this test Bidirectional GPIB HP IB Test A7 7 Tests the ability of th
59. 14 RPG 22 RPG 2 LED DRIVE 8 LED ORIVE 8 gt 14 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR BLUE f A7 1 0 BOARD INPUT OUTPUT w6 CREEN VGA EXTERNAL DISPLAY 015 DRIVE K KEYBOARD B RPG INTERFACE Q FRONT PANEL n VIDEO RED CONTROLLER INTERFACE amp PROGRAMMABLE LED DRIVER CONTROL DAC To 85101C VGA Interface IF DETECTOR TIMER HORIZONTAL SYNC on Reor Ponel INTERFACE T VERTICAL SYNC 1 1 2 DATA DIGITAL GSP CONTROL a 4 T INTERFACE CLOCKS U 16 ADDRESS BLUE B0 83 re 7 1 1 GREEN GO G3 IF DISPLAY ADDRESS 1 U RED R0 R5 INTERCONNECT ISRO N 2 PIXEL INTERFACE A8 SECURITY KEY 5 VRAM PROCESSING HORIZONTAL SYNC Lege DATA Q SELF TEST ADDRESS 5 PROCESSOR L VERTICAL SYNC DECODE INTERFACE 1 NETWORK ANALYZER w p 2 OPTION 010 TIME DOMAIN GPIB 2 gt 3 NOT USED BUS 1 4 NOT USED BACKL IGHT lt oie 44 BONER CONTROL es l V 833 w RS 232 1 gt RS 232 e se INTERRUPT HwuLesv 7 CONTROLLER UM CLOCK GENERATOR BREE IND L 2 5 P2 95 RS 232 2 K CLOCK GENE A10 wa REAL TIME CLOCK AS PROCESSOR ug INTERFACE A15 LCD ASSEMBLY L 1 8 sec LGINT 8 SELF TEST INTERCONNECT k 1 gt ROOT IF IRIMARE FT i p2 15 1 2 69 2 60 F COLOR LCD L SHON 10 10 10 PROCESSOR INVERTER 3 A10 w 23 S 7 5 A6 NON VOLAT
60. 2 Figure 8 2 Equipment Setup Block Diagram 30 dB 10 dBm 91 30dB by 20 dB 20dB 10 dBm 40dBm thru gt lt gt lt 15dBm amp b2 Port Port 80dB 2 30 dB 40dBm 25dB 65dBm 92 LO Input 8 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial For the hardware configuration choose the following V 8511A test set V source V Nocalibration kit X cables V No verification kit Use the broad band load calibration method Assume the following Effective directivity of 30 dB Reflection tracking of 0 011 Source match of 25 dB Load match of 30 dB 1 Task Plot the S21 magnitude uncertainty uppercase uncertainty 1 Question What is the difference between this result and the lowercase uncertainty Refer to Table 8 6 for the answer TIP Modify the effective terms and the raw loss terms Don t forget to select User Parameters when you start generating the S21 magnitude uncertainty curves Using Non Standard Test Cables Exercise 3c You are using a pair of non standard 3 5 mm flexible cables You want to approximate the measurement uncertainty for an 8510SX system over the system s entire frequency range While you cannot guarantee the results you can change certain error terms to provide satisfactory results 1 Question Assuming you have specified No Cables in the Hardware Configuration menu which er
61. 4539 12 171 2 3873 20 035 3 0203 35 128 5 8985 78 081 8 688 180 000 12 1421 180 0998 16 1343 180 000 20 5116 180 008 Mag dB 40 50 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 15 8510C On Site Service Manual 521 Dynamic Accuracy dB 521 Dynamtc Accuracy Deg 882 001 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts 21 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Plots S21 MAGNITUDE DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS 8518 HP8517R 5 5 SL HPBSI33F 1 Nov 1998 13 02 16 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 20 28 40 DUT Length 10 8 511 0 0 S12 S21 S22 S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref S21 PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS 8519 5 HP85856RH SL 5 1 Nov 1888 13 30 48 es Freq GHz 2045 toe _ 2 to 20 to L jJ 1 to 5a DUT Length 18 8 cm 511 St2 S21 0 0 S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref 8 71 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 16 21 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Tab 40 WA ON 8 72 871 DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS 17 Nov 1880 13 08 57 511 0 0 512 S21 5
62. 457 DSK MTR F3 45v OSK MTR HN se Rae 65V 64 6 to 65 4 2 E x s ep sss 4 82 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Determine Why the Green LED 10 Is Not Steadily If the green LED is not on steadily the line voltage is missing or is not enough to power the 85101C Continue this procedure with the next paragraph Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse Check the main power line cord line selector switch setting line fuse and actual line voltage to see that they are all correct Figure 4 12 earlier in this procedure shows the location of the line voltage selector switch Use a small flat bladed screwdriver to select the correct switch position Figure 4 14 shows how to remove the line fuse using a small flat bladed screwdriver to pry out the fuseholder The line fuse is rated for 250 V at 3 amperes for operation at all line voltages A spare fuse is provided in a plastic drawer in the line fuseholder as shown in the figure The line fuse Agilent part number is 2110 0655 fthe A10 green LED is still not on steadily after verification of correct line voltage replace the A10 preregulator Figure 4 14 Removing the Line Fuse B SPARE FUSE 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 83 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
63. 48m 101 20 RLsiduels of AZ f dBm Reali 148 20 140 00 0020 0039 vt dB tkane Piisiduals af A2 dBm 2 800 00 800 00 AZ dB 0050 0050 l2 ote008 0100 0100 0150 0150 4 dBs iMpac Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the A2 channel signal path 0 0000 2 0900 11 50 12 00 0 00 9 02 20 09 20 00 15 00 15 00 0360 0360 800 00 800 00 101 50 102 00 140 00 140 00 800 09 800 00 0030 0030 0050 0050 0100 0109 0150 0150 0250 0830 The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware contiguration menu that the specifications have been generated for These specifications refer to the errors contributed from the source to the A2 sampler signal path The tables show values that are already included in the system specifications The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 9 NOTES 8510C On Site Service Manual COON N Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts 11 Uncertainty Specifications Plots 9 S11 MAGNITUDE UPPER WORST CASE
64. 50 dB This power level is typical for the output of the 20 MHz out signal after filtering with the bandpass filter If a power level within this range is displayed it means that this RF path is working in the system and that the source could be faulty Refer to Unratioed Power Failures to further check the RF paths Check the remaining user parameters RF paths The results should be the same for each one Remember that these user parameters are the output power levels for the incident reflected and transmitted signal paths from the test set frequency converter Press PARAMETER MENU USER 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE PORT 2 SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user b2 parameter 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 103 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Other Failures 3 Press PARAMETER MENU USER 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE PORT 2 SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user a2 parameter 4 Press PARAMETER MENU USER 4 b1 RESPONSE SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user b1 parameter If all the user parameters RF paths look good the source is probably faulty If they all look bad or if any one looks bad the test set is faulty probably the VTO or a sampler Refer to Unratioed Power Failures to further check the RF paths in the test set 4 104 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Other Failures This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 105 Main Troubleshooting
65. 59 Measurement ngertaltiBS ag Ree REGE 8 73 eh dieses be Ua ERE Ne eb EE EN T 8 73 Sources of Measurement 52 8 74 Sources ar Syshematie EFUDS 255 8 74 Sources of Random lt 8 74 Sources of DME EMOS ping de bp ered 8 75 Sources of Additional Measurement 8 75 Measurement Uncertainty 8 76 Relection Uncerteimy Equations iei oia e aru s s PR KE La amie bah wees 8 76 Transmission Uncertainty RR eR REPRE RE PERDE HR 8 78 Generation of System Measurement 8 80 System ENON MOdels HER PHAR ad a mE REPRE Rd aV dd deep Ede 8 81 Additional Information RR CR A EHE Rob edo ina onere 6 8 85 8510C System Uncorrected Error Model Flowgraph 8 87 8510C System Corrected Error Model
66. 6 Simplified Pretune Phase Locked Loop je IF DETECTOR e TEST SET h VTO SENSE RF IN e N gt THRU IF DETECTOR TO DISPLAY PROCESSOR As shown above during pretune the pretune assembly tunes the VTO by putting the S H sample and hold circuit into the track always mode In this mode the main phase locked loop is switched away from the phase detector to a DAC The processor chooses a VTO frequency such that a resulting VTO harmonic comb frequency is 20 MHz above the RF of the source The VTO summing amp assembly in the test set sums the pretune voltage and main lock voltage to tune the VTO to the desired frequency To confirm that the VTO frequency is correct the pretune board divides it by N and compares it to a 50 kHz reference signal If the frequency is not correct the VTO is retuned with an error voltage When the pretune frequency is correct a comparator on the pretune board detects lock In turn the processor reads a bit from the comparator If the pretune circuit is unable to generate the correct VTO frequency the processor displays this running error message PRETUNE FAILURE For example if the start frequency entered on the front panel is 1 8 GHz the processor calculates the LO frequency required to produce a 20 MHz IF 1 8 GHz 20 MHz 1 82 GHz Since 1 82 GHz is beyond the frequency range of the VTO the actual LO frequency is a harmonic of the VTO in this case the ninth harmoni
67. 60 MHz bandpass filter which is used to pass the third harmonic of the 85102 output signal to the test set to emulate a signal from an external source Actually almost any source that has a 60 MHz signal or higher can be used Refer to Other Failures for a procedure that uses the source emulator tripler to determine whether or not the problem is in the source Also available is an 8360 front panel emulator kit This is an overlay that can be placed over the front panel keys of the 85102 IF detector The 85102 keys can then be used to run the built in service diagnostics of the 8360 according to the key codes on the overlay Press SERVICE FULL SELF TEST to access the procedure Other Tests for the Source For additional assurance that the source is working you can run the operator s check procedure in the source manual If the procedures in this 8510 service manual indicate a fault in the source refer to the troubleshooting procedures in the service manual for that particular source 4 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont HARDWARE EMULATOR TOOLS If all the previous tests pass there is a high level of confidence that the 85101C and 85102 are working properly Test Set Emulator Substitute the service adapter for the test set Follow the procedure Unratioed Power Failure to verify that the test set is workin
68. 8 System 2 8 9 How to Load the 5 4 lt eek appa 8 10 Using the Keyboard or Mouse for Program 8 12 sss ar DEDI 8 12 How to Verify System Per gpmfan0B uu u ru Heh ded he ER ERI SE ER EYE 8 13 Ghaosing ta Edit Specifications row rr Rh re EGRE RU EEREPDEFTRTRANIPr3 T4 3v diga 8 15 Using Customizing ir RR I ERA heb VE IRAE hot S 8 15 Using Markers on Uncertainty 8 15 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents 7 Contents Choosing User Generated Error 8 16 Generating Customized System Uncertainty 0 5 8 16 Using User Generated Specifications in System 8 16 Entering S parameters of the 8 16 Entering User Labels or Comments on 8 17 Entering User Labels or Comments System Verification Reports
69. 8 3 Index Index measurement uncertainties 8 73 comparing for verification devices 8 47 measurement uncertainty equations 8 73 memory operations 4 65 menu map of system uncertainty test procedure 8 47 mm wave systems 8 96 module exchange program 5 3 motherboard replacement 85101 6 14 display processor 6 14 N no IF found 4 77 0 operating system backing up 9 20 history 4 123 how to reload 4 67 operation after installation 9 20 local or remote 8 101 procedures 9 20 system disk backup 9 20 temperature requirements during 9 3 theory of 3 1 optional function not installed 4 78 options available 9 2 ordering parts 5 2 other test devices 8 27 overview service and equipment 1 1 paint touch up 5 6 parallel port adapter 9 19 parallel printers 9 19 parameters user 9 21 part numbers extender board 7 22 parts ordering information 5 2 replaceable 5 2 Performance Test Failures 4 119 4 120 performance test failures 4 6 performance test record 8 103 performance verification 8 1 criteria 8 100 if the system fails 8 54 results interpreting 8 52 software for 8 8 system 8 5 peripherals connecting to system 9 15 9 18 phase errors due to electrical length of devices 8 98 phase lock cycle summary 3 21 learn mode 3 20 loop theory 3 16 main sequence 3 19 monitoring 3 19 pretune sequence 3 16 running error messages 3 21 simplified pretune loop 3 19 sys
70. 8510 system definition of 1 5 85101 bottom internal with CRT 5 14 bottom internal with LCD 5 28 cabinet parts 5 22 5 36 disk drive 6 9 display processor assemblies 3 10 front panel external with CRT 5 15 front panel internal with CRT 5 17 front panel internal with LCD 5 30 motherboard card cage 6 14 power supply troubleshooting 4 101 power supply simplified block diagram 4 98 replacement procedures 6 2 6 5 RPG rotary pulse generator 6 8 sides 5 20 5 34 top internal with CRT 5 12 top internal with LCD 5 26 troubleshooting power supply 4 97 85101 display processor 4 20 85102 adjustments software part number 7 16 board locations 5 40 bottom internal 5 46 C1 C2 C3 and C4 capacitors 6 26 cabinet parts 5 56 5 57 cable locations 5 44 front 5 47 front panel 5 51 IF detector assemblies 3 8 IF detector tests 4 20 motherboard 5 52 power supply summary 4 97 rear 5 48 rear panel replacement 6 27 rectifier 6 23 replacement procedures 6 2 6 21 sides internal 5 50 top internal 5 42 8511 frequency converter test sets 3 5 A 1 front panel 6 6 A10 preregulator 4 101 output voltages 4 107 A10 preregulator replacement 6 13 11 CRT display 6 10 A14 display processor test 4 62 A14 display RAM test 4 62 14 GSP 4 44 A14J4 pinouts 4 45 A15 LCD 4 46 A15 LCD replacement 6 16 16 inverter board troubleshooting 4 50 A16 inverter troubleshooting 4 49 A3 post regulator fuse
71. 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 37 Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures Table 4 4 A16 Inverter Board Voltages and Signals Test Point Signal or Voltage Test Point Signal or Voltage pin 1 5 1 CN1 pin 5 0 V ground CN1 pin 2 5 1 Vdc CN1 pin 6 0 V to 5 1 V CN1 pin 39 mV CN2 pin 1 900 V peak sinewave 38 kHz after completion of power on CN1 pin 4 0 V ground CN2 pin 5 ac neutral referenced to pin 1 1 This signal is referenced to chassis ground For easier access to pin 1 of CN2 slide the plug slightly out of the fully seated position This will expose a small piece of metal electrically connected to pin 1 See detail CN2 After measuring the test points on CN1 and CN2 match the results and perform the rework as indicated in the action column in Table 4 5 After successful troubleshooting and repair the LCD should operate normally or at least be illuminated when the instrument is turned on Table 4 5 Inverter Board Troubleshooting Steps Input Output CN1 CN2 Action Good Good Replace the backlight lamp See LCD Assembly Details on page 6 18 Good Bad Replace the A16 inverter See LCD Assembly Details on page 6 18 Bad Bad Replace the flat flex cable W8 or the 14 display interface board 4 38 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Self Test Failures Overview
72. A17 or 5 7 boards may be faulty Also the A6 A5 A7 and A10 A12 could be faulty because they are also part of the IF section The following tests will help you determine which of these board assemblies is faulty If there are spikes on the trace greater than 20 dB at bandpass points 2 4 GHz 13 5 GHz and 20 0 GHz suspect a failure the 17 board Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET and look for the spikes explained above If the error message appears and or spikes appear at those points follow the steps below 1 Run the 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode 2 Ifthe Sync Detector test fails the following message will appear on the display Failed SYNC DETECTOR TEST Sample and hold line has no output Check sample and hold A17 Check output amplifier on sync detector board A7 If this message appears as is or if it indicates the A5 board instead of A7 continue with the steps below If another test failed with another message refer to the information in Service Program for that test If no tests fail do not continue with this test Run the 85102 Service Program test 4 cal DAC test A17 and the LCD CRT should display Passed If it does not indicate Passed you should suspect the A17 cal DAC assembly and not the A5 or A7 boards 4 To determine which board is defective sync detector 5 and A7 or Cal Dac A17 reverse the inputs to A17 as follows Swap cables J1 and J3 e Sw
73. A22 8 4 118 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program This test verifies the ability of the A22 pretune control board to count the 20 MHz signal on the VTO sense line The test also verifies that the phase detector on the A22 pretune control is working Refer to Chapter 3 Theory of Operation for more information on how the phase lock system operates Main Phase Lock Test A23 9 This test verifies the operation of the attenuator switches lock indicator search off set DAC and mode switch Refer to Chapter 3 Theory of Operation for more information on how the phase lock system operates IF Counter Test A21 A G n This test verifies the operation of the following circuits on the A21 IF counter Reference channel select switch Counter circuit Gate generator Amplifier limiter Other causes of failure of this test may be e A13 and or A14 mixer boards that provide the 20 MHz signals to the A21 IF counter Run All the Above Tests B M u Each test is run sequentially 85102 Front Panel Test C k m This test allows you to check each front panel key You press the key and the test verifies its operation This test is not done in the Run All The Tests selection 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 119 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program Test Set GPIB HP IB Service Program Menu The tests on this menu verify the ability of the A4 GPIB board in
74. A7 Reference Synchronous Detector 7 A8 19 9 MHz LO none A9 B2 IF Mixer 5 A10 Test IF Amplifier 6 11 B1 IF Mixer 5 A12 Reference IF Amplifier 6 A13 A2 IF Mixer 5 14 Al IF Mixer 5 15 Regulator none A16 Remote Applications none A17 Sample and Hold none A18 ADC none A19 ADC Control none A20 Sweep ADC 4 A21 IF Counter none A22 Pretune none A23 Main Phase Lock none A24 Interface none A25 Motherboard none A26 Rectifier none 7 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 4 Test Equipment for 8510 Adjustments Instrument Recommended Model Critical Specifications Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 No substitute Photometer Tektronix J16 Option 2 No substitute Photometer Probe Tektronix J6503 Option 2 No substitute Light Occluder Tektronix 016 0305 00 No substitute Degausser Radio Shack Model 44 233 200 W input Spectrum Analyzer 4407 100 kHz to 26 5 GHz GPIB controlled Frequency Counter 53151A Opt 001 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz Function Generator 33250A Fast Sweep less than 10 msec RF Source 8360 8340 series 45 MHz to 20 GHz a Agilent model number unless otherwise indicated 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 9 Adjustments Procedure 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments Procedure 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments These display adjustments apply only to 8510C systems equipped with a CRT display No display adjustments ot
75. Accessories 5 7 TOOLS ed seeds 5 8 Replaceable Parts for 85101C Equipped with a 5 12 Replaceable Parts for 85101C Equipped with an 5 26 BBIBZE Replaceable PSP uunc va aa cc ada aA XR Skew SEAR LOR RR ean ee aoc Sanam Bx hs 5 40 6 Replacement Procedures MITES ERE ETC E S TE 6 2 851016 Replacement PIBCBUUTBS 252 u u u su 6 2 91028 Replacement Procedures 6 2 Adjustments and Performance 6 6 2 85101C Replacement 2 4222 544650 oedavdaddaaeabesiuspaamaciaiesd 6 5 Al Front Panel Replacement ul u y veri ay Agee ob De ede 6 6 Rotary Pulse Generator RPG 6 8 A2 Disk Drive Replacement NY ene 6 9 All CRT Display Replacement 6 10 A9 Rear Panel Replacement 2222 ees 6 12 A10 Preregulator
76. CRT After each key is displayed press that same key on the front panel 85102 Interface Test 7 M u This test verifies that the 85101C can communicate with the 85102 It requires the 85102 emulator listed in Chapter 5 This emulates or takes the place of the 85102 IF detector The emulator can be connected in two different ways 1 Connect the male end directly to the IF display interconnect on the back of the 85101C 2 Connect the IF display interconnect cable to the IF display interconnect and then connect the female end to the other end of the cable Using it this way you can determine if there is any problem with the IF display interconnect cable Dynamic Interrupt System Test 7 k m This test is used in the factory only and is not intended for use in the field It requires a different 85102 electronic emulator board Security Keys Interface Test A7 D x1 This test is used in the factory only and is not intended for use in the field A special electronic tool is required Watchdog Timer Test A7 E Tests the ability of the CPU watchdog timer to reset the processor Running this test will also reset the 8510C as if you pressed the recessed front panel TEST button It will be necessary for you to enter the service program again if you run this test 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 111 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 85101 Display Board and CRT Tests A4 A11 or LCD Test
77. Damage Level Al dBm Olat Pe For 8 1 db Comp Al dBm IPccal 0970 0932 800 00 800 00 101 20 101 28 Raw rms Noise on Trace fl 4 dB iRntal Caw rma Noise Floor At dBm iRnfali Raw rms Noise floor Al dBm IRnfalc R siduals sf At Resi LEsiduals af Ab Cony dBm Realc 140 00 140 00 800 00 800 00 iimearity rf Xtal Al 97 082 0030 0020 i treil tt dO i6ela 9050 0050 sf 45 56 dbm Al d9 01020 0190 Cain tr 758 70 dbm Al GeZa 0150 0150 Hag error s Phase shift At Ct dB 0020 8230 20 00 15 00 0360 800 00 101 50 140 00 800 00 0030 0030 15 00 03 0 800 00 1092 00 140 00 800 00 0020 0030 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the A1 channel signal path The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for These specifications refer to the errors contributed from the source to the A1 sampler signal path The tables show values that are already included in the system specifications The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the System error flow graph 8510C On Site Serv
78. E KE RUEDA dde qd 4 81 System Bus Address 5 dea bee n RPG EE Edd ERROR DER RE ERR LARA 4 81 PSI BUS SRO EMIT und das be aeons a qaid at bass db C nada RO 4 81 Test Sat GPIB IHP IB Syntax 4 82 Unable ta Ext TOMAZ Re PI Re 4 82 VTO Ovar I TT T 4 82 arate Power PANU Ric ib doh ek as ped athe dee ewan es E cR oa oif 4 85 DT rr 4 85 dee EE aU Midas BYE NE qui lod 4 85 User 1 2 3 and puskaq 4 85 AP Meh Paid seed Cason 4 86 Raticed and Unratioed indore RE REG HOHER RARE RR 4 86 Troubleshooting with the Service Adapter 4 86 Senice Adapter ConclusiOne repu uhr iniata k E 4 87 Test Set Unratioed Power 4 88 Troubleshooting Folda ts wie ee cic beaded SERRE REA 4 88 85145 RF Rew Diagrams and Typical kx n cw 4 89 8
79. Error Messages Phase Lock Lost This error message indicates that the 8510C was phase locked but lost lock Loss of phase lock is detected by the 85102 A21 20 MHz IF counter and the 85101C A5 CPU after pretune Also this error message is often intermittent Be sure to press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys to verify that this is a repeatable message If this error message occurs when the 8430 41 source is in the RAMP mode but not in the STEP mode the problem is most likely the source or the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly If so be sure to check the A20 board with the service program diagnostics Probable cause of failure Power holes or frequency error in the source 85102 A21 IF counter e 85102 A22 pretune phase lock assembly 85102 A23 main phase lock Test set VTO summing amplifier assembly Faulty or intermittent VTO assembly with 15 dB power loss Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e Run 85102 service program tests 8 A22 9 A23 and A A21 e Check the unratioed power level of test set signal path a1 Check all rear panel connections Pretune Failure Pretune Lost Failure The lock detector on the 85102 A22 pretune control assembly indicates that the pretune cycle has not occurred The pretune cycle changes the VTO output to a frequency where one of its harmonics mixes with the RF to produce the 20 MHz IF The power from the VTO sense line must drop
80. Formt117 4 126 8510C On Site Service Manual AUXILLARY MENUS SYSTEM SYSTEM MENU DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ADDRESSES HP 18 CONF I GURE BEEPER ON OFF RESET IF CORRECTION MORE SYSTEM MORE MENU PULSE CONF IG EDIT MULT SRC SYSTEM PHASELOCK POWER LEVELING ANALOG OUT ON OFF SERVICE FUNCTIONS SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU TEST ME NU SYSTEM BUS LOCAL REMOTE IF GAIN PEEK POKE LOCATION PEEK POKE SOF TWARE REVISION 511 MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU LOOPING SELF TESTS SYSTEM COMMANDS 1 AS PROCESSOR EPROM 15 RUN MAIN PROGRAM 2 AS PROCESSOR RAM 16 MEMORY OPERATIONS 3 A7 DATA BUS 17 RERUN SELF TEST 4 A14 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 18 REPEAT TEST LOOP 5 A14 DISPLAY RAM 6 A7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 7 A7 PUBLIC GPIB DISC COMMANDS 8 A7 SYSTEM BUS 19 LOAD PROGRAM DISC 9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM 20 RECORD PROGRAM DISC 10 A5 MULTIPLIER 21 INITIALIZE DISC 11 A7 DISC CONTROLLER 12 A6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY 13 IF DETECTOR DATA SERVICE COMMANDS 85101 CPU BOARD TESTS A5 DRAM REFRESH TEST READ WRITE SHIFT ACCUMULATOR TEST MULTIPLIER TEST COMPLEX MULTIPLY TEST CIRCLE TEST EXERCISES MULTIPLIER SIGNATURE ANALYSIS MULTIPLIER SIGNATURE ANALYSIS ADDRESS BUS SIGNATURE ANALYSIS DATA BUS RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKE
81. HOME key to return to previous pages Mouse Use the mouse to position the cursor on a specific character or field Click the mouse select button to edit the data You may find that using the mouse is less efficient than using the cursor keys The sensitivity of the mouse makes it awkward to position TAB Use the keyboard tab key to move from one data entry field to the next or when columns are used from one column to the next Combine the SHIFT key with the TAB key for reverse tabbing In Case of Difficulty Check that the mass storage device is specified refer to step 7 e Check that the BASIC revision is 3 0 or higher 5 0 is preferred e Check that the controller has at least 3 megabytes of memory Type SYSTEMS AVAILABLE MEMORY RETURN e Check that all the required binary files are loaded in the controller memory refer to step 4 fthe program is still not running correctly cycle the power of all the instruments 8 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance How to Verify System Performance The system performance verification process is summarized below 1 Operational checks a b Environment and device temperature check User parameters check unratioed power Inspect clean and gage connectors Cable check Dynamic range check 2 Frequency tests a b CW frequency accuracy test Sw
82. J17 2 J DGND N C N C N C WS gt J J lt J lt NOE J lt J lt TN gt 42 1 J lt J17 3 J gt J J lt J lt J lt J lt gt 42 1 J lt J17 u J N C lt N C lt N C lt gt 12 1 7 5 C N C x N C E TN P 17 6 x C gt J lt Mes J12 86 J Ne J J lt IN gt J J lt 21757 J N C N C N C N gt J J lt gt 012 85 J J J lt gt J J lt J17 8 J 1 N C N C N C N U1B gt J J lt gt J12 84 J J J lt T gt J J lt J17 9 J 4 DGND N C N C N 6 N C gt J J lt gt 012 83 ij J J lt T gt J J lt 417 10 J 5 DGND gt P DGND Saisons DGND N 5 N C s y N C 5112 61 N C x LDISKCHG lt SIDESEL N s z 5V Jur 32 N C s lt N C 5712 89 N C DISKREAD 5 LWRITEPROT TN b E N C gt J u pi N C 5212 79 N C b LTRACK 5 x LWRITEGATE N s lt UIC N C 22 s 2 N C 5715 78 P N C y DISKWRITE LSTEP 8 N C DGND lt DGND eee p DGND DGND p 2 DGND 10 DGND 5 5 2 N C gt J12 76 N C DIRECTION F I LMOTORB 7uF 32 N C 9 lt N C N C LDRIVESELA LDRIVESELB DGND d p lt DGND J12 7u p DGND DGND DGND U1D DGND S s lt N C 712 73 N C LMOTORA E LINDEX 12 11 N C N C i Y N C N C MEDIAID p DENSITY DGND 13 gt J J lt gt J12 72 J J J lt SPARE6 2 SPARE6 5 2 71 SPARE6 SPARE6 SPARE7 KEYBOARD 32 SPAREB S d lt
83. Manual 8 93 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications NIST Numbers The National Institute of Standards Technology NIST measures Agilent standards and returns the results to Agilent with a test number and a date NIST numbers are supplied with the certificate of calibration that comes with your verification kit The numbers are kept on record at Agilent They are used to document the traceable path of the measured kit data to NIST Below is a typical set of numbers 738 236940 86 738 234708 85 738 230170 83 731 237627 86 233661 NOTE These numbers are supplied and authorized for use by NIST They refer to device tests made by NIST The 83 85 and 86 numbers that appear after the dash are the latest revision dates for each test Contact Agilent if you have any further questions regarding these numbers Omit Isolation Measurement for 8350B Sources If you are using an 8350B source omit the isolation measurement in the measurement calibration sequence The isolation measurement removes crosstalk but requires a large number of averages since this type of error occurs below the noise floor The software sets the 8350B to 128 averages which is not enough averages for a correct measurement of the crosstalk Unless the number of averages is 1024 or more the measurement creates a larger error than it is correcting for If 1024 or more averages are taken the measu
84. Position and Focus Adjustments 1 All 85101C equipped with a CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing 2 All 85101 equipped with a CRT Display Intensity Adjustments 3 All 85101C equipped with a CRT Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment 85102 4 A20 IF Mixer Adjustment 85102 5 9 11 A13 14 IF Amplifier Adjustment 85102 6 A10 Synchronous Detector Adjustment 85102 7 5 7 Clock Adjustment 85102 8 A6 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 5 Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 2 Adjustable Components in Alpha Numeric Order Reference Adjustment Name Adjustment Adjustment Function Number Designator Procedure Number 85101 Display Processor All DISPLAY VERTICAL POSITION 1 Aligns softkey labels with softkeys 85101C equipped with a CRT All DISPLAY FOCUS 1 Adjusts for optimum focus of display 85101C equipped with a CRT All DISPLAY DEGAUSSING 2 Demagnetizes Display 85101C equipped with a CRT All DISPLAY BACKGROUND 3 Sets black level of front panel intensity control of INTENSITY display background 85101C equipped with a CRT All DISPLAY OPERATING 3 Sets maximum limit of front panel intensity control DEFAULT INTENSITY 85101C equipped with a CRT 85102 IF Detector 514 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output 515 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Mi
85. S11 and press Previous until the asterisk blinks Type in S11 0 11 the linear value from SWR 1 25 e Goto S21 press Previous until the asterisk blinks Type in 20 dB for S21 f Goto S12 press Previous until the asterisk blinks Type in S12 20 dB g Goto 522 press Previous until the asterisk blinks Type in 522 0 11 the linear value h Enter the device length as 3 cm Press Done to display the uncertainty plot Use the marker to read the uncertainty values when 521 is 20 dB Using the marker what are the uncertainty values when 521 is 20 dB for the different frequency ranges at 0 045 GHz to 2 GHz 0 065 dB uncertainty at 2 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz 0 077 dB uncertainty at 8 0 GHz to 20 GHz 0 111 dB uncertainty at 20 GHz to 26 5 GHz 0 129 dB uncertainty 8 34 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Operational Check Procedures The following operational checks are highly recommended but not required The assessment of the system operating environment and the functional operation of the system components help identify faulty equipment CAUTION Use an antistatic work surface and wrist strap to lessen the chance of electrostatic discharge Environment and Device Temperature Check 1 Measure the temperature and humidity of the environment and write the values on the test record located at the end of this chapter T
86. SPARES gt SPARE8 F SPARES 7 I SPARE9 N C 5 N C 5112 69 N C LLEDREM 5 LLEDLSN NC 5 J lt NCC 5112 68 J0 N C RPGCLK LLEDTLK N C 2 lt N C 5112 67 N C N C N C RPGDR LLEDSRO DGND 1 lt N C N C N C N C LLED2 4 5V DGND DGND 5112 65 DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND J C1 N C die F E N C N C N C N C LLED8 2 LLEDY 0 0470 N C E N C N C N C N C LIOSLO HIORL2 x J DGND DGND di N C 2 N C N C N C LIOSL1 HIORL1 J gt J J lt J12 61 lt DGND HIORL7 T N C cer N C N C N C LIOSL3 HIORL3 J X U A N C lt N C 5112 59 N C N C N C LIOSL4 HTORLY J LLDS 1 14 1 N C y J J lt N C gt J12 58 N C N C N C HIORLS HIORL6 J LDG 2 3 AAA LDISPSEL DGND I 4 N C 512 57 N C N C N C HIORL7 N C J 2 T J 4 DGND d lt DGND 12 56 DGND DGND DGND DGND lt DGND J 5 LIOSLO J LLED8 DGND LLED2 RPGDR 7 RPGCLK LLEDREM 554260 85101 8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram LCD 2 of 2 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 30 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures LCD Failures NOTE The information in this section is specific to an 85101C display processor equipped with an LCD Unless otherwise noted this information does not apply to instruments with CRT displays This procedure is intended to isolate the fau
87. T S LEDs are lit the binary sum of the numbers indicates the failed self test Continue with the troubleshooting procedures below If some combination of the 8 4 2 1 LEDs stays lit and only one two or three of the R L T S LEDs are lit the binary sum of the numbers indicates the failed subtest To see what self test failed continue with the next paragraph How to Identify a Self Test Failure with the CPU Board LEDs When neither the display nor the front panel LEDs indicate a self test failure but you suspect a failure check the Ab CPU board as explained below 1 Turn off the display processor Remove its top cover and locate the 5 board It has red pull levers and six LEDs near its upper edge The LEDs are labeled 32 16 8 4 2 1 Figure 4 8 Diagnostic LEDs and Switch A5S1 on A5 CPU Board RED 4 44 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures At power up all six LEDs light for approximately two seconds If a self test fails the LEDs corresponding to the failed test will light for two seconds Then the LEDs that correspond to the subtest number light and stay on Self test 1 does not display a subtest number Self test 15 is not coded a Turn on the instrument and note the first LED pattern It is the self test number in binary format b Note the second LED pattern It is the subtest number in binary format 3 Either refer to Table 4 6 on page 4 48 to identify and troubleshoot the prob
88. Typical Typical Typical Fac Char Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty tUsed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy 8 84 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Additional Information Definitions Cust Site Factory Fac Comp Fac Char Typical Condition Verified in the factory and verifiable at the customer s site using the performance verification software Verified in the factory on all units before shipment Not tested at the customer s site Factory computed verified in the factory by mathematical derivation using the measured performance of the system components and calibration standards Not tested at the customer s site Factory characterized parameter set by measuring a number of units Verified in the factory by measurements on a random sampling Not tested at the customer s site Non warranted performance characteristics intended to provide information useful in applying the 8510 system Typical characteristics are representative of most systems though not necessarily tested in each system Not tested at the customer s site A condition of the measurement or calculation Dynamic Accuracy Error Model The dynamic accuracy value used in the syst
89. about 15 dB to 18 dBm before a VTO failure message occurs This condition could cause the VTO frequency to be noisy and low in power Probable cause of failure Test set power turned off Overheated or bad test set VTO e 85102 A23 main phase lock board Fdetector test set interconnect cable e 85102 A22 pretune assembly Test set VTO summing amplifier e LPRTHLD line to test set summing amplifier from 85102 A22 pretune assembly Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 8 A22 and 9 A23 Check test set line power and fuses Check IF test set interconnect cable Referto Unratioed Power Failures to check operation of the test set 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 67 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Pulse Cal Failure On Test Reference Channel s or Both Channels This error message reports a failure detected in the pulsed RF circuitry Probable cause of failure 85102 A6 clock board for both channels only 85102 A2 multiplexer board 85102 A3 and A4 A14 test and reference channel detector boards e 85102 A16 sample and hold board Source GPIB HP IB Syntax Error The source does not respond to a known good GPIB command Probable cause of failure Source GPIB assembly 85101C A71 0 assembly GPIB portion GPIB cable between the source and 85101C Troubleshooting e Run 85101C service program
90. also 85101 if an early version with power switch Ifthe display is not clear try to improve it with the intensity control Source front panel switch settings are of no concern except for the line power switch because the source is under analyzer control Make sure the power line modules on all instruments are set to the appropriate local line voltage Check the GPIB addresses of all instruments e Ifthe source is an 8360 make sure the language switch is set to 001 as shown DEPRESSED POSITIONS ARE DARK e 35522289z Ifthe source is an 8340 8341 make sure the rear panel FREQUENCY STANDARD switch is set to INTERNAL Cabling Checks Make sure the system cables are connected as shown in Figure 4 1 System Connections Make sure the test set rear panel reference port extension cables in place See Chapter 9 System Installation for an explanation of these cables Make sure the IF detector interconnect cable AND the GPIB cable are connected between the 85101 and 85102 Make sure the source RF output cable is connected to the test set e If the source is an 8360 remove the SWEEP OUT IN connections from the 8360 and 85102 Replace with TRIGGER IN OUT Disconnect the bias port BNCs and all other BNC cables except SWEEP OUT IN or TRIGGER IN OUT for now Exception if the test set is an 8516 leave the SOURCE CONTROL cable connected between the source and the test set to double th
91. and Specifications later in this chapter Dynamic accuracy errors are a function of signal power level and are calculated and included as a component of the total uncertainty calculation They can be described as follows the down converted RF signal passes through the 85102 IF detector and is either attenuated or amplified in order to be further down converted and processed for display Because of this the signal has some magnitude and phase inaccuracies that vary with signal levels By plotting the dynamic accuracy specifications of your system you can see how dynamic accuracy changes with power level Dynamic accuracy or total system uncertainty values with correction ON are calculated using equations derived from a flowgraph model of the measurement system Therefore total uncertainty can be described as a computation of all the residual errors that affect your measurement NOTE Total measurement uncertainty is also highly dependent on the device being measured For the purpose of the uncertainty plots the following ideal device 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 57 Performance Verification and Specifications How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program assumptions are made For 511 and 522 uncertainties the device is one port device therefore the value of 521 and 512 are dB The value of 11 or 522 is varied For 521 and 512 uncertainties the device is a reciprocal two port device with perfect input
92. board AG EEPROM board 4 graphics system processor board 14 GSP if equipped with an LCD Disconnect the IF detector interconnect cable and the GPIB cable from display processor rear panel Verify that default error 15 is still present If so the trouble is isolated to the Ab CPU board assembly Self Test Sequence The sequence starts testing with the processor ROM circuit the kernel in the display processor and then tests RAM the data bus various input output registers math processor IF detector interface and the display processor keyboard Some of the tests are not completely exhaustive but they do give an indication that these circuits are functional When no failures occur the self test sequence runs as described below 1 Press and hold the TEST button located on the front panel of the display processor The button is recessed about 1 2 inch Use an adjustment tool or paper clip to reach it 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 41 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Figure 4 6 Location of Display Processor LEDs and Test Button LEDs TEST BUTTON The eight LEDs shown above all light This indicates that the 5 volt supply in the display processor is operating properly NOTE The events of the next seven steps happen quickly about 15 seconds If you do not o Or observe each event do not be concerned Release the TEST button All of the LEDs go out to signal the beginning of the self tes
93. cable failure 1 85101 A8 motherboard or connector failure 196 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board 5 Tests and the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests A1 A2 A7 To troubleshoot the IF detector refer to the 85102 IF Detector tests part of the Service Program section Test 14 Keyboard Test Most likely cause of failure 85101 keyboard key was held down during power up 80 e A71 0 board failure 10 e 1 keyboard failure 10 Keyboard connecting cable missing or damaged 1 85101 A8 motherboard or connector failure 196 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and then select the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests A1 A2 A7 Run the Keyboard and LEDs Test A1 A7 Self Test 14 Selected from Main Service Functions Test Menu To manually verify the complete operation of each key on the 85101 display processor and 85102 IF detector select test 14 As you press each key the LCD CRT should display a different hex code To exit this test press the recessed TEST button 4 52 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures System Disc and Service Commands S
94. connection failure 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Minimize the system remove A6 and all GPIB cables Rerun self test number 7 If it does not pass check the control lines In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests 1 2 4 50 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Test 8 A7 System Bus Most likely cause of failure 71 0 board failure 80 e AB CPU board 20 A8 motherboard 196 Additional troubleshooting hints Minimize the system remove A6 and all GPIB cables Rerun self test number 8 If it does not pass check the control lines In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests Al A2 Test 9 9 Interrupt System Most likely cause of failure A7I 0 board failure 90 Ab processor board failure 10 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 1 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board Tests A5 Test 10 A5 Multiplier Most likely cause of failure Abprocessor board failure 100
95. example printout 8 52 B2 channel errors example printout 8 52 background intensity adjustment 7 14 backlight lamp 4 49 backlight replacement 6 18 backup operating system disk 9 20 base system 3 2 BASIC 7 4 loading BASIC 2 0 7 4 loading BASIC 3 0 or higher 7 4 BASIC 5 0 and HP UX systems 8 95 9 8 cabinet system configuration 9 12 cable magnitude and phase stability 8 36 cables 85101C location of 4 104 8510C cable assemblies 5 38 A8 motherboard connector 4 107 assemblies 5 38 available 9 6 checks 4 8 connector repeatability 8 36 extension for rear panel 9 16 grounding 9 17 insertion loss of 8 36 magnitude and phase stability of 8 38 non standard 8 25 port extension 9 15 return loss 8 36 substitution 8 92 supplied 5 38 cabling pre operational checks 4 8 calculated error terms 8 95 calibration Index Index and verification at 45 MHz 8 94 cycle 8 93 kit 8 3 kit substitution 8 93 Canadian EMC requirements compliance 2 6 capacitor discharge procedure 6 26 replacement 6 26 capacitors power supply replacement 6 26 caution optional function not installed 4 74 changing table data 8 22 channel error term symbols 8 76 channel errors example printout for channel a1 8 63 for channel a2 8 64 for channel b1 8 61 for channel b2 8 62 check step sequence 3 18 check step sequence algorithm 3 18 checking firmware revisions 9 12 checking the shi
96. graphics commands and writes it to the graphics processor The graphics processor converts the data to obtain the necessary video signals and sends the signals to the display It also produces RGB output signals which are sent to the rear panel for use by optional external monitors The assembly receives two power supply voltages 5 V for processing and 65 V not used but passed on to the display 3 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor CRT Display A11 is a 7 5 inch raster scan color CRT with associated drive circuitry Automatic degaussing is performed when the instrument is turned on to minimize the magnetization of the CRT It receives these inputs from the display processor 65 V power supply Digital TTL horizontal and vertical sync signals RGB red green and blue video signals Background and intensity signals Display Assemblies LCD Graphics Processor A14 is the main interface between the 5 central processing unit CPU and the A15 liquid crystal display LCD The CPU converts the formatted data into GSP commands and writes it to the A14 graphics processor GSP The GSP processes the data to generate analog and digital video signals that are used for Theanalog video signals generated are VGA compatible RGB video signals which are buffered and routed to the real panel The digital video signals generated are translated to 3 3 volt levels buffered and routed to t
97. o o o o oa 99 o sa66d Table 4 2 A14J4 Pinouts J4 Pin Signal J4 Pin Signal 1 GRD 18 103 1 0 2 GRD 19 100 1 0 3 ID14 1 0 20 ID1 1 0 4 1015 1 0 21 GRD 5 ID12 1 0 22 GRD 6 1013 1 0 23 2 7 1010 1 0 24 8 1011 1 0 25 RD LWR 9 ID8 1 0 26 IA1 10 109 1 0 27 GRD 11 GRD 28 GRD 12 GRD 29 LDISPACK 0 13 006 1 0 30 LDISP l 14 ID7 1 0 31 LDISPINT 0 15 ID4 1 0 32 LRESET 16 105 1 0 33 GND l 17 0D2 1 0 34 GND 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 33 Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures 15 LCD Circuit Description The A15 LCD assembly is an 8 4 inch liquid crystal display LCD with associated drive circuitry It receives a 3 3 V power supply from the A14 graphics processor The display receives the following signals from the 14 digital horizontal sync digital vertical sync digital blanking data clock digital red video digital green video digital blue video The A15 LCD display includes the backlight lamp and inverter The lamp attaches to the LCD display frame but is electrically separate The backlight is powered by a separate connection to the attached backlight inverter A16 which is also electrically separate Backlight Inverter A16 is a part of the A15 LCD assembly It receives a 5 V power supply and control signals from the A14 graphi
98. of the specifications to show whether any E terms are out of specification Equipment HP 9000 200 or 300 series controller except 9826 with 4 megabytes of available memory after loading BASIC or PC with BASIC for Windows Specifications verification software Calibration kit Compatible printer Procedure 1 Setup the system with the controller connected to the 8510 over GPIB 2 Referto Chapter 8 Performance Verification and Specifications for instructions on running the specifications verification software 3 Within the specifications verification program use the controller softkeys to select the configuration of your system 4 Selectthe system specs menu then test port errors correction off to view the forward direction E terms Print out the E terms 5 Select the reverse direction E terms and print them out 6 Perform the appropriate measurement calibration 2 port for a system with an S parameter test set one path 2 port for a transmission reflection test set 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 129 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Error Terms 7 Select the verification program with the VERIFY SYSTEM selection Select DISPLAY ETERM to display the error terms 8 the printouts you made steps 4 and 5 find the column of raw error terms Use these raw error term figures to compare to the displayed E terms 9 Select each E term and compare the display trace to the raw specifications in t
99. overmodulation 4 75 failure RF locked 4 75 failure self test failure 4 75 fan voltages 4 111 faulty display 4 47 faulty pixel 4 47 files needed for adjustments 7 4 firmware revisions 4 12 4 122 flange attachments to analyzer 9 12 flowgraphs corrected error model 8 91 dynamic accuracy 8 91 system uncorrected error model 8 84 focus adjustment 7 10 frequency converter test sets 3 5 frequency test description 8 5 procedures 8 41 front panel local operation 8 101 front panel checks 4 8 FTZ German emissions requirements 2 6 fuses 5 8 9 11 26 rectifier fuse locations 4 113 A3 post regulator 4 109 removing line fuse 4 103 G gain adjustment for sweep ADC 7 16 glass filter cleaning CRT 10 4 glass filter removing 10 4 GPIB HP IB IEEE standards 9 18 GPIB HP IB protocol 9 18 GPIB language switch 4 8 9 16 grounding power cables 9 17 hang ups or other problems 8 101 hazardous instrument areas with power on 2 3 hazards locations of hazardous voltages 2 4 heating and cooling system 9 4 high resolution monitors 8 96 hooking up the system 9 11 9 15 how to order 5 2 HP 8360 series synthesized sweepers upgrade summary 4 12 HP UX systems 8 95 humidity requirements 9 3 identify a failure 4 55 IF amplifier adjustment 7 22 IF cal failed 4 75 IF count sequence 3 18 3 21 IF mixer adjustment 7 19 IF overload or 0 4 77 IF search routine 3 18 IF detector dat
100. refer to the troubleshooting chapter or contact your local Agilent customer engineer 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 21 System Installation Making System Connections 9 22 8510C On Site Service Manual 10 Preventive Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Overview Overview Preventive maintenance consists of five tasks that should be performed at least every six months If the instrument is used daily on a production line or in a harsh environment the tasks should be performed more often Preventive maintenance contains these tasks Maintain proper air flow Inspect and clean connectors Clean the glass filter and CRT or Clean the LCD Degauss the display CRT only Inspect the error terms Maintain Proper Air Flow It is necessary to maintain constant air flow and around your 8510 system If the message CAUTION Test Set Is Too Hot is displayed immediately inspect for items a piece of paper for example on the test set fan Items on top of the test set or around the system may also impede the air flow The test set will not shut down if it becomes too hot If the 85101 or 85102 overheat the system will shut down until the temperature drops to the operating range Additionally it is recommended that the source fan filter if any be inspected once a week and cleaned as necessary 10 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Preventive Maintenance Inspect and Clean Connectors Inspect and Clean Con
101. self test continuously It displays the number of times the sequence has passed failed and which test and subtest if any last failed In order to avoid wearing out EEPROM memory cells the EEPROM write test routine is only performed for the first 20 cycles of a repeat loop This applies only to the self test selections 12 nonvolatile memory test and 18 repeat test loop How to Exit Self Test Press the recessed TEST button to exit any self test 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 47 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting This part lists each of the 14 self tests and suggests troubleshooting techniques in the event of a failure The conditions listed under Most Likely Causes of Failure are a duplicate of information displayed on the display NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD Self tests for the A4 display processor CRT design and the A14 display processor LCD design are functionally equivalent The notation A4 A14 indicates that the information applies to both designs Self Test Menu The self test part of the main Service Functions test menu appears below in Table 4 6 The LED pattern represents the binary code which appears on the front panel and Ab CPU board as explained earlier Table 4 6 Self Test Menu and LED Pattern
102. set through the RF IN connector on the rear panel see Figure 3 3 The RF is then applied to the switch splitter a combination of two power splitters and a solid state switch This switch selects the power splitter to be used and thereby selects the port that will receive incident RF power 3 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 85102 IF Detector Figure 3 3 RF Signal Path Thru Sampler Test Set for Forward Transmission Measurement S21 BIAS 2 b2 a2 PRETUNE ATTEN SENSE al COUPLER 1 b1 BIAS 1 For the forward transmission measurement 521 b2 a1 the RF signal path is as follows The source RF signal is input to the test set and separated by the switch splitter to produce the test signal and the reference signal The test signal first passes through the DUT and port 2 coupler It is then applied to the b2 sampler for down conversion to 20 MHz before being sent to the 85102 IF detector The reference signal is simultaneously applied to sampler a1 where it is down converted to a 20 MHz IF and also sent to the 85102 In the case of an S11 forward reflection measurement b1 a1 the main difference from the S21 path operation is that the test signal is reflected from port 1 and coupled to the b1 sampler There it is down converted to the 20 MHz IF and sent to the 85102 12 reverse transmission RF paths b1 a2 and S22 reverse reflection RF paths b2 a2 are similar to the transmission and reflection path
103. sqr F ghz port to conv B1 dB iLfibt 16 2 7 25 10 57 Loss c conVertor to I f B dB Ldvibl 4 03 3 28 11 50 12 00 toss Freg ghz to Bt dB Lfvibli 277 06 9 90 0 00 Damage Level 1 dBm 015 17 00 17 00 17 00 17 00 Pur at Conv for 9 1 db Comp B dBm iPccb 10 00 10 00 15 00 15 00 Raw rms Noise on Trace dB Rntbl 0070 0030 0360 0360 Raw rms Noise Floor B I f dBm iRnfbli 800 00 800 00 800 00 800 00 Raw cms Noise Floor dBm iRnfblc 100 30 101 20 101 50 107 00 REsiduals of dBm Ret i1 i 140 00 140 00 140 00 140 00 AEsiduals of Conv dBm iRebtc 800 00 800 00 800 00 800 00 Linearity of Xtal dB itabi 0020 00309 0030 0930 i f Gain Err 34 gt 46 dbm Rl dB 0050 0050 0050 8850 1 Gain Err2 4 58 dbm dD 0100 0100 0100 0199 1 f Gain 2 SB 70 dbm 48 Ge2b 0150 0150 0150 0158 sof Gain Err 7 oo dbm dB Ge4b 0250 0250 0250 0250 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the B1 channel signal path The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for These specifications refer to the errors contributed by the test set from the test port through the coupler and into the sampler down converter The ta
104. terms The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 5 NOTES NOTE Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Raw B1 Channel Errors System Specifications Channel Errors Correction OFF Network Analyzer HP8S10B Enhanced Model Test Set HP851B56003 2 4mm 5 45 2 406 2 Source 6 836 8 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz Calibration Kit HPBS SBA 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cables HP851330 pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4mm tEterm Frequency GHz Description Error Term Symbl 045 2 2 20 20 35 3p 40 law Freq Cutoff porti to B GHz iFelbl 950 950 850 850 tow Frey Slope port to dB iF stbl 6 00 6 00 6 00 6 00 rift Ph deg c port to B1 deg iDpibl 0 0000 0 0004 0 0000 0 0000 Drift Ph deg c F ghz ntl B deg Dpflbi 29 0000 20 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Orift Mag deg c port to Bt U dB iDmib 1 8487 0402 0403 0403 Loss Ne narii fn convertor Bl dB iLdlbl 14 71 14 54 14 59 47 25 Loss
105. test 2 7 1 0 tests Source Sweep Sync Error The 8510C is not synchronized with the source Specifically the 85102 A20 sweep ADC is not properly tracking the 0 to 10 volt ramp from the source Probable cause of failure e 85102 A20 sweep ADC Stop sweep or sweep output cables not connected Defective source Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e 85102 service program test 2 A20 e Check all cabling Refer to Chapter 9 System Installation particularly noting the stop sweep and sweep in out connections e Refer to Unratioed Power Failures to check source operation Usethe trim sweep procedure in the Operating and Programming Manual to adjust the sweep ADC gain DAC 4 68 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Sweep Time Too Fast Too many sweep triggers or too rapid sweep triggers were sent from the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly The 85102 A19 ADC control assembly sends a status bit indicating it did not have time to complete an A to D conversion before receiving the next sweep trigger Probable cause of error 85102 A19 ADC control assembly 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly Source sweep speed set too fast especially in local operation Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 1 A19 and 2 A20 fthe service program found no fault with any as
106. that are supplied by A10 Turn off the 85101C Connect the A10W1 cable to the A3 post regulator Remove the following assemblies and then turn on the 85101C A4 A14 GSP board 5 CPU board A6 EEPROM board A71 0 board Disc drive power connector J3 on the 8 motherboard Ifthe A10 red LED is still on continue this procedure with fthe A10 red LED is off disconnect line power from the 85101C Plug the A4 A14 GSP board assembly into the motherboard If the LED lights replace the A4 A14 GSP assembly or the display assembly A11 A15 or A16 connected to the A4 A14 GSP board To isolate the problem check A4 A14 for loading by the display assembly A11 A15 or A16 before replacing A4 A14 Continue to plug in the rest of the assemblies until the red LED lights Replace the assembly that causes the LED to light Remove A8 Motherboard Connector Cables Turn off the 85101C One at a time and in the order shown remove the following cables from their motherboard connectors and turn the 85101C on until the red LED goes off The cable and or its supplied assembly that causes the red LED to go out when it is removed from its motherboard connector is bad A8J1 keyboard cable A8J2 disc drive cable e Ifthe red LED is still on or flashing continue this procedure with the next paragraph Check the Operating Temperature The temperature sensing circuitry inside the ATO preregulator may be disabling the supply Make sure the opera
107. that can cover up defects in EEPROM in this test The usefulness of this test may therefore be limited and may best be used to check the error correction capabilities Use Write Unformatted Data to Selected Memory Locations 5 to perform pattern writes in an uncorrected mode This will destroy initialization and hardware calibration data 4 114 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program Read Verify Test 3 Data Again 4 This test re verifies the data stored in memory from the prior test It reports the first failed page As explained in the previous test error correction is on the test and will not reliably show EEPROM failures Write Unformatted Data to Selected Memory Locations 5 The board must be re initialized after this procedure This test allows the user to input the size of the memory to write to and the location and pattern It reports problems with the write if any and prompts to allow looping writes The test reads the pattern back and reports all locations where a pattern mismatch exists There is no formatting and hardware cal data may be lost Also repeated looping writes to EEPROM will reduce memory life span Read Verify Test 5 Data Again 6 This test re verifies the data stored in memory from the previous test It displays any errors exactly as the previous test would display them This re verification is useful for detecting the type of EEPROM failure where memory is lost
108. the 85101C Display Processor Disconnect all peripherals and their cables Leave only the network analyzer test set and source connected Run all the service program tests in the 85101 Display Processor Service Program Menu If all the service programs pass the problem is almost certainly in the 85102 IF Detector the source or the test set or interfaces Verify the 85102B IF Detector Run all the 85102 IF Detector tests in the service program 5422 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 21 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Hardware Emulator Tools Now that you know with a high degree of confidence that both halves of the network analyzer are working the next step is to check the test set and the source Special service tools are available that emulate a test set and a source the part numbers are provided in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Test Set Emulator This is a service adapter that substitutes for the test set by connecting the 20 MHz IF signal from the 85102 back into the amplifier of the 85102 The total effect on the analyzer system is similar to connecting a good test set in a normal configuration This can determine if a fault is in the test set or the 85102 Refer to Unratioed Power Failures on page 4 73 for the procedure If this test indicates that the 85102 IF detector is not the problem its confidence level is now increased from 80 to 95 Source Emulator This is a
109. the LO signals for the IF mixer assemblies Test and Reference IF Amplifiers A10 A12 autorange and amplify the signals to allow the detectors to operate in their optimal range The assemblies are electrically and mechanically identical Test and Reference Synchronous Detectors 5 A7 detect the X and Y pairs test and reference that have been mixed down to 100 kHz IF The assemblies are electrically and mechanically identical Sample and Hold A17 assembly multiplexes the X and Y pairs from the synchronous detectors Analog to Digital Converter A18 assembly converts the X and Y pairs from the analog IF waveform to digital bits Processor Interface A24 assembly transmits the digital bits to the display processor and enables the IF detector and display processor to communicate Control Assemblies The control assemblies control the functioning and timing of the system and enable communication within the system The phase lock assemblies are described later Front Panel and Front Panel Interface A1 assembly enables the user to control the 8510 displays the statues of power on off and the active channel 1 or 2 ADC Control A19 provides the control for the A17 sample and hold assembly and the A18 analog to digital converter It is controlled by the display processor and works in conjunction with the A20 sweep ADC assembly Sweep ADC A20 assembly triggers the sample and hold assembly to take data at the proper frequency
110. the data sheet values and for systems using sweepers is O cm For reflection plots 11 or 22 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 or 12 11 and 22 0 linear and S21 12 8 65 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 10 11 Uncertainty Specifications Table itt of 511 UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS 17 Nov 1890 13 13 58 800 512 800 522 0 9 Device Length 10 0 es HP S1 C Calor Model Test Set HPBSI7A 2 4mm S Parameter 45MHz 506Hz Seurce HPB3BSI Synthesizer 45MHz 50 06H2 Calibration Kit 505 2 4mm Slotiess Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cables HP8S5133F pair short cables 2 4m 2 4mm Ref i 045 2 2 20 20 40 40 50 Lin Mag Lin Mag Lin Deg Mag Lin Deg Mag Lin Deg 9 009 008554 180 020 010070 180 000 016344 188 008 022174 180 000 ra 008598 10 025 010172 12 612 016531 20 898 022424 28 856 100 698709 113 010354 1812 01585 11 292 022848 15 216 5 6 150 008864 3 498 919615 4 926 017307 8 215 023445 10 999 eese 2 788 010947 4 003 017836 6 722 024214 6 960 250 009257 2 245 011361 3 468 018670 5 858 025156 7 781 500 Q09680 1 946 011851 2 126 01947 5 308 025270 7 029 a 0
111. the device is a reciprocal two port device with perfect input output match therefore S11 and S22 are f linear and S21 12 The value of S21 or S12 is varied Reflection Phase Uncertainty Erp Reflection phase uncertainty is determined from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to thermal drift of the total system port 1 cable stability and phase dynamic accuracy Erp Arcsin Erm S11 2Cpf1f Dps1 Dpfs1f where 1 cable phase frequency port 1 Dps drift phase degree source to port 1 Dpfs drift phase degree frequency source to port 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 77 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Transmission Uncertainty Equations Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Etm An analysis of the error model in Figure 8 18 yields an equation for the transmission magnitude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order terms and some of the significant second order terms The terms under the radical are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis In all cases the error terms are treated as linear absolute magnitudes Transmission magnitude uncertainty forward direction Ert Systematic Kk Handorm Drift amp Stability Systematic
112. the display 8 Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup 9 When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller 7 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment Figure 7 9 Location of Synchronous Detector Adjustments NAE dis Y AAD pa gi K ES x ms TEST SYNCHRONOUS lt gt gt DETECTOR Ai II u 17 12 7 EL ese u 4 you is LWA N S 52 e2 AOA 2222 ASLS A5L7 ASLU ASL6 A5J3 A7L5 717 A7L6 A7J3 10 The following prompt is displayed CENTER THE CORES IN L4 amp L5 USING THE 8510 DISPLAY ADJUST L6 amp L7 FOR MINIMUM RIPPLE minimize the high frequency ripple THEN ADJUST L4 amp L5 TO FURTHER REDUCE RIPPLE If the following prompt is displayed check equipment setup for configuration errors or refer to the troubleshooting chapter SIGNAL LEVEL IS TOO LOW IT MEASURES XXX dB BUT SHOULD BE gt 15 dB CHECK SETUP OR REPAIR BOARD 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 25 Adjustments Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment 11 Refer to Figure 7 9 for the location of 14 and 15 To center and L5 adjustable inductors rotate each inductor fully counterclockwise until the core is as far out as it will go then three turns clockwise CAUTION Be careful not to rotate the indu
113. the error models and uncertainty equations Rnt raw noise on trace rms Rnf raw noise on floor rms port 1 connector reflection repeatability error port 1 connector transmission repeatability error Crr2 port 2 connector reflection repeatability error Crt2 port 2 connector transmission repeatability error Sources of Drift Errors Drift has two categories frequency drift of the signal source and instrumentation drift Instrumentation drift affects the magnitude and phase of both reflection and transmission measurements The primary causes for instrumentation drift are the thermal expansion characteristics of the interconnecting cables within the test set and the conversion stability of the microwave frequency converter The list below shows the drift errors in the error models and uncertainty equations Dmxbx Dmsax drift magnitude Dpxbx Dpsax drift phase Dpfxbx Dpfsax drift phase f Sources of Additional Measurement Errors Two additional categories of measurement errors are connection techniques and contact surfaces The connection techniques category includes torque limits flush setting of sliding load center conductors and handling procedures for beadless airlines The contact surfaces category includes cleaning procedures scratches worn plating and rough seating These types of errors are not accounted for in the uncertainty analysis 8510C On Site Service Manu
114. the rectifier board item 1 Refer to Figure 6 7 for the rest of this procedure 4 Turn the instrument over Remove the eight rectifier board screws item 1 from the motherboard The rectifier board can now be removed from the instrument To Reassemble 5 Reverse steps 1 through 4 Hand tighten the plastic screws in step 1 Torque all other screws to 79 N cm 7 in Ib Figure 6 8 Me 7 22 om Stil E CN AN pd S amp L gt 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 25 Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Power Supply Capacitor Replacement C1 C2 C3 and C4 Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Insulated clip leads 2 T 15 Torx screwdriver WARNING Even with the power cords disconnected dangerous voltages may be present on the capacitors in the instrument Perform the the following procedure to DISCHARGE THE POWER SUPPLY CAPACITORS BEFORE PERFORMING THE DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE Capacitor Discharge Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 7 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove top and bottom covers 2 On the bottom of the instrument remove the three screws item 2 from the plastic safety cover Carefully remove the cover taking care not to touch capacitor terminals eight large Pozidrive screws item 3 3 Connect the chassis of the instru
115. to Unratioed Power Failures Optional Function Not Installed This message is prompted by attempting to use an option that has not been installed in the 8510C Most probable failure e Attempted use of an option that has not been installed time domain or pulse for example Phase Lock Failure Because pretune is accomplished and the IF is detected by the time you see this message it usually means that the A22 pretune samplers A14 VTO and A21 IF counter are functioning When a phase lock failure occurs only after a successful pretune and the main phase lock is switched in and is detected by the 20 MHz IF counter and 85101C math CPU Probable cause of failure 85102 A23 main phase lock assembly e 85102 20 MHz reference signal from clock assembly e 85102 A21 IF counter assembly e LPRTHLD line to test set summing amplifier from 85102 A22 Weak or noisy VTO in the test set If you have an intermittent error message see if the error message appears as you gently torque the VTO heat sink If it does the VTO assembly has a problem Also check the screws around the frequency converter samplers and VTO to be sure they are tight Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e Run85102 service program tests 8 A22 9 A23 and A A21 Check the clock board 20 MHz signal Refer to Other Failures 4 66 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running
116. to 100 go on to Check the 5 V Test Points on A24 Interface If the A15 red LED is on and one or more of the A15 green LEDs are off one of the following conditions exists Athermal shutdown has occurred The thermal protection circuit has failed The 15 V or 15 V supply has failed Cycle power on the 85102 to see if the thermal protection circuit will reset If the heat sink temperature becomes too great the 15 V supply is disabled This causes the 15 V SENSE line to low and disable one or more of the other supplies 5 V 15 V and 5 V Figure 4 18 A15 LEDs and Test Points Nu OVER 5V REG 5V REG 15V REG 15V REG TEMPERATURE 4 92 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting If one or more of the green LEDs is still off measure the voltages at the corresponding test points see Figure 4 18 They should measure 15 5 15V 15 4 15V 15 5 V 15 1 bV If the 5 V regulator is indicated as the suspected fault the 5 V supply may be loaded down by another assembly Continue to Check the 5 V Test Points on A24 Interface Otherwise continue to Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier Check the 5 V Test Points on A24 Interface Measure the voltage at test points A24TP5 TP8 and TP7 on the A24 processor interface board They should all measure 5 Vdc x25 mV with 10 mV p p ripple If
117. tool Connect the adapter using a BNC cable from the 20 MHz output on the rear panel of the 85102 to the J1 Test Set Interconnect IF interconnect also on the rear panel of the 85102 This test adapter takes a fixed 20 MHz IF reference signal from the 85102 and uses it in place of the 20 MHz IF from the test set The test set downconverts the source RF to a 20 MHz IF To verify the 20 MHz output use an oscilloscope terminated in 50 ohms and you should see an approximate 0 7 volt p p square wave signal with rounded corners Or if the scope is not terminated in 50 ohms the 20 MHz signal is a distorted signal like a sine wave with a large third harmonic of about 1 8 volts p p Also connect a separate BNC cable from the ANALOG 10V to the SWEEP IN 0 10V both located on the rear of the 85102 This connection will provide a trigger input to the sweep ADC in the 85102 85102 Prompt Message A message will appear on the display prompting you to make the connections explained in the paragraph titled Hardware above Be sure you make these connections or the diagnostics will not report valid results After making the connections press to get to the 85102 IF detector service program menu Remember to reconnect the proper system cables after you are finished Refer to Chapter 9 System Installation if necessary Order of Testing These tests must be run in a specific order because of the relationship between the board
118. you have programmed the 8510C to perform a function requiring moving data to its internal memory and it does not have enough room to store the data the message INSUFFICIENT MEMORY will be displayed on the LCD CRT Things to Remember about Running Error Messages They may be caused by either an internal problem or an operator error n many cases they will not stop the measurement sweep Theycan be intermittent or permanent and in the case of cautions the message indicates where the failure is detected and not always where the problem exists They may be caused by an 85101C CPU failure or error not necessarily by the cause indicated in the 4 58 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages message However this type of failure is rare They remain on the display until you clear the message by correcting the problem pressing ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART Categories of Caution Running Error Messages The following four types of CAUTION running error messages are used for service and troubleshooting Phase Lock Running Error Messages NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 for a detailed description of how these phase lock error messages are generated e PRETUNE FAILURE e PRETUNE LOST FAILURE NO IF FOUND PHASE LOCK FAILURE PHASE LOCK LOST VTO OVER RANGE IF Detector ADC Running Error Messages e ADC NOT RESPONDING ADC CAL FAILED IF CAL FAILED IF OVERLOAD e
119. 0 safety 8510 information 2 3 considerations 7 3 safety licensing 2 1 saving edited error terms 8 20 scheduling installation 9 2 self test how to exit 4 59 how to run once 4 59 how to run repeatedly 4 59 menu 4 60 self test failure 4 4 how to identify 4 55 when the CRT is not working 4 56 with the CPU board LEDs 4 56 how to troubleshoot 4 58 self test failures and troubleshooting 4 60 sequence of system measurement 3 15 service test equipment 1 7 tools available 5 6 service adapter connections 4 87 troubleshooting with 4 86 service adapters conclusions 4 87 service command 22 run service program 4 66 23 diagnose a failure 4 66 service manual on site service manuals organization 1 3 service tools available 1 5 shipment checking 9 6 contents of 9 6 simplified pretune phase locked loop 3 17 software for performance verification specifications 8 5 8 8 part numbers 5 6 software failures 4 6 how to resolve 4 121 source 4 20 substitution 8 92 theory of operation 3 4 source GPIB syntax error 4 80 source sweep sync error 4 80 source troubleshooting 4 22 sources 3 4 sources of errors drift 8 75 measurement 8 74 additional 8 75 random 8 74 systematic 8 74 space requirements 9 5 S parameter data entry 8 16 S parameter test set check 9 21 specialized systems 3 2 specifications 8 1 criteria or assumptions 8 94 description of 8 7 example printout 8 59 program how t
120. 0 08415 60036 5 32 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 16 85101C Rear Panel with LCD 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 33 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 17 85101 Left and Right Sides with LCD Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 19 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 1382 1 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM TX 28480 0515 1382 3 0515 1402 2 SCREW MACH M3 5 8 PCPNTX 28480 0515 1402 5 34 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 35 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Table 5 12 85101C Cabinet Parts with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5062 3735 2 TOP AND BOTTOM COVER 28480 5062 3735 2 5021 5837 4 CORNER STRUT 28480 5021 5837 3 5041 8802 1 TRIM STRIP 28480 5041 8802 4 5062 3817 1 COVER SIDE PERFORATED 28480 5062 3817 5 5021 8405 1 FRONT FRAME 28480 5021 8405 6 5062 3800 1 HANDLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5062 3800 7 0515 0896 8 MACH SCREW M4 0 10MM FL PD 28480 0515 0896 8 5021 8497 2 TRIM FRONT HANDLE 28480 5021 8497 9 5041 8821 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP FRONT 28480 5041 8821 10 0515 1132 2 MACH SCREW
121. 0025 RF TEST CABLE TWO SUPPLIED IN KIT 28480 08511 20025 25 08511 20031 RF CABLE SOURCE 2 FT LG 28480 08511 20031 26 11667C 50 GHZ POWER SPLITTER 28480 11667C 28 08490 60011 FIXED ATTENUATOR 6 DB TWO SUPPLIED IN KIT 28480 08490 60011 29 08490 60012 FIXED ATTENUATOR 20 DB 28480 08490 60012 30 85138B FIXED LOAD 50 OHM F 2 4 MM 28480 85138B 31 85138A FIXED LOAD 50 OHM M 2 4 MM 28480 85138A 32 1250 2188 ADAPTER F 2 4MM F 2 4MM 28480 1250 2188 33 08510 60022 8510 8360 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR KIT 28480 08510 60022 THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE INCLUDED IN THE 8510 8360 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR KITS ARE AVAILABLE SEPARATELY 34 08510 90268 INSTALLATION NOTE 28480 08510 90268 35 85102 80115 PANEL OVERLAY 28480 85102 80115 ILLUSTRATED 5 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Available Service Tools Figure 5 2 Available Service Tools 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 9 Replaceable Parts Available Service Tools Figure 5 3 Available Service Tools 5 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Available Service Tools This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 11 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 5 85101C Top Internal with CRT Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number Al 85101 60249 1 FRONT PANEL WITH KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60249 A2 09
122. 01 60257 2 85101 60254 1 RIBBON CABLE DISK DRIVE 28480 85101 60254 W3 85101 60259 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY DISK DRIVE POWER 28480 85101 60259 1 0515 2086 5 MACH SCREW 4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW 3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 40014 11 PC BOARD SPACER 28480 85101 40014 4 85101 20055 1 RFI GASKET TOP 28480 85101 20055 5 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW 3 0 8MM 28480 0515 0372 6 85101 00051 1 CARD CAGE COVER 28480 85101 00051 7 0515 1400 2 MACH SCREW 3 5 8 FLP 28480 0515 1400 8 0515 0433 4 MACH SCREW 4 0 8MM TX 28480 0515 0433 5 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 4 85101C Top Internal with CRT Display not visible AQ 1 5 AB A7 11 places gt IP 21 places 1 ON E W 5 0 l 0 D S Q not visible 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 13 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 5 85101C Bottom Internal with CRT Display Ref Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 5 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 60267 1 MOTHERBD CARD CAGE ASSY INCLUDES 28480 85101 60267 FRAM
123. 0296 1 A1 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60296 6 85101 80135 1 OVERLAY RIGHT SIDE 28480 85101 80135 7 85101 80136 1 NAME PLATE 28480 85101 80136 NOTE A15 85101 60297 LCD ASSY includes these individually replaceable parts A16 0950 3379 1 each INVERTER BD AY W8 8120 8842 1 each CA INVERTER W7 8121 0576 1 each CA DATA FOR LCD 08757 40018 1 each SOFT KEYPAD MEMBRANE FOR SOFTKEYS 85101 60289 1 each FP SOFT KEYPAD BD AY FOR SOFTKEYS 2090 0386 1 LCD BACKLIGHT DISPLAY LAMP 1000 0995 LCD FILTER DISPLAY FILTER GLASS 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 29 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Table 5 10 85101C Front Panel Internal with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 85101 20299 1 FRONT BEZEL 28480 85101 20299 2 85101 00062 1 SUB PANEL 28480 85101 00062 3 0515 1946 6 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 1946 4 85101 80084 1 FRONT DRESS PANEL 28480 85101 80084 5 7121 4611 1 LABEL MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 6 0510 1148 3 PUSH ON RETAINER 28480 0510 1148 7 85101 60288 1 KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60288 8 85101 20053 1 AIR DAM 28480 85101 20053 9 3050 0105 8 WASHER FLAT 125 ID 28480 3050 0105 10 0515 0430 8 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 0430 11 85101 60234 1 ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR RPG 28480 85101 60234 12 2190 0016 2 WASHER INTL T3 8 IN 37710 28480 2190 0016 13 2950 0043 2 NUT DBLCHAM 3 8 32 THD 0
124. 0957 MOOR 1 2 Deg 186 000 093 O95 O95 067 OLE AGE 065 54 O64 ORI 052 849 ean 087 2045 444 42 941 040 20 40 iMag Lin 000029 180 000 Deg 000039 2174 888898 056 424142 055 000129 054 009225 054 00028 954 009327 054 000290 042 000225 04 000 60 000795 041 000429 941 000454 000498 04 00853 O41 BIASES B48 000597 040 000523 040 040 0006937 840 40 50 Mag Lin Deg 090099 189 000 008121 2139 09 169 037 000728 087 00023 083 000255 982 000422 881 0800259 044 000305 043 00052 043 090270 042 000404 042 000438 042 00047 O42 000505 041 0005739 041 000573 041 000505 04 000639 041 000672 041 8280705 040 25 Measurement parameter 511 Type of plot dynamic accuracy overall magnitude detection accuracy as a function of levels for signais or arbitrary phase Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded Time and date the plot was made For reflection plots 511 or 522 the valu
125. 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments Figure 7 1 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Controls CRT Only FOCUS ADJUSTMENT CONTROL VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT CONTROL 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 11 Adjustments Procedure 2 CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Procedure 2 CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Equipment Degausser Description and Procedure As with all color CRT monitors the display is very susceptible to external magnetic fields These fields can originate from many sources including metal frame tables and from the earth The usual symptom is a discoloration or slight dimming of the display usually near the top left corner of the CRT In extreme cases a total color shift may be observed for example a trace that was red may shift to green This shift does not suggest a problem with the display it is characteristic of color displays If the display becomes magnetized or if color purity is a problem cycle the power several times Leave the instrument off for at least 15 seconds before switching on the power This will trigger the automatic degaussing circuit in the display If this is insufficient to get color purity a commercially available degausser demagnetizer must be used either a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser can be used Follow the manufacturer s instructions keeping in mind the following it is imperative when demagnetizing the display that the degausser is not placed clos
126. 1 62 gt J11 61 gt 11 60 2 11 59 2 J11 58 2 J11 57 gt J11 56 J13 108 J13 107 J13 106 13 105 213 109 gt J13 103 2 13 102 J13 101 J13 100 2 413 99 J13 98 gt J1 3 97 gt J1 3 96 gt J13 95 gt J1 3 94 gt J1 3 93 J13 92 gt 13 91 gt 13 90 gt J1 3 89 J13 88 gt J1 3 87 gt J13 86 J13 85 gt J13 84 13 83 gt J1 3 82 gt J1 3 81 gt J1 3 82 gt J13 79 gt J13 78 gt J13 77 gt J13 76 gt J13 75 gt J13 74 gt 13 73 gt J13 72 gt J13 71 gt J13 70 gt J13 69 gt J13 68 gt J13 67 gt J13 66 gt 413 65 J13 64 13 63 13 62 gt J1 3 61 gt J1 3 60 gt 413 59 gt J13 58 gt J13 57 gt 413 56 MONGND MONGNDSENSE MON6SVSENSE MON65V DGND DGND DGND DGND N C MOTORRTN MOTORRTN N C Ce ee ee 0 u MOTORRTN MOTORRTN rr ANN 4 44 AN AN 4444444444 VVVVVVVV VV VY N C N C DGN DGN N C N C N C DGND DGND SPARE 1 SPARE 3 SPARES N C N C N C DGND DGND LSHDN HMUL BSY LPRST
127. 1 8403 5 5041 8801 4 FOOT BOTTOM 28480 5041 8801 6 85102 00061 1 BOTTOM COVER 28480 85102 00061 7 5062 3799 2 HANDLE ASSEMBLY FRONT 28480 5062 3799 8 0515 0396 6 SCREW MACH 8 32 375 IN LG 100 DEG 28480 0515 0396 9 5021 8496 2 TRIM FRONT HANDLE 28480 5021 8496 10 5041 8821 2 28480 5041 8821 11 5001 8232 1 GUSSET SIDE 28480 5001 8232 12 5021 5837 4 STRUT CORNER 18 28480 5021 5837 13 5021 5804 1 FRAME REAR 28480 5021 5804 5 56 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 30 85102 Cabinet Parts 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 57 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts 5 58 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures Replacement Procedures Overview Overview 85101C Replacement Procedures The original 85101C Display Processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD Some replacement procedures may differ depending on the display installed In such instances each display CRT or LCD is documented separately 8510C Equipped with a CRT Display 8510C Equipped with an LCD Front panel A1 Front panel A1 Rotary pulse generator RPG Rotary pulse generator RPG Disk drive A2 Disk drive A2 CRT display A11 LCD assembly A15 Rear panel 9 Rear panel 9 Preregulator A10 Preregulator A10 Motherboard card cage assembly Motherboard card cage assembly Assembl
128. 100 4388 W63 85102 60193 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY LINE SWITCH 28480 85102 60193 1 5021 5804 1 FRAME REAR 28480 5021 5804 2 0515 1367 20 SCREW MACH 8 32 25 IN LG 100 DEG 00000 Order by Desc 3 5001 8232 1 GUSSET SIDE 28480 5001 8232 4 5021 5837 4 STRUT CORNER 18 28480 5021 5837 5 2360 0334 6 SCREW SM 632 312FLPD 28480 2360 0334 6 2510 0049 4 SCREW MACH 8 32 5 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by Desc 7 2360 0115 36 SCREW MACH 6 32 312 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by Desc 8 2420 0002 3 NUT HEX 6 32 00000 Order by Desc 9 1400 0017 1 CLAMP CABLE 312 DIA 375 WD NYL 28480 1400 0017 10 3050 0227 4 WASHER FL MTLC NO 6 149 IN ID 28480 3050 0227 11 2360 0121 3 SCREW SM 632 500PNPD 00000 Order by Desc 12 1400 0757 1 CLAMP CABLE 25 DIA 1 WD PVC 28480 1400 0757 13 5020 8896 2 FRONT HANDLE TRIM 28480 5020 8896 5 50 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 27 85102 Front Panel Board Assembly Al 8510 FRONT PANEL FRONT A1A1 A1 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A1 85102 60001 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY FRONT PANEL NEW 28480 85102 60001 A1 85102 69001 BOARD ASSEMBLY FRONT PANEL R E 28480 85102 69001 AlA1 85102 60029 1 BOARD ASSY FRONT PANEL INTERFACE NEW 28480 85102 60029 1 85102 69029 BOARD ASSY FRONT PANEL INTERFACE 28480 85102 69029 1 0380 0020 2 SPACER RND 25 IN LG 128 IN ID 00000 Order by Desc 2 2190 0019 2 WASHER LK HLCL NO
129. 101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY O Q HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM HP85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM HP85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM TEST SET HP IB SERVICE PROGRAM HP8360 SERVICE PROGRAM RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F are ossigned to MENU 1 2 See next page 3 See next page 4 See next page F see note 1 G n M uJ Ck m X1 C C J respectively 2 To make selection type the number then press MARKER indicated 3 The default value on data entry is zero Copyright Hewlett Packard 1987 1988 1991 HP85101 I O BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TESTS A1 A2 A7 DISC CONTROLLER BUS TEST A7 DISC WRITE READ TEST A2 A7 TIMER TEST A7 SERIAL 1 0 TEST 7 TIMER CLOCK PERIPHERAL TCP TESTS A7 CPU TO TEST 7 BIDIRECTIONAL TEST 7 STATIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 RPG TEST 1 7 KEYBOARD AND LEDS TEST 1 7 HP85102 INTERFACE TEST A7 DYNAMIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 SECURITY KEYS INTERFACE TEST A7 WATCHDOG TIMER TEST A7 RETURN TO HP85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY O O O gt N O G N tG n3 tM u1 k m X1 C PASSWORD ENTRY CAUTI
130. 102 60133 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J5 A14J3 28480 85102 60133 WA 85102 60134 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J4 A13J3 28480 85102 60134 W5 NOT ASSIGNED W6 85102 60136 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 6 6 5 4 28480 85102 60136 W7 85102 60137 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J5 A7J4 28480 85102 60137 W8 85102 60138 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A11J2 A10J4 28480 85102 60138 w9 85102 60139 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A9J1 A10J3 28480 85102 60139 W10 85102 60140 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J1 A10J2 28480 85102 60140 W11 85102 60141 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J2 A10J1 28480 85102 60141 W12 85102 60142 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A11J1 A12J4 28480 85102 60142 W13 85102 60143 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A14J1 A12J3 28480 85102 60143 W14 85102 60144 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J2 A12J2 28480 85102 60144 W15 85102 60145 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J1 A12J1 28480 85102 60145 W16 85102 60146 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J11 A23J2 28480 85102 60146 W17 85102 60147 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A21J3 A23J3 28480 85102 60147 W18 85102 60148 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A14J6 A21J1 28480 85102 60148 W19 85102 60149 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J7 J7 28480 85102 60149 W20 85102 60150 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A10J5 A5J3 28480 85102 60150 w21 85102 60151 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 5 1 17 2 28480 85102 60151 W22 85102 60152 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A5J2 A17J1 28480 85102 60152 W23 85102 60153 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A12J5 A7J3 28480 85102 60153 W24 85102 60154 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A7J1 A17J4 28480 85102 60154 W25 85102 60155 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A7J2 A17J3 28480 85102 60155 W26 85102 60156 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A17J5 A18J1 28480 85102 60156 W27 85
131. 102 60157 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A19J2 J3 28480 85102 60157 W28 85102 60158 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A20J1 J5 28480 85102 60158 W29 85102 60159 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A21J4 J6 28480 85102 60159 W30 85102 60160 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A2 A11J4 28480 85102 60160 W31 85102 60161 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A3 A9J4 28480 85102 60161 W32 85102 60162 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A4 A13J4 28480 85102 60162 W33 85102 60163 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A5 A22J1 28480 85102 60163 W34 85102 60164 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A6 A23J1 28480 85102 60164 W35 85102 60165 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 7 22 28480 85102 60165 W36 85102 60166 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A1 A14J4 28480 85102 60166 W37 85102 60167 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 13 6 21 2 28480 85102 60167 W38 85102 60168 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J3 J4 28480 85102 60168 W39 85102 60169 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J4 A19J1 28480 85102 60169 W40 85102 60223 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A16J2 REAR PANEL J9 28480 85102 60223 W41 85102 60224 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A20J2 REAR PANEL J10 28480 85102 60224 W42 85102 60222 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A16J1 A23J1 28480 85102 60222 W43 NOT ASSIGNED W44 85102 60174 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J10 A8J1 28480 85102 60174 5 44 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 22 85102 Cable Locations Wo WS W30 W32 W36 ES dde HE sl P ind ES MW SS 4 51 28 W22 Wu2 WHO W21 W25 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 45 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Par
132. 10C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Error Terms techniques and on cleaning and gaging connectors V Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor subtle performance problems Refer to the main troubleshooting procedures in the beginning of this chapter if a blatant failure or gross measurement error is evident V 1115 often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice using two separate measurement calibrations to establish the degree of repeatability If the results do not seem repeatable check all connectors and cables V The errors displayed by the verification program may be greater than the specified total uncertainty errors that you print out using the specifications program This can be due to bad connections during calibration or verification or to devices cables or rear panel test set extension links that are faulty dirty or damaged In addition defective calibration devices can be the cause of degraded error term data just as careless calibration methods can Measurement Calibration Always perform a measurement calibration before doing the error term inspection If the system includes an S parameter test set do a full 2 port calibration For systems with a reflection transmission test set do a one path 2 port calibration Error Terms Inspection Procedure This procedure uses the specifications software to display and print out the system error terms It compares the raw error terms to the printout
133. 124 8510C On Site Service Manual AUXILLARY MENUS SYSTEM SYSTEM MENU DISPLAY FUNCTIONS HP 1B ADDRESSES CRT OFF FREQUENCY OFF BEEPER ON OFF RESET IF CORRECT I ON MORE SYSTEM MORE MENU PULSE CONF IG EDIT MULT SRC DATE TIME FUNCTIONS SYSTEM PHASELOCK POWER LEVELING ANALOG OUT ON OFF SERVICE FUNCTIONS SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU TEST MENU SYSTEM BUS LOCAL REMOTE IF GAIN PEEK POKE LOCATION PEEK POKE SOF TWARE REVISION rr59c MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU LOOPING SELF TESTS SYSTEM COMMANDS 1 AS PROCESSOR EPROM 15 RUN MAIN PROGRAM 2 A5 PROCESSOR RAM 16 MEMORY OPERATIONS 3 A7 DATA BUS 17 RERUN SELF TEST 4 A4 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 18 REPEAT TEST LOOP 5 A4 DISPLAY RAM 6 A7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 7 A7 PUBLIC DISC COMMANDS 8 A7 SYSTEM BUS 19 LOAD PROGRAM DISC 9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM 20 RECORD PROGRAM DISC 10 AS MULTIPLIER 21 INITIALIZE DISC 11 7 DISC CONTROLLER 12 A6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY 13 IF DETECTOR DATA SERVICE COMMANDS 22 RUN SERVICE PROGRAM 25 DIAGNOSE A FAILURE 14 KEYBOARD ENTER SELECTION THEN PRESS MARKER HP85101 CPU BOARD TESTS 5 DRAM REFRESH TEST READ WRITE SHIFT ACCUMULATOR TEST MULTIPLIER TEST COMPLEX MULTIPLY TEST CIRCLE TEST EXERCISES MULTIPLIER SIGNATURE ANALYSIS MULTIPLIER SIGNATURE ANALYSIS ADDRESS BUS SIGNATURE ANALYSIS DATA BUS RETURN TO HP85
134. 12417 2 834 020467 4 837 027543 6 518 400 018468 1 592 013057 2 730 021582 4 576 28996 6 161 450 010932 1 483 013771 2 612 020855 4 491 030619 5 905 500 011441 1 400 014558 2 52 024215 4 358 032411 5 720 550 011955 1 232 0154198 2 463 025725 4 252 034374 5 5865 500 012549 1 284 916248 2 417 27368 4 195 036505 5 498 B50 013187 1 247 017328 2 382 023139 4 158 038805 5 424 788 013869 1 219 018393 2 360 0319398 4 121 041274 5 382 750 914595 1 198 018528 2 347 023068 4 107 043912 5 358 800 015364 1 182 020744 2 540 035226 4 103 046718 5 349 850 016177 172 022029 2 339 037512 4 193 049593 5 353 999 017034 1 167 023278 2 542 039926 4 122 092836 5 367 950 017834 1 154 024796 2 349 042469 4 141 056147 5 388 1 000 018878 1 164 0268285 2 359 045140 4 166 059626 6 4148 XURRESWWEAKUNWUSTTREREATEARAENVEVUNNTEVETHTEESERUETERRORSEEEWEMTENERRMUEWSUNRUMNEEME NOTES 1 Measurement parameter 511 2 Uncertainty limits upper or lower the limits only apply to transmission measurements 3 Type of plot worst case uncertainties This is a field bottoms up uncertainty analysis of the HP 8510 being verified using the worst case specifications of the HP 8510 system 4 Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded 5 Time and date the plot was made 6 For r
135. 20 1 430 98754A 16 inch CRT 98785A 98789A 200 680 Typical Hard Disk Drive 65 222 HP LaserJet II 170 to 800 580 to 2 720 HP PaintJet 20 68 HP 7440A Plotter 100 340 System Total 1 Values are based on 120 Vac supplied to each instrument at 60 Hz CAUTION This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 61010 1 and 664 respectively Space Requirements An area must be provided for the system instruments The following table lists the space required for different configurations and includes the additional space for proper ventilation Table 9 3 System Space Requirements Height Width Depth 85043C System Cabinet 132 zm 60 cm 92 cm without work surface 52 in 24 in 36 in 9 4 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Preparing the Site Table 9 3 System Space Requirements Height Width Depth Bench Top System 60 cm 45 cm 60 cm arranged as single stack 24 in 18 in 24 in arranged as two stacks 113cm 60 45 in 24 in a Refer to Figure 9 4 for a recommended cabinet configuration b Refer to Figure 9 5 for bench top configurations Electrical Requirements To determine the power requirements of a particular system add the volt amp ratings of the individual instruments These ratings can be found on the rear panel of the instrument near the line module The voltage and frequency information can
136. 275 0 2 51 Color Model Test Set Device Length 19 0 erry HP8517R 2 4mm S Parameter 45MHz SOGHz Source HP8355 A Synthesizer 45MHz 50 06Hz Calibration Kit HPBSOSBA 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cables 5 pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4ma Level 045 2 2 20 20 40 dB Mag dB Deg Mag dB Dep Mag dB Deg 0898 050 9105 078 0063 042 0085 056 0062 040 0052 040 0651 040 0062 041 8073 052 0081 054 0080 053 9082 054 01 8 078 8085 056 0118 073 9171 144 0212 140 9183 4121 0217 143 0217 143 0239 192 0300 198 178 0473 313 50 0 B365 241 0804 532 55 0 0553 377 1402 932 60 0 0961 638 2464 t 649 65 9 1674 1 115 452 2 927 70 0 2839 1 872 7545 5 208 75 0 5149 3 502 1 2890 9 263 80 0 846 6 231 2 1904 16 658 85 0 1 9326 11 127 3 5737 30 665 90 0 2 5624 20 068 5 6067 65 084 40 50 Mag 48 Deg e tro 12 0033 961 9082 054 205 04e 0064 942 9058 945 012 085 0147 097 9145 12 9298 197 9590 331 2859 576 1528 1 817 2693 1 804 4728 2 207 4142 10 184 3746 18 325 8574 33 993 8432 180 000 3482 180 000 Measurement parameter S21 Type of plot dynamic accuracy overall magnitude det
137. 28480 85102 80116 3 5062 3735 1 COVER TOP 18 28480 5062 3735 4 5062 3799 2 HANDLE ASSEMBLY FRONT 28480 5062 3799 5 85102 00043 1 BOTTOM COVER 28480 85102 00043 6 5041 8801 4 FOOT BOTTOM 28480 5041 8801 7 5062 3757 2 COVER ASSEMBLY SIDE 28480 5062 3757 8 85102 20071 1 FRONT BEZEL MACH 28480 85102 20071 W63 85102 60193 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY LINE SWITCH 28480 85102 60193 85102 60237 1 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY 28480 85102 60237 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 47 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 16 85102 Rear Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number B1 08756 20073 1 FAN 85102B 28480 08756 20073 E3 0360 0031 TERMINAL CRIMP R TNG 6 22 16 AWG RED 28480 0360 0031 E4 0360 1632 1 TERMINAL SLDR LUG LK MTG FOR 3 8 SCR 28480 0360 1632 5 0362 0227 2 CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT 1 14 MM BSC SZ 28480 0362 0227 E6 0362 0227 CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT 1 14 MM BSC SZ 28480 0362 0227 E11 1200 0147 8 INSULATOR FLG BSHG NYLON 28480 1200 0147 18 F1 2100 0002 1 2A 250V NTD 1 25X 25 UL 75915 2100 0002 FL1 0960 0443 1 LINE MODULE FILTERED 28480 0960 0443 J1 1251 2197 1 CONNECTOR R amp P 24F 28480 1251 2197 J2 1250 1391 1 ADAPTOR TEE MFM SMB 28480 1250 1391 J4 1250 0870 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 0HM 28480 1250 0870 J5 1250 1091 1 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 0HM 28480 1250 1091 J6 1250 0870 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 0
138. 5 IN LGPAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 8 2190 0017 4 WASHER LK HLCL NO 8 168 IN ID 28480 2190 0017 9 2510 0138 4 SCREW MACH 8 32 3 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 10 3050 0005 4 WASHER SHLDR NO 6 14 IN 1D 375 IN OD 28480 3050 0005 11 3050 0139 4 WASHER FL MTLC NO 8 172 IN ID 28480 3050 0139 12 85102 20070 2 MOUNT TRANSFORMER 28480 85102 20070 14 08505 20133 1 ENCLOSURE CKT 28480 08505 20133 15 85102 00023 1 COVER RF MAIN PHASE LOCK 28480 85102 00023 16 85102 00022 1 COVER RF PRETUNE CONTROL 28480 85102 00022 17 85102 00021 1 COVER RF IF COUNTER 28480 85102 00021 18 85102 00020 1 COVER RF SWP A D CONVERTER 28480 85102 00020 19 85102 00019 1 COVER RF A D CONVERTER 28480 85102 00019 20 85102 00018 1 COVER A D CONVERTER 28480 85102 00018 21 85102 00017 1 COVER RF SAMPLE HOLD 28480 85102 00017 22 85102 00053 1 COVER RF REMOTE APPLICATIONS 28480 85102 00053 23 85102 00060 1 GASKET RF COVER 28480 85102 00060 24 85102 00029 2 BRACKET 28480 85102 00029 25 85102 00028 1 BRACKET WIREWAY 28480 85102 00028 26 2360 0115 36 SCREW MACH 6 32 312 IN LGPAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 27 2200 1271 16 SCREW SM 440 375ETPNTX 28480 2200 1271 28 85102 00037 1 CLIP 28480 85102 00037 29 0515 2316 8 SCREW SMM3 5 6 PCPNTX 00000 Order by desc 30 2360 0334 10 SCREW SM 632 312FLPD 28480 2360 0334 31 85102 20061 1 GASKET RF COVER 28480 85102 20061 32 85102 00040 1 COVER BLANK 2 3 4 28480 85102 00040 33 85102 00005 1 COVER RF SYNCHR
139. 50 2075 1 DISC DRIVE 28480 0950 2075 85101 60244 1 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60244 A3 85101 69244 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 69244 A3F1 2110 0333 1 FUSE 1 5A 125V NTD 28480 2110 0333 A3F2 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 25 X 27 28480 2110 0425 A3F3 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 25 X 2 7 28480 2110 0425 A4 85101 60243 1 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60243 A4 85101 69243 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 69243 5 85101 60245 1 CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60245 5 85101 69245 CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69245 A6 85101 60238 1 EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60238 A6 85101 69238 EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 69238 Al 85101 60272 1 INPUT OUTPUT BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60272 A8 85101 60263 1 SECURITY KEY BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60263 NO IC SUPPLIED A8IC1 85101 69273 SECURITY KEY IC 8510C STANDARD 28480 85101 69273 REBUILT EXCHANGE ONLY Revision 6 8 firmware A8IC2 85101 69268 SECURITY KEY 8510 TIME DOMAIN OPT 010 28480 85101 69268 REBUILT EXCHANGE ONLY 9 85101 60246 1 REAR PANEL WITH BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60246 A10 0950 3488 1 PREREGULATOR ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 0950 3488 10 1 2110 0655 1 FUSE 3 15A 250V 28480 2110 0655 All 2090 0210 1 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 2090 0210 85101 60257 1 RIBBON CABLE ASSEMBLY 28480 851
140. 5101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY O UO WN ENTRY AREA HEX KEYS ENTR Y a o gt 6 C 63 69 EEA Gang e MENU 7 qq qo F 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU CRT 1 OF 2 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 8510C Service Program Menu CRT Insert 11x17 Side 2 File rr510c Remove This Page Formt117 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 125 HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM HP85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM HP85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM TEST SET HP 1B SERVICE PROGRAM HP8360 SERVICE PROGRAM RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F ore assigned to G n Ck m X1 1 and C J respectively then press MARKER 3 default value on data entry is zero Copyright Hewlett Packard 1987 1988 1991 1 See prev page G N F see note 1 M u 2 To moke o selection type the number indicoted rr510c TEST SET HP IB SERVICE PROGRAM MENU PRESET TEST SET SWITCH ACTIVE LIGHT SWITCH PORT 1 2 LIGHTS ACTIVATE PORT 1 2 ATTENUATOR INCREMENT ACTIVE ATTENUATOR SELECT NEW ADDRESS RETURN TO HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For test sets with oppropriote feature NOTES 1 To repeat o function press MARKER 2 The default Test Set HP IB address is 20 On the HP
141. 510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 12 85101C Top Internal with LCD J20 UNDER A14 AQ NOT VISIBLE J19 A16 INVERTER NOT VISIBLE les iN A1 NOT VISIBLE NOT VISIBLE 55424 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 27 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 13 85101C Bottom Internal with LCD 55441 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 4 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 60300 1 MOTHERBD CARD CAGE ASSY INCLUDES 28480 85101 60300 FRAME CORNER STRUTS 5 0515 1382 5 MACH SCREW 3 5 6 PCFLTX 28480 0515 1382 6 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 5 28 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 14 85101C Front Panel External with LCD s 3 Not Visible ss426c Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A15 85101 60297 1 A15 LCD ASSEMBLY see Note below 28480 85101 60297 2 08757 40005 1 LINE SWITCH BUTTON 28480 08757 40005 3 1460 1573 1 SPRING EXTENSION 138 IN OD 28480 1460 1573 4 85101 00081 1 LINE SWITCH ACTUATOR 28480 85101 00081 5 08753 00036 1 SWITCH INSULATOR 28480 08753 00036 Al 85101 6
142. 514B Option 002 003 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical 4 90 8515A RF Flow Diagrams and Typical 5 4 9 8516A RF Flow Diagrams and Typical 2 22 2222 2 2 4 92 8516A Option 002 003 RF Flow RF Diagrams and Typical Traces 4 93 8517 HF Flow RF Diagrams and Typical lt 5554 59 rhet pL RR 4 94 8517B RF Option 007 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical 4 95 oe diesen 4 97 VEGI is 4 97 051010 Power Supplies SUMMA 2 22 ien erui iR RR bn b ERR 4 97 85102 Power Supplies SHITOSEN ER AP doar kent na E qae Fa hi 4 98 85101C Display Processor Power Supply 4 101 Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 4 101 Check the Green LEDs on the 4 101 Measure Voltages on the 1 4 102 Determine Why the Green LED
143. 6420 HP 8516 RS 232 PORT a Serial Connection b Parallel Connection Parallel Printer Setup As shown in Figure 9 9 the parallel setup requires a GPIB HP IB to parallel port adapter In order to use currently available printers adapters such as MicroPlot 50A and MicroPrint 45CH are available from Intelligent Interfaces For more information consult their website at wwwuintelligent interfaces com 1 If using the Microprint 45CH you must set it to address 01 as explained its user s guide 2 Connect the 45CH GPIB input to the 8510C system bus 3 Connect the output of the 45CH to the laser printer Centronics input 4 Make sure the 45CH ac adapter module is set to the proper line voltage then plug it in 5 Make sure the 8510C is set up for an GPIB printer at address 701 On the 8510C Press LOCAL MORE PRINTER HP IB 6 Turn on the laser printer For further information about printer setup refer to Copy in the 8570C Operating and Programming Manual Switching On Power In systems with controllers switch on power to the controller last 85101 next to last In systems without controllers switch on power to the 85101 last 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 19 System Installation Making System Connections Making a Backup Operating System Disk Hold down the ZMARKER key on the analyzer and cycle the power on the analyzer switch on 85101 last Holding down the ZMARKER key makes
144. 65 run service program 4 66 running error messages 4 6 4 69 as built in diagnostics 4 69 categories of GPIB HP IB 4 71 IF Detector ADC 4 71 phase lock 4 71 source sweep 4 71 caution ADC cal failed 4 73 ADC not responding 4 73 autorange cal failed 4 74 caution optional function not installed 4 74 disc communication error 4 74 disc media wearing out replace soon 4 75 disk hardware problem 4 74 disk read or write error 4 74 failure check system bus configuration 4 75 failure fault indicator on 4 75 failure overmodulation 4 75 failure RF Unlocked 4 75 failure self test failure 4 75 IF cal failed 4 75 IF overload or 0 4 77 initialization failed 4 77 no IF found 4 77 optional function not installed 4 78 phase lock failure 4 78 phase lock lost 4 79 pretune failure 4 79 pretune lost failure 4 79 pulse cal failure on test reference channel s or both channels 4 80 source GPIB syntax error 4 80 source sweep sync error 4 80 sweep time too fast 4 81 system bus address error 4 81 system bus 5 error 4 81 test set GPIB HP IB syntax error 4 82 unable to lock to ext 10 MHz Ref 4 82 VTO over range 4 82 characteristics caution 4 69 error 4 70 prompt 4 70 tell 4 70 types 4 69 5 511 dynamic accuracy specifications example plots 8 67 table 8 68 11 uncertainty specifications example plots 8 65 table 8 66 521 uncertainty specifications example plots 8 69 8 71 table 8 7
145. 66003 2 4mn S Paraneter 45MHz 406Hz Source HP838X016 936K 4 8516 Synth 10MHz 406Hz 2 4mn Slotless Standard Grade SL Sliding Load Cal HP851330 pair short cables 2 4me Symbl 1 045 1 1Ps IPssf iLa2 ICff I fnt Edrr2 Edrx2 104 72 73 15 28 1024 8 00 8 98 1 0000 1 0000 Frequency GHz 32 00 53 1924 9 00 9 00 1 0000 1 000 99 28 2 20 20 36 73 31 4 77 36 413 1024 1824 9 02 2 90 9 00 2 99 1 0904 1 0008 1 0000 1 2000 741 90 37 90 0082 0201 37 9 33 00 18 9 98 0 9559 1352 41 99 37 30 0013 8852 90 70 77 15 13 26 15 71 28 2 31 103 93 92 83 90 67 71 12 Table type specifications of residual errors error terms left after measurement calibration The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for Conditions of the system that the specifications are based The systematic residual errors The typical reference power at port 1 maximum power at port 2 minimum power at port 2 and dynamic range The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter The specifications are generated for each frequency band 8510C On Site Service Manual on 8 59 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertaintie
146. 8 Needlenose pliers 8710 0595 Conductive Loctite 0470 0573 Insulated clip leads N A 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 3 Replacement Procedures Overview This page intentionally left blank 6 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations This product contains static sensitive components When handling these components or assemblies work on an anti static surface and use a static grounding wrist strap 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 5 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures 1 Front Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 2 Disconnect the power cords and remove the top and right side covers For an 85101C equipped with an LCD perform the disassembly procedure in A15 LCD Assembly Replacement on page 6 16 followed by step 6 and step 7 below For an 85101C equipped with a CRT continue with step 3 through step 7 Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 1 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel If you use another tool take care not to scratch the glass
147. 8510 Service Program AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 22 ZMARKER Refer to the menu map included in this section It shows all service program tests and assemblies tested How to Interpret Service Program Test Results The service program tests do not completely check all board assemblies but are designed to exercise the most vulnerable parts of each board If all tests pass there is a 90 confidence level that all board assemblies tested are good If service program tests indicate a failure in a board assembly there is a 75 probability that the board assembly indicated is bad First make sure there are no fundamental problems such as an improperly seated board and so forth If the 8510C has failed and the service program tests pass then check to see that there are no fundamental problems such as wrong cable connections error messages due to improperly seated boards or extra GPIB cables attached to the analyzer but not to anything else 8510 Service Program Menu Map The service program menu map is located at the end of this section From this map you can access separate menus for testing the 85101C 85102 the test set or source 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 107 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 85101 Display Processor Service Program Menu From this menu access four different menus associated with 85101C troubleshooting You can enter this menu by pressing 1 ZMARKER Use
148. 85102 rear panel connect 20 MHz OUT to J1 TEST SET INTERCONNECT using the service adapter and a BNC cable Also connect ANALOG 10V to SWEEP 0 10 using another BNC cable Failure to do so will result false error messages PRESS TO CONTINUE NOTE Disconnect BNC cables from 85102 to source when running tests Failure to do so will result in false error messages HP8360 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU TEST FRONT PANEL EMULATOR CHANGE ADDRESS default is 19 RETURN TO HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU HP85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM MENU ADC CONTROL TEST A19 SWEEP ADC TEST A20 ADC TEST A18 CAL DAC TEST A17 100 kHz IF AMPLIFIER TEST A10 A12 SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR TEST 5 7 20 MHz MIXER TEST 9 11 A13 14 PRETUNE PHASE LOCK TEST A22 MAIN PHASE LOCK TEST A23 IF COUNTER TEST A21 RUN ALL THE ABOVE TESTS HP85102 FRONT PANEL TEST RETURN TO HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU NOTE Always check cables leading to ond from boards with suspected problems NOTE fail tests 1 or 2 due to processor speed issue when running all tests If tests 1 ond 2 poss individually then ossume the instrument is OK 8510C SERVICE PROGRAM MENU CRT 2 OF 2 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 8510C Service Program Menu LCD file rrb11c Insert 11x17 side 1 Remove This Page
149. 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 25 85102 Rear W30 W36 B1 E5 E6 w55 w38 W27 w56 W29 W19 places NOT VISIBLE FLI may be different 2 places 4 places than shown J2 m um JS mE 4 z 36 places m IA G md 5 places 6 11 18 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 0590 0663 2 NUT HEX 4 40 28480 0590 0663 3050 0235 2 WASHER FLAT 117 IN ID 28480 3050 0235 3050 0011 2 WASHER FLAT 130 IN HD 28480 3050 0011 2200 0107 2 SCREW MACH 440 375 IN LG PAN HD POZI 28480 2200 0107 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 49 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 26 85102 Left and Right Internal 2 20 places places s Z x s 0 22 2 23 2 2 9 G43 2 48 8D e 5 6 places 6 4 places 1 RY er ee ee ee ae S Se Boy Bye gt 520 na w Le 40 9 9 m ccc xm ee PED E S e ERN m EE ST lS es RI NOT VISIBLE Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0360 0009 1 TERMINAL SLDR LUG PL MTG FOR 6 SCR 28480 0360 0009 Ti 9100 4388 1 TRANSFORMER 28480 9
150. 8517B Option 007 The procedure in this section is divided into two parts First the service adapter is connected to the 85102 IF detector to simulate basic operation of the test set If the 85102 is operating correctly then the test set is re connected and the IF responses of the six RF signal paths are checked to verify test set operation Knowing which test set assemblies are common to the RF signal paths of known IF signal responses is a powerful troubleshooting tool Second you will check the output power levels of each test set sampler mixer assembly and its associated IF amplifier alone This is done by comparing the power levels and shape of the frequency response trace with traces supplied in this section As each of the six RF signal paths are checked you will record the results in a table The most probable cause of failure is listed according to which RF signal path or paths are incorrect Definition of Terms The following terms are explained in greater detail in the Operating and Programming Manual included with the 8510C documentation User 1 2 3 and 4 These are user defined parameters and allow measurement of unratioed power at the first frequency converter inputs for each of the reference and test signal paths Therefore the displayed frequency response of a user parameter is the combined test set sampler IF output response of 1 the source RF signal at the first converter input and 2 the test set VTO local oscillator sign
151. 9 USE PREFIX 14 15 85102 60015 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY REGULATOR NEW 28480 85102 60015 16 85102 60235 1 REMOTE APPLICATIONS BOARD NEW 28480 85102 60235 Al7 85102 60212 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY SAMPLE AND HOLD NEW 28480 85102 60212 Al7 85102 69212 BOARD ASSEMBLY SAMPLE AND HOLD 28480 85102 69212 18 85102 60208 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY A D CONVERTER NEW 28480 85102 60208 18 85102 69208 BOARD ASSEMBLY A D CONVERTER R E 28480 85102 69208 A19 85102 60019 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY ADC CONTROL NEW 28480 85102 60019 19 85102 69019 BOARD ASSEMBLY ADC CONTROL R E 28480 85102 69019 A20 85102 60234 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY SWEEP ADC NEW 28480 85102 60234 21 85102 60021 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY IF COUNTER NEW 28480 85102 60021 21 85102 69021 BOARD ASSEMBLY IF COUNTER 28480 85102 69021 A22 85102 60272 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY PRETUNE CONTROL NEW 28480 85102 60272 A22 85102 69272 BOARD ASSEMBLY PRETUNE CONTROL R E 28480 85102 69272 23 85102 60240 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY MAIN PHASE LOCK NEW 28480 85102 60240 A24 85102 60024 1 BOARD ASSY PROCESSOR INTERFACE NEW 28480 85102 60024 A24 85102 69024 BOARD ASSY PROCESSOR INTERFACE 28480 85102 69024 A26 85102 60273 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY RECTIFIER NEW 28480 85102 60273 A26 85102 69273 BOARD ASSEMBLY RECTIFIER 28480 85102 60273 A26F1 2110 0083 1 FUSE 2 5A 250V 28480 2110 0083 5 40 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Ta
152. 94IN THK 00000 Order by desc 14 3050 0180 1 PTFE WASHER 28480 3050 0180 15 0370 3033 1 KNOB BASE 250 JG 28480 0370 3033 5 30 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD 85101C Front Panel Internal with LCD Figure 5 15 5 31 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Table 5 11 85101C Rear Panel External with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Agilent Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5041 8821 2 STANDOFF REAR PANEL 28480 5041 8821 2 0515 0372 3 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 3 0515 1232 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM PN PD 28480 0515 1232 4 0515 0892 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 12MM PN PD 28480 0515 0892 5 5021 8537 1 LOCKING FOOT RIGHT 28480 5021 8537 6 5021 8539 1 LOCKING FOOT LEFT 28480 5041 8539 7 85101 60290 1 REAR PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60290 8 2190 0586 4 WASHER HLCL 4 0MM 28480 2190 0586 9 0380 0643 4 STANDOFF HEX 255IN LG 6 32 28480 0380 0643 10 2190 0584 8 WASHER LK M3 0 NOM 28480 2190 0584 11 1251 7812 8 CONNECTOR JACKSCREW 28480 1251 7812 12 85101 00082 1 REAR PANEL 28480 85101 00045 13 7121 4611 1 LABEL MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 14 3050 1192 4 WASHER FL M3 5 NOM 28480 3050 1192 15 3160 0281 1 FINGER GUARD 28480 3160 0281 16 0515 0379 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 16MM PN TX 28480 0515 0379 17 08415 60036 1 FAN TUBE AXIAL 2848
153. APTER 3 5 MM M 2 4 MM 28480 1250 2330 14 1250 1391 ADAPTER TEE SMB 28480 1250 1391 15 8710 0630 ALIGNMENT TOOL 08 SCDR 28480 8710 0630 16 1400 0088 ALLIGATOR CLIP 28480 1400 0088 17 1490 0025 TEST PROBE 28480 1490 0025 18 85101 60209 BOARD ASSY 85102 EMULATOR 28480 85101 60209 19 85101 60236 85101 POST REGULATOR EXTENDER BOARD 28480 85101 60236 20 85101 60237 85101 STANDARD EXTENDER BOARD 28480 85101 60237 21 85102 60210 SERVICE ADAPTER TEST SET EMULATOR 28480 85102 60210 22 85102 60030 BOARD ASSEMBLY SERVICE EXTENDER 28480 85102 60030 27 8493C OPT 010 APC 3 5 10DB PAD 28480 8493C OPT 010 2110 0001 FUSE 1A 250V 85102 A26F3 28480 2110 0001 2110 0002 FUSE 2A 250V 85102 F1 LINE FUSE 28480 2110 0002 2110 0012 FUSE 51 250V 85102 A24F1 28480 2110 0012 2110 0083 FUSE 2 5A 250V 85102 26 1 A26F2 28480 2110 0083 2110 0333 FUSE 1 5A 125V 85101C A3F1 28480 2110 0333 2110 0342 FUSE 8A 250V 85102 A26F4 28480 2110 0342 2110 0425 FUSE 2A 125V 851010 A3F2 A3F3 28480 2110 0425 2110 0655 FUSE 3 15A 250V 85101C LINE FUSE 28480 2110 0655 9300 1367 WRIST STRAP ANTI STATIC ADJUSTABLE 28480 9300 1367 DOES NOT INCLUDE CORD 9300 0980 GROUNDING CORD 5 FEET LONG USE WITH WRIST STRAP 28480 9300 0980 9300 0797 ANTI STATIC EQUIPMENT MAT 4 FT X 2 FT 28480 9300 0797 23 08511 60016 8511B SERVICE TOOLS KIT 28480 08511 60016 THE FOLLOWING 8511B SERVICE TOOLS MAY BE ORDERED ASA KIT OR ORDERED SEPARATELY 24 08511 2
154. AUTORANGE CAL FAILED Source Sweep Running Error Messages SOURCE SWEEP SYNC ERROR SWEEP TIME TOO FAST GPIB HP IB Running Error Messages SOURCE SYNTAX ERROR SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR TEST SET SYNTAX ERROR Running Error Message Troubleshooting System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram Use the system level troubleshooting block diagram as a reference guide for troubleshooting running error messages Read How to Read This Block Diagram to the left of the block diagram The running error messages are listed on the right and have numbers associated with each message that cross reference locations on the block diagram Helpful Troubleshooting Hints Before troubleshooting a caution running error message first do the following 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 59 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Make sure that the line power applied to all instruments is correct Check all connections Refer to Chapter 9 System Installation if necessary Make sure the source RF power and frequency are correct as some phase lock errors are caused by these being improperly set Be sure that the test set is properly downconverting the RF source input signal to 20 MHz Refer to Unratioed Power Failures to verify test set operation Always press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys several times after an error message is displayed This will allow you to obtain the best indication of the true failur
155. Agilent Technologies 8510 Network Analyzer On Site Service Manual Serial Numbers This manual applies directly to instruments with this serial prefix number or above 3031A oes Agilent Technologies Part Number 08510 90282 Printed in USA May 2012 Supersedes July 2003 Copyright Agilent Technologies 1994 2001 2003 2012 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Agilent Technologies assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Agilent Technologies This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without prior written consent of Agilent Technologies Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 for DOD agencies and
156. B 5 dB Service Adapter Conclusions If one or more signal paths are incorrect The problem is most likely with the 85102 Stop this procedure and return to troubleshooting procedures for the 85102 If all signal paths are correct The 85102 is working properly The problem is most likely with the source or the test set Perform the following procedure to verify operation of the test set 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 75 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Unratioed Power Failures Test Set Unratioed Power Troubleshooting Use this procedure with the following test sets 8514B 8514B Option 002 003 8515A 8516A 8516A Option 002 003 8517B 8517B Option 007 Option 002 deletes the programmable step attenuators and the dc bias tees Option 003 reverses the port 2 coupler to provide high forward dynamic range Option 007 adds buffer amplifiers to provide high dynamic range Figure 4 10 shows a simplified diagram of RF signal paths tested in the unratioed power level tests Figure 4 10 Simplified Signal Path of Unratioed Power Test TEST SET HP 85102 4 76 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Power Supply Failures Power Supply Failures Overview NOTE Use these procedures only if you were directed to this section from the main troubleshooting section and you believe the problem is in the 85101C or 85102 power supply This section consists of procedures to troubleshoot the 85101 display proces
157. BASIC system The following extension files must be loaded into the controller memory Drivers Extensions DISC MAT KBD GPIB 10 GRAPH If you have any of the following system configurations the following driver and or extension files also must be 7 4 oaded Configuration Driver File Extension File SRM DCOMM SRM 9885 disk drive 9885 CS80 disk drive CS80 9122 disk drive CS80 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations To load the files type LOAD BIN filename for each driver filename and each extension filename if you have the double sided language extensions and drivers disk then press RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC 4 When all the driver files are loaded remove the disk If you have the double sided language extensions and drivers disk the procedure is complete If you do not have the double sided language extensions and drivers disk insert the Basic 3 0 or higher language extensions disk into the same disk drive 5 Type LOAD BIN filename for each extension filename then press RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD The first three adjustments apply only to an the 85101C equipped with a CRT There are no equivalent adjustment procedures for an 85101C equipped with an LCD Table 7 1 Adjustment Procedures Title Procedure Number Assembly Adjusted Vertical
158. BLE NUMBER TABLE TYPE TABLE FORMAT OUTPUT DEVICE ETERM DIRECTION TOTAL UNCERTAINTY DYNAMIC ACCURACY MENU SELECT PARAMETER FORMAT UNCERTAINTY LIMIT COMPUTATIONS PARAMETER STEP RESOLUTION OUTPUT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT ADDRESSES FOR SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS AND PEN NUMBERS AND COLORS 1 Perform the How to Load the Software procedure earlier in this chapter 2 To run the performance verification press Verify System Serial Numbers 3 Complete the list of system component and kit serial numbers Also fill in the NIST test numbers from the verification kit Press DONE when the list is complete 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 47 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure 4 To begin a measurement calibration insert the calibration kit data disc into the analyzer disc drive and press System Cal If the list does not match your system press Prior Menu Prior Menu System Config to return to the hardware configuration menu to correct the list If the list does match your system press Resume 5 Follow the cable connection instructions on the display and then press Resume NOTE Tighten all connections to the correct torque 6 If your system operates at 45 MHz and your verification kit contains the device characterization data for 45 MHz insert the verification kit data disc into the analyzer disc drive and press Resume
159. C Relative Humidity Ambient temperature at measurement calibration Ambient temperature at performance verification 8 98 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Performance Test Record Table 8 16 Performance Test Record Test Description Minimum Results Maximum Measurement Specification Specification Uncertainty CW Frequency Accuracy Worst Case Value 45 MHz 44 999955 MHz 45 000045 MHz 10 Hz 2 GHz 1 999998 GHz 2 000002 GHz 10 Hz 20 GHz 19 99998 GHz 20 00002 GHz 4 kHz 26 5 GHz 626 4999735 GHz 26 5000265 GHz 5 kHz 40 GHz 39 99996 GHz 40 00004 GHz 5 kHz 50 GHz 24 999975 GHz 25 000025 GHz 5 kHz Swept Frequency Accuracy Worst Case Value Start Freq 0 196 of sweep 8360 150 kHz Stop Freq 196 of sweep 8340 41 Worst Case Value Start Freq 0 196 of sweep 8360 150 kHz Stop Freq 196 of sweep 8340 41 8 The measurement uncertainty is quoted for these performance tests using only the recommended models specified in Table 8 1 The measurement uncertainty quoted represents limits of 3 times the equivalent standard deviation 3s and is intended to 8510C On Site Service Manual e e represent a 99 confidence level For all sources except 83622 24 83622 24 only 83620 21 22 23 24 and 8341 only 83631 40 51 and 8340 only 83640 only 83651 only 8 99 Performance Verifica
160. Check Procedures is located later in this chapter Frequency Tests Description The second level of the system performance verification is for synthesized sources only The 8350 source frequency accuracy is tested during the total system uncertainty test procedure The source frequency accuracy is checked across the entire sweep range in both the swept and the CW sweep modes The Frequency Test Procedures is located later in this chapter Total System Uncertainty Test Description The procedure consists of calibrating the analyzer with a calibration kit measuring a set of characterized devices and comparing the resultant measured data to the data and uncertainty limits supplied with the verification kit The device data provided with the verification kit has a traceable path to NIST The total measurement uncertainty limits for the performance verification are the sum of the factory measurement uncertainties and the uncertainties associated with measuring the same devices on the system being verified The difference between the factory measured data and the verification measured data must fall within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the total system uncertainty test to pass You can compare the factory system measurement uncertainty to your system measurement uncertainty in Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the Performance Verification Devices located later in this chapter 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 5
161. DRESS default is 19 RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU On the 85102 rear panel connect 20 MHz OUT J1 TEST SET INTERCONNECT using the service adapter ond a BNC cable Also connect ANALOG 10V to SWEEP IN 0 10 using another BNC cable Failure to do so will result false error messages PRESS MARKER TO CONTINUE to NOTE 85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM MENU ADC CONTROL TEST A19 SWEEP ADC TEST A20 ADC TEST A18 CAL DAC TEST A17 100 kHz IF AMPLIFIER TEST A10 12 SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR TEST 5 7 20 MHz MIXER TEST 9 11 A13 14 PRETUNE PHASE LOCK TEST A22 MAIN PHASE LOCK TEST A23 IF COUNTER TEST A21 RUN ALL THE ABOVE TESTS 85102 FRONT PANEL TEST RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU NOTE Always check cables leading to and from boards with suspected problems Disconnect BNC cables from 85102 to source when running tests Failure to do so will result in false error messages LG nJ B M u C k m NOTE Moy fail tests 1 or 2 due to processor speed issue when running all tests If tests 1 ond 2 poss individually then ossume the instrument is OK 8510C SERVICE PROGRAM MENU LCD 2 OF 2 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Error Terms Error Terms Overview Error terms are factors used for error correction or accuracy enhancement in the analyzer system when correction is turne
162. E CORNER STRUTS 4 5180 8500 1 MYLAR DISPLAY INSULATOR 28480 5180 8500 5 0515 1400 2 MACH SCREW 3 5 8MM FLP TX 28480 0515 1400 6 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 5 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 6 85101C Front Panel External with CRT Display NOT VISIBLE Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 85101 40011 1 BEZEL SUPPORT 28480 85101 40011 2 08757 40005 1 LINE SWITCH BUTTON 28480 08757 40005 3 1460 1573 1 SPRING EXTENSION 138 IN OD 28480 1460 1573 4 08753 00048 1 LINE SWITCH ACTUATOR 28480 08753 00048 5 08753 00036 1 SWITCH INSULATOR 28480 08753 00036 6 5062 7208 1 SUBASSEMBLY BEZEL 28480 5062 7208 7 0515 1402 1 SCREW MACH M3 5 8 PCPNTX 28480 0515 1402 8 0515 1402 1 SCREW MACH M3 5 8 PCPNTX 28480 0515 1402 9 08757 40012 1 SOFT YS COVER 28480 08757 40012 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 15 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 6 85101C Front Panel Internal with CRT Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 85101 60249 FRONT BEZEL AND SUBPANEL 28480 85101 60249 1 85101 20056 1 FRONT BEZEL 28480 85101 20056 2 85101 00062 1 SUB PANEL 28480 85101 00062 3 0515 1946 6 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 1946 4 85101 80084 1 FRONT DRESS PANEL 28480 85101 80084 5 7121 4611 1 LABE
163. E UNCERTAINTY USER PARAMETERS HP851 C HPGSISA HP83631R 5052 TL NOCRBLES EXERCISE 3c 16 Dec 1992 17 16 21 Freq GHz 2045 to 2 _ Baud n 8 to 20 M e DUT Length 18 cm 511 9 S12 521 S22 0 S21 Worst Case Uncertainty dB 10 18 58 70 98 S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref S21 40 000 045 2 063 2 8 61 8 24 892 20 26 5 248 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 31 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Table 8 7 Using Non Standard Test Cables Exercise 3c Answers Questions Answers Assuming you have specified No Cables in the Hardware Configuration menu which error terms do you need to degrade to account for these cables What is the calculated worst case loss of the custom cables Which reflection and transmission test should you perform to determine the stability of the non standard cables Cable loss dc and RF Reflection and transmission repeatability 0 4 dB should be the calculated loss error term result For transmission stability Connect the cables together and measure 521 Look at S21 M then bend the cables For reflection stability Connect the short to port 1 cable and measure 511 Look at 11 M then bend the cables Repeat the reflection measurement on port 2 cable and measure 522 Table 8 8 Error Term Values Needed for This Custom Cable Question Po
164. For assistance see Contacting Agilent on page iii in the front matter of this manual Part 1 List Programming Codes If the 8510C system is manually controlled make a list of 8510 key presses used to create the conditions that showed the problem If you are using GPIB to control the system check your program and list the GPIB programming codes being sent to the 8510 when the problem occurred This list will be used in the following steps Check Programming Code Descriptions Check the information on key press functions and or mnemonics in the Keyword Dictionary The entries in this document contain detailed descriptions of the manual operation and programmed operation of each function Use the manual to verify how the commands should operate rather than assume they will operate in a certain way Refer to the Operating and Programming Manual for example programs If the actual behavior of a function is different than its documented intended behavior continue this procedure with Part 2 4 98 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Software Failures Part 2 List System Components and Firmware Revisions Write down the following information prior to contacting Agilent in the next part of this procedure The customer engineer CE will serve you better when this information is available The exact system configuration including the model numbers of all system components in the system e The firmware revisi
165. HIS MENU AFTER COMPLET ING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY O GQ N ENTRY AREA HEX KEYS ws C N TR gt lt oe 8510C SERVICE PROGRAM MENU LCD 1 OF 2 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 8510C Service Program Menu LCD File rr512c Insert 11x17 Side 2 Remove This Page Formtti7 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 127 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM 85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM TEST SET GPIB SERVICE PROGRAM 8360 SERVICE PROGRAM RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F are assigned to G n Ck m 11 C C J respectively 1 See prev 2 3 4 see note 1 M u 2 To make a selection type the number indicated then press MARKER 3 The default value on data entry is zero Copyright Agilent Technologies 1987 2001 rr512c poge TEST SET GPIB SERVICE PROGRAM MENU PRESET TEST SET SWITCH ACTIVE LIGHT SWITCH PORT 1 2 LIGHTS ACTIVATE PORT 1 2 ATTENUATOR INCREMENT ACTIVE ATTENUATOR SELECT NEW GPIB ADDRESS RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For test sets with appropriate feature NOTES 1 To repeot o function press MARKER 2 The default Test Set GPIB address is 20 8360 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU GPIB TEST FRONT PANEL EMULATOR CHANGE GPIB AD
166. HM 28480 1250 0870 J7 1250 0870 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 0HM 28480 1250 0870 J8 1250 0083 1 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE FR 50 28480 1250 0083 J9 1250 1091 1 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE FR 50 28480 1250 1091 J10 1250 0870 1 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE FR 50 28480 1250 0870 W19 85102 60149 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J7 J7 28480 85102 60149 W27 85102 60157 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A19J2 J3 28480 85102 60157 W29 85102 60159 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A21J4 J6 28480 85102 60159 W30 85102 60160 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 2 11 4 28480 85102 60160 W31 85102 60161 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY JIA3 A9J4 28480 85102 60161 W32 85102 60162 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY JIA4 A13J4 28480 85102 60162 W33 85102 60163 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A5 A22J1 28480 85102 60163 W34 85102 60164 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A6 A23J1 28480 85102 60164 W35 85102 60165 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 7 22 3 28480 85102 60165 W36 85102 60166 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A1 A1J4 28480 85102 60166 W38 85102 60168 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J3 J4 28480 85102 60168 W40 85102 60223 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A16J2 REAR PANEL J9 28480 85102 60223 W41 85102 60224 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A20J2 REAR PANEL J10 28480 85102 60224 W55 85102 60191 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY DISPLAY INTERFACE 28480 85102 60191 W56 85102 60192 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY TEST SET INTERFACE 28480 85102 60192 1 2420 0001 3 NUT HEX W LKWR 6 32 THD 109 00000 Order by desc 2 2360 0193 5 SCREW MACH 6 32 25 IN LG PAN HD POZI 28480 2360 0193 3 0400 0010 4 GROMMET RND
167. HSYNC DIO4H 10 OSHPIB EXTVSYNC 12210 RENHP IB LRENPRIV Seton NRF DHP TB DIO7PRIV 52102 FCHPIB DIOSPRIV ATNHP IB DIO2PRIV gt 15 102 jul OSPRIV DGND eee O6PRIV DGND iis ee O7PRIV DGND ug OS8PRIV DGND 5 2 RENPRIV DGND ae GND DGND 122 NRF DPRIV DGND EXTBLUERTN LATNHP 1B EXTGREENRTN W LSROHPIB EXTREDRTN LIFCHPIB EXTSYNCRTN LNDACHPIB VGAS LNRFDHPIB DIOBPRIV LDAVHPIB DIO6PRIV DIOIPRIV DIO3PRIV DIO3HPTB DIOUPRIV DIO1HPIB LEOIPRIV DIOGHP IB LDAVPRIV DIOBHP IB LNRF DPRIV DBi5 LNDACPRIV DB13 LIFCPRIV DB11 LSROPRIV DB9 15 00 FCPRIV DGND LATNPRIV DB7 ard ATNPRIV DGND DTR2 DBS 15 95 DBIG XD2 RXD2 DB3 15 91 gt J15 90 gt J15 89 15 88 1085 d ERE RXD1 DCDi TADRI LADRE een 1083 0581 51 LIST 5V gt J15 86 EXTGREENRTN EXTGREEN 10 gt 015 85 RII CERIK DENE EXTBLUERTN EXTBLUE D DGND DGND q CRYPTO LIPRST DGND TADRS EXTVSYNC EXTHSYNC VGAS oio J11 108 J11 107 J11 106 11 105 J11 10u J11 103 J11 102 J11 101 J11 100 gt J11 99 gt J11 98 gt J11 97 gt J11 96 gt J11 95 gt J11 94 gt 411 93 J11 92 gt J11 91 gt 11 90 gt J11 89 11 88 J11 87 gt J11 86 J11 85 J11 85 gt J11 83 J11 82 gt J11 81 gt J11 82 gt J11 79 gt J11 78 gt J11 77 gt J11 76 gt J11 75 gt J11 74 gt J11 73 gt J11 72 gt J11 71 gt 11 70 gt J11 69 gt J11 68 gt J11 67 gt J11 66 gt J11 65 gt J11 64 gt 411 63 gt J1
168. I 3C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A13C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A13C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A14C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A14C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A14C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A20R26 SWEEP ADC GAIN 4 Compensates for component tolerances in the staircase generation circuit 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 7 Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 3 Related Adjustment Procedures Assembly Replaced or Repaired Adjustment Procedure Number If Replaced 85101 Display Processor A1 Front Panel none A2 Disk Drive none A3 Post Regulator Board none A4 Graphic System Processor CRT 1 3 85101C equipped with a CRT display Ab CPU Board 1 3 85101C equipped with a CRT display A6 EEPROM Board 1 3 85101C equipped with a CRT display A7 Input Output Board none A8 Security Key Board none A9 Rear Panel none A10 Preregulator none 11 Display 1 3 85101C equipped with a CRT display A14 Graphic System Processor LCD none 85101C equipped with a LCD display A15 LCD Assembly none 85101C equipped with a LCD display A16 Backlight Inverter Board none 85101C equipped with a LCD display 85102 IF Detector A1 Front Panel none Front Panel Interface none A2 A4 Pulse Option only Ab Test Synchronous Detector 7 A6 Clock 8
169. ILE MEMORY 4 _ gt lt gt 6 26 32 EEPROM amp INTERFACE T 9 EEPROM CONTROL 5 ER CONTROL ADDRESS 5 REFRESH 6 ADDRESS DATA s A3 POST REGULATOR TP3 TP4 TP2 TPS TP1 ee A10 PREREGULATOR e 512KX32BIT SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY zu TO FAN 4 AND REGULATOR MODULE 5V DIGITAL 5V PREREG A10 PREREGULATOR 7 O RPG 2 22 VALUE OF LINE MODULE FUSE A KEYBOARD 13 VARIES WITH LINE VOLTAGE 12V 2 015 E lt MAIN PT 25 M 15 S3 EARTH 18V Mu cuv w t g l FAN DRIVE O la so o NEUTRAL REAR PANEL 18 5V DISC T lt 1 ST 1v to 49V 15VREF DRIVE MOTOR v dl l Green LED Red LED ZSV Green LED s A Norma 0 Normal oFF 7OV Normally on Steady E 65V NOT USED RESET J LSHDN 85101C DISPLAY PROCESSOR OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM LCD 55432 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 26 8510C On Site Service Manual POWER DGND F ANPOS DGND N C LSHDN 5V DIG 5V SENS 5V DIG DGND DGND SENS DGND POST REGULATOR PROCESSOR EEPROM INPUT OUTPUT REAR PANEL 1 REAR PANEL 2 GSP POWER 415 DGND DGND DGND DGND EXTBLUE NC DIOLHPTB Biss DIOSHPIB EXTGREEN DIO2HPIB O6HPTB EXTRED D103H 15 107 7 1 EXT
170. J6 on the front of the A14 display GSP board by pulling straight up on the cable plug the A14 display GSP board slide the two ears on connector J7 toward the front of the instrument to release the flat flex cable W8 from the connector Then remove the cable from the connector 4 Remove the trim strip from the top edge of the front frame by prying under it with a flat screwdriver 5 Remove the two top screws and the two bottom screws item 1 from the LCD assembly side of the instrument frame 6 While holding the LCD assembly rotate it slightly out of the frame 7 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the softkey keyboard on the back of the LCD assembly To Reassemble 8 Reverse the preceding steps Torque all screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib 6 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Figure 6 4 A15 LCD Assembly Replacement A15 LCD ASSEMBLY 55433 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 17 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures LCD Assembly Details The LCD assembly consists of the display glass the LCD and backlight and the inverter board See Chapter 5 for associated part numbers NOTE To avoid dust or dirt particles from getting in between the display glass and the LCD do not completely remove the LCD from the bezel Figure 6 5 LCD Assembly Details Softkey Keyboard Display Glass Backlight Inverter Board LCD Retainer She
171. J6 to isolate the display The A16 backlight inverter is also powered through the A14 GSP board Remove cable W8 from A14J7 to isolate the backlight refer to Figure 6 4 on page 6 17 for an illustration of A15 LCD assembly e Ifall green LEDs are now on replace the associated assembly If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing continue with Inspect Motherboard Inspect Motherboard Inspect the A8 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces 4 90 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Fan Troubleshooting Fan Speeds The fan speed is continuously variable depending upon temperature It is normal for the fan to be at high speed when the instrument is just turned on and then change to low speed when the instrument has cooled Check the Fan Voltages If the fan is dead refer to the 85101C Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram at the end of this section The fan is driven by the 18 V and 18 V supplies coming from the A10 preregulator Neither of these supplies is fused The 18 V supply is regulated on A3 and remains constant at approximately 15 volts It connects to the fan via the A8 motherboard The 18 V supply changes the voltage to the fan depending on airflow and temperature information Its voltage ranges from approximately 1 0 volts to 14 7 volts and it also connects to the fan via the A8 motherboard I
172. KT 28480 8120 1348 W28 8120 3445 1 GPIB CABLE 1 METER 28480 8120 3445 W29 08510 60101 1 CBL AY IF DISPLAY 28480 08510 60101 W30 8120 2582 2 CBL AY BNC 48 INCHES 28480 8120 2582 W64 D1191A 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY FOR CRT DISPLAY 28480 D1191A W65 24542G 2 CABLE SERIAL RS 232 28480 24525G 5 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 25 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Table 5 9 85101C Top Internal with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A2 0950 2075 1 DISC DRIVE 28480 0950 2075 A3 85101 60244 1 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60244 A3 85101 69244 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69244 2110 0333 1 FUSE 1 5A 125V NTD 28480 2110 0333 A3F2 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 25 X 27 28480 2110 0425 A3F3 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 25 X 2 7 28480 2110 0425 4 NOT ASSIGNED 5 85101 60298 1 CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60298 A6 85101 60238 1 EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60238 A6 85101 69238 EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 69238 A7 85101 60272 1 INPUT OUTPUT BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60272 A8 85101 60263 1 SECURITY KEY BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW NO IC SUPPLIED 28480 85101 60263 A8IC1 85101 69273 SECURIT
173. L MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 6 0510 1148 3 PUSH ON RETAINER 28480 0510 1148 7 85101 60239 1 KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60239 8 85101 20053 1 AIR DAM 28480 85101 20053 9 3050 0105 8 WASHER FLAT 125 ID 28480 3050 0105 10 0515 0430 8 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 0430 11 85101 60234 1 ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR RPG 28480 85101 60234 12 2190 0016 2 WASHER INTL T3 8 IN 37710 28480 2190 0016 13 2950 0043 2 NUT DBLCHAM 3 8 32 THD 094IN THK 00000 Order by desc 14 3050 0180 1 PTFE WASHER 28480 3050 0180 15 0370 3033 1 KNOB BASE 250 JG 28480 0370 3033 5 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT 85101C Front Panel Internal with CRT Display Figure 5 7 5 17 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 7 85101C Rear Panel with CRT Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5041 8821 2 STANDOFF REAR PANEL 28480 5041 8821 2 0515 0372 3 MACH SCREW 3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 3 0515 1232 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM PN PD 28480 0515 1232 4 0515 0892 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 12MM PN PD 28480 0515 0892 5 5021 8537 1 LOCKING FOOT RIGHT 28480 5021 8537 6 5021 8539 1 LOCKING FOOT LEFT 28480 5041 8539 7 85101 60241 1 REAR PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60241 8 2190 0586 4 WASHER LK HLCL 4 0MM 28480 2190 0586 9 0380 0643 4 STA
174. LED 4 is lit to indicate that the test is active Calibrate Background and Intensity 5 CRT or Save Time Date and LCD Backlight Settings 5 LCD CRT A password is required to run this test It also requires a special digital photometer with probe and a light occluder A three step grayscale is used to set background where all three steps are just visible Intensity is then set All settings and the date are then stored For a complete procedure refer to Chapter 7 Adjustments LCD This test is used in the factory to save the time date and LCD backlight settings after adjustment Recall Background and Intensity Calibration 6 CRT or Recall Time Date and LCD Backlight Settings 6 LCD CRT This recalls the calibration that is stored in nonvolatile memory and loads the appropriate DACs with the data LCD This test is used in the factory to recall the time date and LCD backlight settings for diagnostic purposes 4 112 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program Screen Test Patterns 7 CRT This test provides 15 screen patterns for use in evaluating and adjusting the display With these patterns the following display qualities can be evaluated color purity grayscale focus astigmatism geometric distortion convergence Use the up down keys RPG knob or the numeric keypad to select different patterns To exit this test press MARKER LCD This test is used for diag
175. LPFA LNMI LPOP FANNEG CLK8MHZ DGND DGND MOTOR 5V MOTOR 5V MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 5V 5V 5V 5V DGND DGND LRFRINT LMBMINT LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE LLDS LUDS DGND DGND N N G 215 63 CRYPTI CRYPT2 DGND EXTSYNCRTN I ADR3 gt J15 82 CRYPT3 DGND LADCINT DGND CRYPTS 5V CRYPT6 CRYPT7 J15 81 gt J15 80 gt 15 79 gt J15 78 gt 15 77 gt J15 76 gt J15 75 gt J15 74 gt 15 73 2 15 72 gt J15 71 gt J15 70 gt 15 69 J15 68 gt J15 67 gt J15 66 gt J15 65 gt J15 64 gt J15 63 gt J15 62 gt J15 61 gt J15 60 gt J15 59 gt 15 58 J15 57 15 56 UUUUUUU sabor ir M Ul uw EP C IADRI LADCINT LIPRST SPARE 1 LIST SPARE 3 SPARE2 SPARES 15 N C DTR2 N C RXD2 N C DSR2 N C CTS2 DGND DGND LSHDN HMUL BSY LPRST LPFA LNMI LPOP DGND CLK8MHZ DGND DGND MOTOR 5V MOTOR 5V MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 5V 5V 5V 5V DGND DGND LRFRINT LMBMINT LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE LLDS LUDS DGND DGND we 2 2 2 2 2 01212121212 2 12 1212 212 90 212 212121212121212 212 O O O O O Z O O O OO OO OO OO ZO O O O O O O OO O OO N N N N N N N N N N N
176. N 42 53 gt 81839 01253 03783 1 36 25 58 79 22 54 N 100 80 03244 82966 90256 03787 1 26 45 25 22 8 77 N 180 90 24 000 t 03524 03913 00398 03792 6 22 2 28 8 51 84 45 25 500 02858 03636 00222 83799 23 62 35 31 11 69 N 72 72 28 500 3829 04705 00875 03807 52 04 87 63 35 58 73 8 NOTE Total Uncert Factory System Uncertainty User System Uncertainty 4 Legend FAILED 522 Verification Measurement of the 20 48 Attenuator N Parameter Verification Not Required F Parameter Verification failed NOTES 1 Measurement parameter 22 magnitude and phase Difference between the factory measurement and the verification measurement is more than the total uncertainty the system failed verification Difference between the phase measured at the factory and the phase measured in the verification is not required for this measurement parameter or for S11 2 3 4 Definitions for any annotation that appears next to the measurement differences 5 Result of the performance verification measurement 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 53 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure If the System Fails Performance Verification Disconnect and reconnect the device that failed the verification Then remeasure the device If the performance verification still fails Continue to measure the rest of the verification devices and p
177. NDOFF HEX 255IN LG 6 32 28480 0380 0643 10 2190 0584 8 WASHER LK M3 0 NOM 28480 2190 0584 11 1251 7812 8 CONNECTOR JACKSCREW 28480 1251 7812 12 85101 00045 1 REAR PANEL 28480 85101 00045 13 7121 4611 1 LABEL MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 14 3050 1192 4 WASHER FL M3 5 NOM 28480 3050 1192 15 3160 0281 1 FINGER GUARD 28480 3160 0281 16 0515 0379 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 16MM PN TX 28480 0515 0379 17 08415 60036 1 FAN TUBE AXIAL 28480 08415 60036 5 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 8 85101C Rear Panel with CRT Display 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 19 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 9 85101C Left and Right Sides with CRT Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 19 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 1400 1 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM TX 28480 0515 1400 3 0515 1402 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8 PCPNTX 28480 0515 1402 5 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 21 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 8 85101C Cabinet Parts with CRT Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5062 3735 2 TO
178. ON The following tests will erase non volatile memory To access these tests enter the password then press MARKER To exit just press MARKER Refer to the Service Manual for the password NOTE Password HP85101 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD A6 TESTS INITIALIZE MEMORY BOARD COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD UNFORMATTED WRITE READ TEST COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD FORMATTED WRITE READ TEST READ VERIFY TEST 3 DATA AGAIN WRITE UNFORMATTED DATA TO SELECTED MEMORY LOCATIONS READ VERIFY TEST 5 DATA AGAIN READ LOCATIONS WHERE HARDWARE CAL DATA IS STORED SHOW NON VOLATILE MEMORY PARAMETERS RESET MEMORY TO DEFAULT HARDWARE CAL DATA RETURN TO HP85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLET ING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY 8515 Be sure to have a backup of the operating system O Q G N HP85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE CPU BOARD TESTS A5 1 0 BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TESTS Al 2 7 DISPLAY BOARD AND CRT TESTS 4 11 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD TESTS A6 RETURN TO HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU PROGRAM MENU HP85101 DISPLAY BOARD AND CRT TESTS 4 11 GSP ADDRESS DECODER STIMULUS CRT LOOP GSP DATA LINE STIMULUS LOOP RAMP BACKGROUND DAC LOOP RAMP INTENSITY DAC LOOP CALIBRATE BACKGROUND AND INTENSITY RECALL BACKGROUND AND INTENSITY CALIBRATION SCREEN TEST PATTERNS SOFTKEY LABEL ALIGNMENT PATTERN RETURN TO HP8
179. ONOUS DETECTOR 28480 85102 00005 34 85102 00006 1 COVER A6 CLOCK 28480 85102 00006 35 85102 00008 1 COVER RF 19 9 MHZ LO 28480 85102 00008 36 85102 00009 1 COVER RF B2 IF MIXER 28480 85102 00009 37 85102 00010 1 COVER TEST IF AMP 28480 85102 00010 38 85102 00011 1 COVER RF B1 IF MIXER 28480 85102 00011 39 85102 00012 1 COVER REF IF AMP 28480 85102 00012 40 85102 00013 1 COVER RF A2 IF MIXER 28480 85102 00013 4 85102 00014 1 COVER RFA1 IF MIXER 28480 85102 00014 42 85102 20163 1 ENCLOSURE 28480 85102 20163 43 85102 00015 1 COVER REGULATOR 28480 85102 00015 5 42 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 21 85102 Top Internal 4 places 8 places X2X3XuXs 6 7 E7 EB E9 E10 5 Cr oe 599014 es Pl FE A ee ee eS EE 5 E 2 oje o w 9 ET SE _ ma 6G 2 8 places 96 places 4 used 2 places 63 EXAM 42 7 59 58 52 56 55 53 93 62 9 GG 90600000 COLO s i not visible 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 43 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 15 85102 Cable Locations Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number w1 85102 60131 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J3 A11J3 28480 85102 60131 2 85102 60132 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J2 A9J3 28480 85102 60132 W3 85
180. ONT PANEL EMULATOR ZMARKER Put the keypad overlay on the analyzer front panel The overlay part of the front panel emulator kit 4 Toinitiate a synthesizer full user cal that includes auto track and sweep span cal press USER CAL k0 Full Usr Cal k0 proceed The user cal takes a few minutes to complete NOTE Auto track is not an adjustment it must be done to ensure the source specifications are met Agilent recommends you do an auto track every time you do a measurement calibration 5 Follow the instructions on the analyzer display to exit the front panel emulator software Continue with step 6 For All Other 8360 Series Synthesizers 3 To initiate an auto track press the following keys on the synthesizer 8 44 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures PRESET USER CAL FREQ CAL MENU ONCE To initiate a sweep span cal press the following keys on the synthesizer PRESET USER CAL FREQ CAL MENU Sweep Span Once ONCE Continue with step 6 For 8340 41 Series Synthesizers 3 4 To initiate an auto track press the following keys on the synthesizer PRESET SHIFT PEAK Continue with step 6 For All Synthesizers 6 Press the following keys on the analyzer PARAMETER S21 FORMAT PHASE STIMULUS MENU STEP Allow at least one complete sweep until the asterisk is gone To normalize the measurement press MEN
181. P AND BOTTOM COVER 28480 5062 3735 2 5021 5837 4 CORNER STRUT 28480 5021 5837 3 5041 8802 1 TRIM STRIP 28480 5041 8802 4 5062 3817 1 COVER SIDE PERFORATED 28480 5062 3817 5 5021 8405 1 FRONT FRAME 28480 5021 8405 6 5062 3800 1 HANDLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5062 3800 7 0515 0896 8 MACH SCREW 4 0 10MM FL PD 28480 0515 0896 8 5021 8497 2 TRIM FRONT HANDLE 28480 5021 8497 9 5041 8821 1 STRAP HANDLE FRONT 28480 5041 8821 10 0515 1132 2 MACH SCREW 5 0 10MM FL PD 28480 0515 1132 11 5041 8820 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP REAR 28480 5041 8820 12 5062 3704 1 STRAP HANDLE 28480 5062 3704 13 5062 3842 1 COVER SIDE HANDLE 28480 5062 3842 14 5021 5806 1 REAR FRAME 28480 5021 5806 15 0515 2086 16 MACH SCREW 4 0 7 TX 28480 0515 2086 corner struts part of motherboard card cage assy part number 85101 60267 5 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 10 85101C Cabinet Parts with CRT Display 4 PLACES 6 2 PLACES 7 8 PLACES 2 PLACES 2 PLACES 55428 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 23 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 11 8510C Cable Assemblies with CRT Display W27 W28 W29 W30 W65 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number W27 8120 1348 2 CABLE ASSY 18 AWG 3 CNDCT BLK J
182. PANEL TESTS 1 A2 A7 2 DISPLAY BOARD AND LCD TESTS A14 A15 3 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD TESTS A6 4 RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU F E 85101 DISPLAY BOARD AND LCD TESTS 14 A15 GSP ADDRESS DECODER STIMULUS LOOP GSP DATA LINE STIMULUS LOOP RAMP BACKLIGHT DAC LOOP RAMP UNUSED DAC LOOP SAVE TIME DATE AND LCD BACKLIGHT SETTINGS RECALL TIME DATE AND LCD BACKLIGHT SETTINGS SCREEN TEST PATTERNS SOFTKEY LABEL ALIGNMENT PATTERN NOT USED RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY G N PASSWORD ENTRY CAUTION The following tests will erase non volatile Refer to the Service Manual for the password memory To access these tests enter the password then press MARKER To exit just press MARKER NOTE Password is y 8515 sure to have a backup of the operating system 85101 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD A6 TESTS INITIALIZE MEMORY BOARD COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD UNFORMATTED WRITE READ TEST COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD FORMATTED WRITE READ TEST READ VERIFY TEST 3 DATA AGAIN WRITE UNFORMATTED DATA TO SELECTED MEMORY LOCATIONS READ VERIFY TEST 5 DATA AGAIN READ LOCATIONS WHERE HARDWARE CAL DATA 15 STORED SHOW NON VOLATILE MEMORY PARAMETERS RESET MEMORY TO DEFAULT HARDWARE CAL DATA RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO T
183. Phase Lock Block DMG Y LT PUXTRAE RR RERO ERE EE PEG at 4 35 85101 A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram CRT 1 2 4 37 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram CRT 2 2 4 38 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram LCD 1 2 4 39 85101 A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram LCD 2 2 4 40 851026 A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 1 0 2 4 4 85102C 8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 2 2 4 42 uuu bd bete EENEI dat diuque 4 43 ATA GSP Display Interface 2 2 2222 lt 4 44 eiusd es SUN ALD OE dams 4 46 Troubleshooting Image Problerms cendo p E PER ES 4 46 ATG Backlight inerte dedo ORO Rea ble Bc Rol d deo Re IR BS Aue Kao CU 4 49 S PME 4 51 On S oe eT eee eT eee eee 4 51 Self Tests and Other Failures Aqu pe be vend IE LEE 4 52 What t Do 1f anlnstrument Erro
184. Procedure Service Program Service Program Overview The diagnostic tests and commands contained in the 8510 service program give a relatively fast and complete check of the 8510 system When your 8510 system appears to have a failure you can use this program along with other procedures to check the instrument board assemblies The service program tests do not completely check all board assemblies but are designed to exercise the most vulnerable parts of each board If all tests pass there is a 90 confidence level that all board assemblies tested are good After you familiarize yourself with this program you can refer to the menu map included in this section It is a map of all service program tests and the assemblies checked by each test Run the service program to identify verify a failed assembly after a self test failure identify verify a failed assembly after a running error message check board assemblies whenever a board assembly problem is suspected verify repair of a replaced board assembly Tools Required The following items are required to run all parts of the service program e 85102 emulator board assembly 8510 service adapter Two BNC cables The 85102 emulator board assembly and the 8510 service adapter are available individually Refer to Chapter 5 for Agilent part numbers and ordering information 4 106 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program Running the
185. R KEY DO WN 22 RUN SERVICE PROGRAM 14 KEYBOARD 23 DIAGNOSE A FAILURE ENTER SELECTION THEN PRESS MARKER 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM 1 85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM TEST SET GPIB SERVICE PROGRAM 8360 SERVICE PROGRAM 2 See next page 3 See next page 4 See next page RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU F see note 1 NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F ore assigned to G nJ M u X1 ond C J respectively 2 To make selection type the number indicated then press MARKER 3 The default value on data entry is zero Copyright Agilent Technologies 1987 2001 85101 1 0 BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TESTS A1 A2 A7 DISC CONTROLLER BUS TEST A7 DISC WRITE READ TEST A2 A7 TIMER TEST A7 SERIAL 1 0 TEST 7 TIMER CLOCK PERIPHERAL TCP TESTS A7 CPU TO GPIB TEST A7 BIDIRECTIONAL GPIB TEST A7 STATIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 RPG TEST 1 7 KEYBOARD AND LEDS TEST A1 A7 85102 INTERFACE TEST A7 DYNAMIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 SECURITY KEYS INTERFACE TEST A7 WATCHDOG TIMER TEST A7 RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY m O O O P O O DUN G N 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM MENU CPU BOARD TESTS 5 1 1 0 BOARD AND FRONT
186. R PANEL STABILIZER 3 RU DRAWER UNIT LEVER FOOT 4 PLACES 55446 This note applies only to sampler based test sets with ventilation holes in the top cover In a rack configuration there must be 1 RU of space above the test set for proper ventilation Do not restrict air flow to the ventilation holes 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 13 System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Configuring the System on a Bench Top Set up instruments in one of the configurations in Figure 9 5 Different configurations are possible including single stack and equal stack 2x2 styles Figure 9 5 Typical Bench Top Configurations DO NOT REMOVE INSTRUMENT FEET on any of the system components DAMAGE WILL OCCUR to the instruments if ventilation is restricted CONFIGURATION A CONFIGURATION 1 2 1 2 66102 os po os DD DO HP 851027 Model Width Height Depth Approximate Weight 85101C with a CRT display 41 875 cm 17 5 21 25in 53 125 22 3 kg 16 75 in 7 in cm 49 Ib 85101C with an LCD 41 875 cm 17 5 21 25in 53 125 13 2 kg 16 75 in 7 in cm 33 Ib 85102B 41 875 cm 13 126 cm 21 25in 53 125 20 5 kg 16 75 in 5 25 in cm 45 Ib 9 14 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Making System Connections Making System Connections The 8510 system requires that several types of
187. S parameter measurement ratios out the frequency response error This is why troubleshooting system problems in a ratioed measurement mode can be deceptive The solution is to look at the IF signal responses of the six RF paths singly in order to check them in an unratioed mode Troubleshooting with the Service Adapter The service adapter substitutes for a test set by connecting the 20 MHz IF signal from the 85102 back into the amplifier of the 85102 This is done to determine if a fault is in the test set or the 85102 This procedure does not check phase lock circuitry NOTE Ignore any phase lock error messages that may appear during this procedure 1 Disconnect the test set from J1 test set interconnect on the 85102 Connect the service adapter as shown in Figure 4 9 The service adapter is not supplied with each 8510C Refer to Chapter 5 to order this servicing tool 4 74 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Unratioed Power Failures Figure 4 9 Service Adapter Connections IF INTERCONNECT J10 20 MHz IF ss445c 2 Press the following keys INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET MARKER STIMULUS MENU STEP PARAMETER MENU 3 Examine each user parameter IF response by pressing the corresponding softkey to observe the unratioed power level of User 1 through User 4 The traces should be flat lines quite close to each other as indicated by the marker value typically about 28 d
188. SECOND COUNT FREQUENCY IS OUT OF LIMIT or FREQUENCY UNSTABLE COUNT 1 COUNT 2 TOO LARGE 1 Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to reconnect the 85102 cables in the original configuration Figure 7 11 Location of Clock Adjustment on U as 723 219 Do 52 EY RA A6R51 7 28 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications 8 1 Performance Verification and Specifications Overview This chapter describes the following topics 8 2 System performance System performance verification Specifications Software for specifications and performance verification How to verify system performance Performing system verification Using the software A tutorial Operational check procedures Frequency test procedures Total system uncertainty test procedure How to run the system specifications Interpreting the specification and uncertainties printout Measurement uncertainties Sources of measurement errors Generation of system measurement uncertainties System error models Dynamic accuracy error model Measurement traceability Substitution of system components Calibration cycle Reference information for performance verification and specification Performance test record 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance Syste
189. SER depending on your keyboard 8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources Additional magnitude and phase errors are introduced into the system by these sweepers Frequency accuracy of 8350B 83592A 25 5 degrees C BAND 0 1 2 3 Full Band Frequency range GHz 01 2 4 24 7 13 5 13 5 20 01 20 Frequency accuracy MHz Ramp sweep typical 5 6 25 30 50 Ramp sweep typical using Trim 5 6 8 10 15 Sweep 8510 mm Wave Systems Performance verification procedures for mm wave systems and the 85106 racked system are provided with mm wave products and documented in 8510 mm wave system manuals 8511 Frequency Converter Test Sets When generating specifications for systems using an 8511 frequency converter test set specify the following in the hardware configuration menu source Notest port cables Nocalkit e No verification kit When no source is specified a 20 dBm power level is assumed at the samplers during calibration 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 91 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications When a source is chosen the performance verification software assumes no loss between the source and samplers thereby causing the software to show an overload on the samplers 8511 performance verification procedures and software are provided with the 8511 they are not part of this program Contr
190. Switches Check that 8510C firmware is C 07 00 or higher Check table 4 1 for the full functionality and compatibility of 8360 source firmware The original 85101C display processor 8510C top box incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT An 85101C with a CRT display has a serial prefix of 3936A and lower or US4116 and uses 8510C firmware revision C 07 XX The current 85101C display processor 8510C top box incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD An 85101C with a LCD has a serial prefix of 4116A and higher and uses 8510C firmware revision C 08 XX 55419 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 13 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline 8360 Series Coupler to Bridge Detector All 8510B C systems when used with an 8360 series source that have a bridge detector inside will potentially cause an over modulation running error message If your 8510C has Rev 7 0 or greater an RF unleveled caution message will also be displayed Agilent Model Coupler to Detector Conversion Prefix Determination 83620 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83622 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83630 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83650 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83621 Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A will cause problem 83631 Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A will cause problem 83651 Prefix equal
191. T display 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with an LCD 85102 A25 Motherboard Wiring Diagram The sections within this chapter are as follows LCD Failures Self Test Failures Running Error Messages Unratioed Power Failures Power Supply Failures Performance Test Failures Software Failures 8510C On Site Service Manual 1 3 Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Re Other Failures Service Program Error Terms placeable Parts Chapter 5 This chapter contains part numbers for replaceable parts and assemblies and instructions on how to order them Parts lists for instruments with CRT displays and LCDs are documented in separate sections Re placement Procedures Chapter 6 This section contains procedures for disassembling or re assembling the 8510C network analyzer after a part or assembly is replaced Procedures that differ depending on the display installed are documented sep arately Adjustments Chapter 7 This chapter contains adjustment procedures Specifications and Performance Verification Chapter 8 This chapter describes the following 1 4 System performance System Performance verification Specifications Software for specifications and performance verification How to verify system performance Performing system verification Using the software A tutorial Operational check procedures Frequency test procedures Total system uncertainty test
192. Tabs are used to divide the major chapters and sections A chapter is a major topic division within the manual A section is a division of information within a chapter The names of the tabs and an explanation of their contents are listed below Service and Equipment Overview Chapter 1 This chapter provides a brief summary of the service information in this manual and a list of the test equipment required It should be read before attempting any repairs Safety Licensing Chapter 2 This chapter contains safety and licensing information required for the 8510C Theory of Operation Chapter 3 Read this section to learn about the 8510 system hardware and firmware and how the system operates especially the phase lock circuitry Main Troubleshooting Procedure Chapter 4 Turn to this chapter first when troubleshooting a system It consists of a main procedure followed by sections with details on troubleshooting specific failures The following fold outs are located at the back of this chapter 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with a CRT display e 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with an LCD 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with a CRT display 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with an LCD 85102 IF Detector Overall Block Diagram e 85106 Phase Lock Block Diagram 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with a CR
193. Tests A14 15 4 135 85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board 4 137 85102 IF Datector Service Program Manli T REIP RES 4 139 DIMITTO OT EE D T TEILTE 4 139 85102 Froinpt Messi 522556 PER 4 139 aae E E diab aa een 4 139 Test Set GPIB HP IB Service Program 4 143 Preset TE SEDE D oration qaciyie pa dn a E oA EA E E A teen 4 143 Switch 2 eU E cede P qp edd 4 143 CI ez BIN M CT 4 143 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents 5 Contents Activate Port 1 2 Attenuator 4 mands ape Bedwas wander see 4 143 sees 4 143 Select New GPIB HP IB 4 6 4 144 Service Program MEm _ E ER SO E Q 4 145 8510C Service Program Menu 4 147 Service Program Manu GAT ure px u u ARR A EGRE RIP on neh dk os oa Ree dane ees 4 148 8510C Service Pro
194. Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Test 4 A4 A14 Display Processor Most likely cause of failure e A4 A14 graphics signal processor board failure 90 Ab processor board failure 10 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 196 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 service program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run display board and CRT tests A4 A11 or LCD tests A14 A15 Test 5 A4 A14 Display RAM Most likely cause of failure e A14 graphics signal processor board failure 90 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 5 85102 motherboard or connector or cable failure 5 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 service program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run display board and CRT test A4 A11 or LCD tests A14 A15 Test 6 A7 Timer Clock RS 232 Most likely cause of failure e A71 0 board failure 90 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests 1 2 Test 7 A7 Public GPIB HP IB Most likely cause of failure e A71 0 board failure 90 e A5 CPU board failure 10 motherboard trace
195. UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS HP8S10C HP8517R HPO3651R 5056 7 SL HP85133F 1 Nov 1998 13 39 46 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 2 2 4 40 to 50 DUT Length 10 0 cm 521 512 522 611 Worst Case Uncertainty Lin Sit Reflection Coefficient S11 PHASE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS 51 HP8S1 R 65 HP85856R SL HP85133F 17 Nov 1998 12 49 18 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 28 20 to 48 40 to 58 DUT Length 18 0 cm 521 Sl2 522 800 808 8 28 611 Worst Caze Uncertainty Deg 511 Reflectian Coefficient Measurement parameter 11 Data format magnitude unitless measurements such as reflection coefficient magnitude or transmission coefficient magnitude or phase phase shift of data versus frequency Uncertainty limits upper or lower the limits only apply to transmission measurements Type of plot worst case uncertainties This is field bottoms up uncertainty analysis of the HP 8510 being verified using the worst case specifications of the HP 8510 system Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Time and date the plot was made Data trace patterns for each frequency band DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm the DUT length for
196. US DISPLAY DATAS MEMORY 2 MATH To offset the center frequency by 5 MHz press STIMULUS CENTER and increase the displayed value by 5 MHz For example for a 45 MHz to 50 GHz sweep the center frequency should be changed from 25 0225 to 25 0275 GHz Press RESPONSE SCALE and use the front panel knob to adjust the scale factor so that the flat trace is shifted to the bottom or top graticule Where the trace variations are approximately halfway above and below the last graticule Press STIMULUS CENTER and change the displayed frequency by 10 MHz This places the trace on the opposite side of the display The amount of the frequency shift now represents a vertical scaling of 1 MHz per division Press STIMULUS CENTER and return the frequency to the original setting The phase measurement should return to 0 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 45 Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures 12 Press STIMULUS MENU RAMP SWEEP TIME 5 x1 The display shows the difference between step and ramp sweep modes An example of a full band measurement at 1 MHz per division is shown in the figure below 13 Measure the trace variation with the 1 MHz per division scale Record the results on the test record located at the end of this chapter Figure 8 13 Typical Ramp Sweep Frequency Accuracy ht eit For 8340 41 Series Synthesizers 14 On the synthesizer press CAL MORE
197. VCO is crystal controlled to run at 20 MHz By adjusting R51 the free running frequency of the VCO can be fine tuned to 20 0 MHz This procedure adjusts the DC voltage input to the VCO on the A6 clock board to fine tune the free running frequency to 20 MHz 1 After loading BASIC into the controller memory insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC 2 Type LOAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE 3 When the program is loaded press RUN 4 Press the softkey that selects the clock adjustment NOTE For this procedure the frequency counter input impedance switch maybe set to either 50 ohms or 1M ohms 5 Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup 6 When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE 7 The following prompt is displayed ADJUST R51 FOR 20 MHz 50 HZ 8 Refer to Figure 7 11 for the location of 51 Adjust A6R511 for a frequency counter reading of 20 MHz 50 Hz 9 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 27 Adjustments Procedure 8 Clock Adjustment 10 If either of the following prompts is displayed refer to the troubleshooting chapter 20 MHZ FREQUENCY COUNTS LIMIT 20 MHz 50 Hz Freq Delta lt 10 Hz FIRST COUNT XXXXXXXX
198. WER on the photometer to switch the power on and allow 30 minutes warm up Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer s instructions The analyzer CRT should have an all white screen Figure 7 3 Maximum Intensity Adjustment Setup RNRLYZER LIGHT OCCLUDER UIDDDDDOD PHOTOMETER PHOTOMETER PROBE 3 Center the photometer on the analyzer CRT as shown in Figure 7 3 Adjust the analyzer front panel knob to the maximum clockwise position If the photometer registers greater than 100 NITs turn the front panel knob until a reading of no more than 100 NITs registers on the photometer If the photometer does not register a reading of 100 NITs the display is faulty Refer to Chapter 4 Main Troubleshooting Procedure NOTE The intensity level is read without a display bezel installed The glass filter transmits 60 of the display light therefore 100 NITs would be 60 NITs with the bezel installed Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment NOTE This procedure does not work with an 8360 series source You must use an 7 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment 8340 41 A B Equipment 12 SMB assembly 5061 1022 SMB tee 1250 1391 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure When the 8510 system is making a swept frequency measurement it must sample the data at points equally spaced between the
199. Y KEY IC 8510C STANDARD 28480 85101 69273 8510C REVISION 6 XX 8 XX FIRMWARE REBUILT EXCHANGE ONLY A8IC2 85101 69268 SECURITY KEY IC 8510 TIME DOMAIN 28480 85101 69268 OPTION 010 REBUILT EXCHANGE ONLY AQ 85101 60295 1 REAR PANEL WITH BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60295 10 0950 3488 1 PREREGULATOR ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 0950 3488 A10F1 2110 0655 1 FUSE 3 15A 250V 28480 2110 0655 All 1 NOT ASSIGNED 14 85101 60293 1 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60293 15 85101 60297 1 LCD ASSEMBLY INCLUDES A16 INVERTER 28480 85101 60297 16 0950 3379 1 INVERTER 28480 0950 3379 W2 85101 60254 1 RIBBON CABLE DISK DRIVE 28480 85101 60254 W3 85101 60259 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY DISK DRIVE POWER 28480 85101 60259 W4 85101 60299 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 14C 28 AWG 28480 85101 60299 W5 08757 60071 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY POWER 28480 08757 60071 W6 08757 60076 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 28 AWG 28480 0857 60076 W7 8121 0576 1 CABLE DATA FOR LCD 31C 28480 8121 0576 W8 8120 8842 1 CABLE INVERTER 6C 28480 8120 8842 1 0515 2086 4 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW 3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 40014 6 PC BOARD SPACER 28480 85101 40014 4 85101 20055 1 GASKET 28480 85101 20055 5 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW 3 0 8MM FLP 28480 0515 0372 6 85101 00051 1 CARD CAGE COVER 28480 85101 00051 7 0515 1382 5 MACH SCREW 3 5 6 PCFLTX 28480 0515 1382 5 26 8
200. a ee ee NM Ne KI Test Set HPBSI7A S N 821 e peewee e 812 lt 1 Source HP836SI S N 302780013 FREQ MAG UNC ANG UNC MAG UNC ANG UNC Calibration Kit HP852 S5U S N jOl7R00117 GHz db f deg deg ef Calibeation Technique E 1 s 1 1 1 x 1 PHASE deu x 1 1 a 22 000 20 237 108 119 07 1 50 20 240 110 119 03 1 56 Factory User Total Factory Unse Wnty 26 000 20 408 110 19 51 1 65 20 411 12 10 61 1 70 teea Mees d Meas d Uncect Meas d Meastd Phase Uncert 30 000 20 575 111 97 58 1 78 20 569 114 97 59 1 84 16Hz Al ar TT iB AA ror 1 s lt macies m mt t 2 2 2 QI ANO TTD 100920 00936 20 000 00900 00758 62 63 57 80 00574 00921 14 13 180 00 22 000 01771 00768 6 69 25 87 01649 01078 6 31 42 11 26 000 03423 00797 78 00 13 95 03321 01085 82 85 20 55 30 000 03759 00797 150 38 12 79 03593 01086 149 69 19 28 NOE lota Uncert Factory System Uncertainty User Sysim Uncertavutv 34 000 01749 00786 137 40 27 32 01810 01060 133 53 38 48 36 000 00621 00781 70 85 180 00 00923 01077 99 46 100 00 i ogend M Parameter Verification Mut Reyuired 38 000 01084 00802 67 46 48 37 00253 01325 18 23 180 00 40 000 01603
201. a test 4 64 image problems 4 46 initialization failed 4 77 initialize disc 4 66 insertion loss cables 8 37 installation preparing the site for 9 3 preset check during 9 20 scheduling 9 2 system 9 2 instrument VA rating 9 4 instruments required for adjustments 7 9 intensity adjustments default 7 14 intensity display adjustments 7 14 interference electromagnetic radiated 9 6 intermittent problems 4 111 interpreting performance verification results 8 52 inverter board replacement 6 18 inverter board troubleshooting 4 50 inverter board A16 4 49 inverter test points 4 49 isolation omission for 8350 sources 8 99 K keyboard controls 8 12 keyboard keys 8 97 keyboard test 4 64 L laser printer connections 9 18 LCD backlight 6 18 cleaning 10 4 display assembly details 6 18 display test patterns 4 47 inverter board 6 18 replacement 6 16 troubleshooting 4 43 voltage 6 18 levels of troubleshooting 3 2 line voltage and fuses 9 11 load program disc 4 65 local operation 8 101 magnitude and phase stability of cables 8 38 magnitude errors due to device frequency response 8 97 maintenance connections and connector 8 96 preventive 10 2 maintenance of system 10 2 manual overview of 1 2 manufacturer s code list 5 6 markers on uncertainty plots 8 15 maximum intensity adjustments 7 15 measurement calibration method 8 98 errors 8 3 8 73 additional 8 75 process
202. able manuals 08510 90281 1 Operating and Programming Manual 28480 08510 90281 08510 90280 1 Keyword Dictionary 28480 08510 90280 08510 90282 1 On Site Service Manual 28480 08510 90282 08510 90283 1 Test Sets and Accessories Binder 28480 08510 90283 Accessories 6010 1134 Dove Grey touch up paint for front panel frame and painted 28480 6010 1134 portions of front handles 6010 1137 French Grey touch up paint for side top and bottom covers 28480 6010 1137 6010 1138 Parchment Grey touch up paint for rack mount flanges rack 28480 6010 1138 support shelves and front panels 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 7 Replaceable Parts Available Service Tools Available Service Tools Table 5 4 Ref Agilent Part Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 08510 20001 CABLE RF TEST 1 28480 08510 20001 2 08510 20002 CABLE TEST 28480 08510 20002 3 08517 20019 CABLE FLEX SOURCE 50 GHZ 28480 08517 20019 4 08513 60009 CABLE FLEX SOURCE 26 5 28480 08513 60009 5 5061 1022 CABLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5061 1022 6 5062 7230 CABLE ASSEMBLY BNC SNAP 28480 5062 7230 7 0955 0417 FILTER BP 60 MHZ BNC SOURCE EMULATOR 28480 0955 0417 8 5086 7408 POWER SPLITTER 28480 5086 7408 9 1250 0780 ADAPTER M N F BNC 28480 1250 0780 10 1250 1236 ADAPTER F BNC F SMB 28480 1250 1236 11 1250 1200 ADAPTER F BNC M SMA 28480 1250 1200 12 1250 0669 ADAPTER SMB SMB 28480 1250 0669 13 1250 2330 AD
203. accessories Related Adjustments Table 7 3 lists any adjustments that interact with or relate to other adjustments It is important that adjustments listed in Table 7 3 are done in the order shown to insure that the instrument meets its specifications Resealing of Components The steps to adjust a sealed component follow 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 3 Adjustments Safety Considerations 1 2 Remove the seal to adjust the component Reseal the component using a silicone rubber compound that does not contain acetic acid Loading the Controller Basic Language System Before loading the adjustments software you must load a controller language system as follows Loading Basic 2 0 1 With the controller power off insert the 98611A Basic 2 0 system disk into either the right or left disk drive Switch the power on to the controller When BASIC is finished loading remove the disk and insert the 98612A extended BASIC 2 1 disk into the same disk drive you used to load the Basic system Type LOAD BIN AP2 1 then press RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC Loading Basic 3 0 or Higher 1 With the controller off insert the 98613A Basic 3 0 or higher system disk into either the right or left disk drive Switch the power on to the controller When Basic is finished loading remove the disk Insert the Basic 3 0 or higher drivers disk or the language extensions and drivers disk into the same disk drive you used to load the
204. ace and use a static grounding wrist strap 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 21 Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Front Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 6 To Disassemble 1 Toe N Disconnect the power cords Remove the instrument handles Screws are located under the plastic covers Remove the three screws from the bottom edge of the frame item 1 Remove seven screws three from the top edge of the frame item 2 and two each from each side edge of the frame item 3 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the front panel interface board and the wires from the transformer The front panel is now free of the instrument To Reassemble 6 Reverse the above procedure to install the front panel Torque all frame screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Torque the handle screws to 237 N cm 21 in Ib Figure 6 6 2 3 places 1 3 places 6 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Rectifier Board Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Small flat blade screwdriver 1 4 in nut driver Insulated clip leads 2 T 15 Torx screwdriver WARNING Even with the power cords disconnected dangerous voltages may be present on the capacit
205. ad This may be a lowband fixed load for frequencies below 2 GHz a broadband fixed load a sliding load for frequencies above 2 GHz or it may be an offset load for higher frequencies The measurements most affected by directivity errors are low reflection measurements high reflection measurements may appear normal Source Match Esf and Esr These are the forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port The source match in this case is determined primarily by the match of the test set power splitter and the main line coupler or bridge In some test sets the match of the bias tees and step attenuators is also included The calibration devices used to characterize source match are the short and the shielded open or offset short for millimeter wave devices A bad connection of either of these during the calibration procedure can cause bad source match E term data The measurements most affected by source match errors are high reflection measurements and transmission measurements of highly reflective DUTs Poor source match when associated with poor directivity is probably an indication of a defective coupler or bridge in the test set Poor source match alone may be caused by a mismatch in the test set the test set port connector the cable between the RF source and the test set or the RF source itself Try inserting a 3 dB or 6 dB pad between the RF source cable and the test set rear panel to see if this improves the source ma
206. after a lapse of time Read Locations Where Hardware Cal Data Is Stored 7 This lists the data stored in formatted pages 1 and 2 of the A6 EEPROM board and the data stored in page 1 of the timer clock peripheral RAM on the 7 1 0 board The date for the background and intensity DAC cal is also stored Show Non Volatile Memory Parameters 8 This uses the EEPROM driver firmware to find out how it has calculated certain memory parameters The A6 EEPROM board must be initialized for the driver to have the information It returns the value for number of formatted pages and the present position of the memory pointer Reset Memory to Default Hardware Cal Data 9 This is meant for use by the factory only This test requires the user to enter a password It initializes memory and then loads pages 1 and 2 with the hardware default cal data This should be done only as a last resort when all memory is lost 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 115 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 85102 IF Detector Service Program Menu This is the primary 85102 menu It allows you to select any of the tests for the IF detector NOTE Read the following instructions before using the 85102 diagnostics Hardware These tests require that the source test set and all peripherals be disconnected from the system In place of the source and test set connect the 85102 test adapter Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts for the part number of this
207. age 96 Also be sure the site preparation is complete as described in this chapter Then contact the Agilent customer engineer to schedule the installation and system verification 9 2 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Preparing the Site Preparing the Site Environmental Requirements The environment must meet the conditions listed in the table below Table 9 1 Environmental Conditions Temperature For operation 5 C to 40 C 41 F to 104 F For measurement calibration 20 C to 26 C 68 F to 79 F For performance verification 1 C 1 8 F of the measurement calibration temperature For storage 40 C to 65 C 40 F to 158 F Humidity For operation 5 to 95 at 40 C or less non condensing For storage 5 to 95 at 65 C or less non condensing Pressure Altitude For operation less than 4 600 meters 15 000 feet For storage less than 4 600 meters 15 000 feet NOTE Accuracy enhancement is dependent in part on a stable temperature environment If your environmental temperature has a tendency to fluctuate more than 1 C periodically perform a system verification to ensure that the system has been correctly calibrated ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations System Heating and Cooling Install air conditioning and heating if required CAUTION Ventilation Requirements When installing the pr
208. ain and autoranging for the 100 kHz IF signal The 100 kHz IF mixer output is passed through a single section bandpass filter The following procedure peaks the A10 and A12 IF amplifiers by adjusting the circuit bandwidth to a center frequency of 100 kHz 1 After loading BASIC into the controller memory insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC Type LOAD ADJ_ 85102 EXECUTE When the program is loaded press RUN The following prompt is displayed Adjustment on which if AMPL module Select a softkey Press the appropriate softkey Switch off the analyzer power Remove the board A10 or 12 from the 85102 and install it on an extender board Reconnect the cables as the controller display shows using adapters and extra cables provided in the service kit It is necessary only to reconnect the cables that are noticed in the setup on the display Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 21 Adjustments Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment Figure 7 8 Location of IF Amplifier Adjustments A10 IF AMPLIFIER DERE x we NES OGLE fe im J gt 0125 12 10 1 A10L1 10 5
209. al The paths are initially defined as follows and will be redefined during this procedure User 1 al User 2 b2 User 3 a2 User 4 b1 RF Signal Paths There are only four user parameters However in this procedure you will redefine parameters to display the 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 73 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Unratioed Power Failures IF frequency responses from six possible RF signal paths in the test set Table 4 7 shows the relationship between the RF signal path path definition and redefined user parameter as used in this procedure Table 4 7 RF Signal Paths and User Parameters RF Path Path Description Redefined User Parameter Drive Phase Lock 1 al User 1 Port 1 al 2 a2 User 3 Port 2 a2 3 b1 Reflection User 4 Port 1 al 4 b2 Reflection User 2 Port 2 a2 5 b1 Thru User 4 Port 2 a2 6 b2 Thru User 2 Port 1 al Ratioed and Unratioed Responses A normal power level display for the 8510C is a ratio of two frequency responses in the case of S11 the ratio is b1 1 The network analyzer automatically supplies power to and provides phase lock for one or more predefined ports to perform the selected measurement Ratioed measurements provide useful data but they can mask certain problems For example when measuring an S parameter at a specific power level a faulty RF input connector on the test set creates a 20 dB power hole In this case the power hole might be invisible because the
210. al 8 75 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Measurement Uncertainty Equations Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error terms The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device response When the phase of an error response is not known phase is assumed to be worst case 180 to 180 degrees Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are generally combined in a root sum of the squares RSS manner Due to the complexity of the calculations the performance verification specifications software calculates the system measurement uncertainty The following equations are representative of the equations the performance verification specifications software uses to generate the system measurement uncertainty plots and tables Reflection Uncertainty Equations Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty Erm An analysis of the error model in Figure 8 18 yields an equation for the reflection magnitude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order terms and the significant second order terms The terms under the radical are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis In all cases the error terms and the S parameters are treated as linear absolute magnitudes Reflection magnitude uncertainty forward d
211. als of B2 J f dBm REsiduals of 82 Conv dBm Lanearity of Xtai B2 0030 i f Gain Err 342 45 dbm B2 dB iGelb2 2050 i f Gain Err2 46 gt 58 dbm B2 dB Ge2b2 0100 i f Gain Err3 582 70 dbm B dB Ge3b2 0152 1 f Gain Err4 70 dbm B dB Ge4h2 0250 Mag error t dB iMpb2 0020 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the B2 channel signal path 5108 Enhanced Model HP8S GA0 3 2 4mm 5 Parameter 45MHz 40GHz HP836X016 836X 4 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz 5 5 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade System Specifications BZ Channel Errors Correction OFF 51330 pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4mm Frequency GHz 1 10 29 36 35 40 0 009 0 000 0 099 0 20 0 20 0 00 0475 0475 0475 8 0000 9 0000 0 0008 9 0000 0 0000 e Ocon 0030 0030 0030 The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for These specifications refer to the errors contributed by the test set from the test port through the coupler and into the sampler down converter The tables show values that are already included in the calculations for system specifications Their use is limited to inspecting the flowgraph error terms that exist between the coupler or bridge and the sampler The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model loca
212. also be found in the same general location WARNING Install the instrument so that the ON OFF switch is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator The ON OFF switch or the detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument Alternatively an externally installed switch or circuit breaker which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator may be used as a disconnecting device Example 8510 System includes test equipment and peripherals Voltage 90 to 127 195 to 253 volts ac Power 1100 VA maximum Frequency 47 5 to 66 Hertz NOTE In addition to the power outlets required for operation of the 8510 system three power line outlets should be provided for service equipment Electromagnetic Interference 8510 conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with German Messempfaenger Postverfuergung 526 527 1979 Kennzeichnung Mit F Nummer Funkschutzzeichen Non Agilent System Cabinet Requirements Using a non Agilent system cabinet may result in measurement inaccuracy and reliability problems due to overheating The following conditions must be met when a system is installed in a non Agilent cabinet Airtemperature at the fan intake of each instrument must not exceed the ambient temperature specified for that instrument Minimum clearance for adequate cooling 8510C On Site Service Ma
213. alue of 511 or 522 is varied e For 21 and S12 uncertainties the device is a reciprocal two port device with perfect input output match therefore S11 and S22 are linear and S21 12 The value of S21 or S12 is varied Transmission Phase Uncertainty Etp Transmission phase uncertainty is calculated from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to phase dynamic accuracy cable phase stability and thermal drift of the total system Arcsin Ert S21 2Cpf1f Dps1 Dpfs1f where Cpf1 Cable phase frequency port 1 Cpf2 Cable phase frequency port 2 Dps1 drift phase degree source to port 1 Dpfs1 drift phase degree frequency source to port 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 79 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Generation of System Measurement Uncertainties Figure 8 17 System Measurement Uncertainties Generation Process RAW ERRORS TABLES RAW FLOW GRAPH MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION EQUATIONS E TERMS RESIDUAL TABLE CALIBRATION KIT ERRORS resipuaL Note 2 FLOWGRAPH MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY EQUATIONS Note 1 MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY GRAPHS AND TABLES NOTES 1 Program can print this out 2 See Figure 8 13 8 80 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specificatio
214. ance verification 2 Verification device and kit identification with the date of the latest kit certification 3 System components identification and calibration technique broadband load BL 4 Verification kit test numbers that document the traceable path to a national standard 5 Measurement parameter S21 magnitude and phase 6 Frequency of the data point 7 Results of magnitude measurement as measured at the factory 8 Results of magnitude measurement as measured the performance verification 9 Difference between the factory and verification measurements this must be less than the total uncertainty to pass 10 Total measurement uncertainty which is the sum of the factory system uncertainty and the uncertainty of the system being verified 11 Result of the performance verification measurement 8 52 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 2 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Performance Verification S22 Measurement 85108 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION Verif Std 20 dB Attenuator Vecif Kit HPB50538 3 5mm 10 11 47 10 Aug 1990 D n SG Ser 4 01371 Origin 12 20 88 Ser 60301 Origin 12 20 88 Netuork Analyzer HP85108 Test Set HPESISA Source HP83631A Calibration Kit HP850520 Calibration Technique BL Test Port Cabl HP85131B8 NBS Test Numbers Comments 22 MAGNITUDE lind E 572 PHASE deg
215. ap cables J2 and This exchange of cables means that the Ab or A7 board inputs to A17 are exchanged Remember that the Ab and A7 boards are electrically and mechanically the same 5 Run 85102 service program test 6 Synchronous Detector Test 5 A7 If the display prompt indicates the same sync detector board Ab or A7 that was in the first failure message it means that the A17 board is defective If the display prompt indicates that the other sync detector board is the problem it means that the first sync detector is defective IF Overload or 0 The error message CAUTION IF OVERLOAD is displayed and or an 0 is displayed on the left side of 4 64 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages the display Both error messages indicate that the 85102 IF amplifier A10 or 12 is overloaded CPU detects the overload condition from a status bit on the 10 or A12 IF boards The on the left side of the display is usually an intermittent failure that can disappear during a measurement sweep Do not be overly concerned with this type of error O can appear if you are measuring a device with a sharp change in response typically greater than 24 dB This is normal and happens because the 85102 A10 A12 IF amp autoranging cannot respond fast enough to a step in RF power greater than 24 dB at adjacent data points It is sometimes possible to eliminate the O by doing one of the following
216. apter 6 Insert the 8510 operating disc into the analyzer disc drive to run the front panel emulation software In the 83651 an internal frequency doubler is used to generate frequencies of gt 26 5 GHz through 50 GHz Since the highest frequency that the frequency counter can measure is 26 5 GHz the doubler is disabled for the measurement at 50 GHz providing an RF output of 25 GHz This 8 42 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures verifies a 50 GHz output except for the operation of the doubler Since the doubler is engaged to produce the 26 5 GHz RF output the operation of the doubler is verified in the 26 5 GHz measurement 7 the analyzer press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 1 9 LOAD PROGRAM DISC MARKER 4 LOAD FILE 2 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR ZMARKER 8 Put the keypad overlay on the analyzer front panel The overlay is part of the front panel emulator kit 9 To set the stop frequency of the 83651 press the following keys on the analyzer FREQUENCY CW 5 0 G n SERVICE D4 more k2 Tools Menu k4 more Disable Doubler asterisk on Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter 10 Follow the instructions on the analyzer display to exit the front panel emulator software In Case of Difficulty If the measured values do n
217. aquaqaqpaqaaqakakaqus 4 71 IF Detector ADC Running Error 5 88 4 71 Source Sweep Running Error 5 4 71 GPIB PIB Running Emot MeSSaIBE 2 u pb 4 71 Running Error Message Troubleshooting 222 4 72 System Level Troubleshooting Block 4 72 Troubleshooting eal ards Lb RAS dad i res 4 72 Alphabetical List of Caution Running Error Messages 4 73 AGC Cal Fallad Roe 4 73 KENN ROC TES 4 73 Pa torange Cal FERE 4 74 Caution Optional Function Not Installed 1 exce xc ada 4 74 Disc COMMUNICATION ENO usas oder u Medel eae E SEC dre EU Deb REESE 4 74 Disc Hardware Proeb e y u u u us ad du tatak olo Bote e ca RR 4 74 Disc Read or Write Meer VU 4 74 Disc Media Wearing Out Replace r exem eR exten cas RES 4 75 Failure Check System B
218. ard of the 85101C display processor This battery is not field replaceable Replace the A7 1 0 board if the battery requires replacement WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended Discard used batteries according to manufacturer s instructions DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE 8510C On Site Service Manua V Typeface Conventions Italics e Used to emphasize important information Use this software only with the Agilent Technologies xxxxxX system Used for the title of a publication Refer to the Agilent Technologies xxxxxX System Level User s Guide Used to indicate a variable Type LOAD BIN filename Instrument Display Used to show on screen prompts and messages that you will see on the display of an instrument The Agilent Technologies xxxxxX will display the message CAL1 SAVED Keycap e Used for labeled keys on the front panel of an instrument or on a computer keyboard Press Return Softkey Used for simulated keys that appear on an instrument display Press Prior Menu User Entry Usedto indicate text that you will enter using the computer keyboard text shown in this typeface must be typed exactly as printed Type LOAD PARMFILE e Used for examples of programming code ftendif ifndef NO CLASS Path name e Used for a subdirectory name or file path Edit the file usr local
219. are not fixed values on the database In both forward and reverse directions they are Effective Forward Reverse Crosstalk Effective Forward Reverse Noise on the Trace Effective Forward Reverse Noise Floor Effective Power Ref out port 1 2 Effective Power max in port 2 1 Effective Power min in port 2 1 Effective Dynamic Range Ref min port 2 port 1 Effective Dynamic Range max min port 2 port 1 Connections and Connector Maintenance Always keep your connectors and cables in good working order by following the instructions in the 8 90 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications respective manuals As a general rule clean all connections prior to calibration and verification with the recommended cleaning solution and lint free swabs Controller Displays and High Resolution Monitors Tabular data displays do not stop at the top of each page on the display If the controller display memory is not capable of displaying the entire table you can press any key to stop the scrolling table and then press any key to continue the display You can also pause the program with the BASIC PAUSE or STOP key and then use the UP DOWN arrow keys to scroll the display Afterward you can use the BASIC CONTINUE key to resume program operation you may have to reset the BASIC softkeys to menu softkeys by pressing USER or SHIFT U
220. arentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove the top cover 2 Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 1 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel If you use another tool take care not to scratch the glass 3 Remove the two screws and washers item 2 exposed by the previous step The bezel is now free from the frame Remove the bezel item 3 and the gasket behind it Refer to Figure 6 2 for the rest of this procedure 4 Remove the four screws item 1 from the top of the display 5 Remove the display cable grounding clip item 2 from the display unit 6 Remove 21 screws item 7 from the card cage cover 7 Remove the card cage cover item 8 the RFI gasket item 6 and the PC board spacers item 5 8 Disconnect the display power cable assembly item 3 from the display processor board 9 Gently slide the display forward and out of the steel display enclosure 10 Disconnect the display power cable assembly item 3 from the display To make the connector inside the display more accessible remove the top cover of the display 2 screws 6 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures To Reassemble NOTE Before installing a new display remove the four screws from the rear panel of the new display assembly Slide off the on
221. assembly It enables various parts of the system to communicate by supporting these components real time clock disc drive twoRS232 ports two GPIB ports e 85101 interrupt system 85102 interface front panel interface RPG counters NOTE 1 The RS 232 port in conjunction with 0 5 Mbyte DRAM on the processor assembly permit spooling data to printers and plotters 2 RS 232 ports share only a small part of the 0 5 Mbyte DRAM 400 K DRAM for port 1 and 100 K DRAM for port 2 Power Supply The power supply is a switching power supply Its functions are distributed between the preregulator post regulator and display assemblies Preregulator A10 steps down and rectifies the line voltage It provides a fully regulated 5 V digital supply and several preregulated voltages that go to the A3 post regulator assembly for additional regulation Figure 3 5 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group Figure 3 5 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram MOTHERBOARD A8 LINE POWER AS REGULATOR 5V DIGITAL LOW POWER FAIL WARNING 3 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor The preregulator assembly includes the line power module a 60 kHz switching preregulator and overvoltage protection for the 5 V digital supply It provides LEDs visible from the rear of the instrument to indicate circuit status Line Power Module inclu
222. ation Making System Connections Grounding Power Cables WARNING An uninterrupted safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the supplied power cable s to prevent injury or death In compliance with international safety standards the 8510 system instruments are equipped with 3 wire power cables For systems using the cabinet connect the instruments directly to the power strip inside the cabinet using the 3 conductor grounded power cables supplied with the system cabinet Do not modify these power cables Reference Port Extension Cables not applicable for 85110 8516 8517 Connect the reference port extension cables rpecs as indicated in the following figure to balance the test port signal path with the reference signal path Part numbers of the long and short rpecs are listed in the test set manuals Recommended When Using Ramp Mode Figure 9 8 Reference Port Extension Cables a Symmetrical Test Setup ATTENTION b One Long Extension Two Equal Length Cables OUT Connected to Port 1 Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 17 System Installation Making System Connections General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB Cables GPIB allows either the system display processor or an external controller to operate the various instruments of the system GPIB interface operates according to IEEE 488 1978 and IEC 625 standards and IEEE 728 1982 recommended practices Ref
223. ator sweep counter input buffer Sweep crossing detector Staircase generator It also tests the analog output DAC programmability of the A21 IF counter board The A6 clock board must be working properly for this test to pass ADC Test A18 3 This test verifies that the board can be operated in calibration mode It also verifies proper operation of the 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 117 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program offset current source 12 bit ADC and all data RAMS Failure messages may indicate which data bits are faulty These types of messages are only useful for factory repair technicians Other causes of failure of this test may be The multiplexer of the 17 sample and hold board is injecting a signal into the A18 ADC board If it does fail remove the W24 cable that connects 17 sample and hold to A18 ADC If it passes after that the 17 sample and hold board is probably faulty Cal DAC Test A17 4 This test verifies that the CAL DAC on the 17 sample and hold board can properly calibrate the eight bit DAC on the A18 ADC board The ADC test should be run prior to this test Additionally the running error message ADC CAL FAILED can be the result of a faulty 17 sample and hold board Other causes of failure of this test may be A faulty A18 ADC board primarily the 10 volt reference 100 kHz IF Amplifier Test A10 A12 5 This test verifies the ability of the te
224. ause of failure Testset A4 GPIB assembly 85101C A71 0 assembly GPIB portion e GPIB cable between the test set and the 85101C Troubleshooting Run 85101C service program test 2 A7 Runthe service program test for the test set A4 GPIB board Check all cables Unable to Lock to Ext 10 MHz Ref The 10 MHz external input to the 85102 A6 clock assembly is more than 500 Hz off frequency The level should be gt 0 dBm If the external input is off frequency or is less than 0 dBm the A6 assembly sets the LIFSRO low alerting the CPU to the unlocked condition This message is not applicable unless you are locking to an external source such as in an 8510C millimeter wave system In this case the external 10 MHz input on the 85102 is used to lock to the source If this error message occurs when the external 10 MHz input is not used the probable causes of failure are A6clock assembly erroneously sets LIFSRQ low clock LIFSRO signal is pulled low along the way to the 85101C 5 CPU e 5 V input to the 85102 clock is intermittent Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e Check the 10 MHz input signal frequency and amplitude that you are applying to the rear panel of the 85102 VTO Over Range The VTO swept beyond its normal range It is detected by the VTO end of range detector on the test set A3 VTO summing amplifier If this error occurs only when a 8430 41 sour
225. aussing CRT 7 10 temperature checking 8 35 operating 4 107 temperature requirements 9 3 terms error term table editing 8 19 test cable considerations 8 25 test devices non ideal 8 27 test equipment required for adjustments 7 9 test menu how to access 4 58 test patterns display 4 47 test port adapters 8 95 raw channel errors example printout 8 61 8 64 test port errors example printout 8 60 test record 8 103 test set channel signal path specifications 8 102 cleaning rear panel extensions 10 3 S parameter check 9 21 test set GPIB HP IB syntax error 4 82 test set or service adapter 4 20 test sets control path 3 6 frequency converters 3 5 mixer based 3 5 sampler based 3 5 theory of operation 3 5 TESTS 5 A14 DISPLAY RAM 4 62 tests 10 A5 MULTIPLIER 4 63 11 A7 DISC CONTROLLER 4 63 12 A6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY 4 64 13 IF DETECTOR DATA 4 64 14 KEYBOARD TEST 4 64 1 A5 Processor EPROM 4 61 2 A5 PROCESSOR RAM 4 61 3 A7 DATA BUS 4 61 4 A14 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 4 62 4 A4 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 4 62 5 A4 DISPLAY RAM 4 62 6 A7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 4 62 7 A7 PUBLIC GPIB HP IB 4 62 8 A7 SYSTEM BUS 4 63 9 A9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM 4 63 theory of operation 3 1 tools 7 3 disassembly 6 3 for adjustments 7 3 service available 1 5 total reflection magnitude uncertainty Erm 8 76 total system uncertainty test description 8 5 touch up paint 5 6 transmission magnitude uncertainty Etm 8 78 transmiss
226. bin sample txt Computer Display Used to show messages prompts and window labels that appear on a computer monitor The Edit Parameters window will appear on the screen e Used for menus lists dialog boxes and button boxes on a computer monitor from which you make selections using the mouse or keyboard Double click EXIT to quit the program vi 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents 1 Service and Equipment VET ay Re ge deen 1 2 On Site Service Manual 1 3 Service and Equipment Overview Chapter 17 1 3 Safety Licensing Chapter 2 4 4 1 3 ol Operation Gia piers S y us VR bx PEE Sede cs eae ER RP RE SY 1 3 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Chapter 4 1 3 Replaceable Parts Chapter peed heb ee peas ERE NES 1 4 Replacement Procedures Chapter 6 1 4 Adjustments Chapter 5 3 sivas T FERRE ewan 1 4 Specifications and Performance Verification 8 1 4 Installation Chapter 9 0c SG Erb inne RPG da eO a d pp e
227. ble 5 13 85102 Board Location Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A26F2 2110 0083 1 FUSE 2 5A 250V 28480 2110 0083 A26F3 2110 0001 1 FUSE 1 0A 250V 28480 2110 0001 A26F4 2110 0342 1 FUSE 8 0A 250V 28480 2110 0342 Figure 5 20 85102 Board Location i TN 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 41 Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 14 85102 Top Internal Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 08756 20073 1 ASSEMBLY 28480 08756 20073 E7 0340 0596 4 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 E8 0340 0596 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 E9 0340 0596 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 E10 0340 0596 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 J2 1250 1391 1 ADAPTOR TEE MFM SMB 28480 1250 1391 01 1854 0679 1 TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5885 51 0 3 PD 200W 28480 1854 0679 02 04 1853 0351 2 TRANSISTOR PNP 2 6053 SI DARL 0 3 28480 1853 0351 03 1854 0611 1 TRANSISTOR NPN 2N6055 SI DARL 0 3 28480 1854 0611 W55 85102 60191 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY INTER CON 28480 85102 60191 1 0570 0111 5 SM 632 375RDSL 28480 0570 0111 2 1390 0104 1 FASTENER SNAP IN GROM PANEL THKNS 28480 1390 0104 3 1390 0281 1 FASTENER SNAP IN PLGR PANEL THKNS 28480 1390 0281 4 85102 20058 1 SAFETY COVER 28480 85102 20058 5 85102 20059 1 SAFETY COVER 28480 85102 20059 6 1205 0399 4 HEAT SINK SGL 0 3 5 28480 1205 0399 7 2200 0113 8 SCREW MACH 4 40 62
228. bles show values that are already included in the calculations for system specifications Their use is limited to inspecting the flowgraph error terms that exist between the coupler or bridge and the sampler The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 61 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 6 NOTES NOTE 8 62 Raw B2 Channel Errors Network Analyzer Test Set Source Calibration Kit Calibration Technique Test Port Cable 2 SL Sliding Loed Cal SEtern Description Of Error i Symbl low Freq Cutoff port2 to B2 GHz 1 2 2 8 000 low Freq Slope port to 82 dB Fs b2 Drift Mag deg c port2 to 82 dB Dm2bZ2 Drift Ph deg c port2 to B2 deg DgZb2 Drift Ph deg c F ghz pt2 B2 deg Dpf2b d b i Loss sqr F ghz port2 to conv B2 dB LfZ2b2 Loss Dc conVertor to I f B2 dB iLdvibZ Loss Freq ghz to I f BZ dB jLfvib2 Damage Level 82 dBm DIb2 Pur at Conv for 0 1 db Comp 82 dBm iPcch2 Raw rms Noise on Trace 82 dB iRntb2 Raw rms Noise Floor 82 I F dBm iRnfb2i Raw rms Noise Floor B2 Conv dBm iRnfb2ci 101 2 REsidu
229. bly NOT a true error but rather an intermittent failure If it does repeat locate the error message below and follow the troubleshooting suggestions ADC Cal Failed The 85102 A18 A D converter assembly is calibrated by the ADC of the 17 sample hold board 85101C CPU detects incorrect values of the measured bits and displays this message Possible cause of failure 85102 18 ADC board 85102 17 sample and hold board e 85102 A19 ADC control board Troubleshooting e Run the 85102 service program tests the Run All mode Run the 85102 service program tests 1 A19 3 A18 and 4 A17 e Ifthe Service Program found no fault with any assembly refer to Other Failures on page 4 102 and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test ADC Not Responding The 85102 A18 ADC board is not sending an expected interrupt service request to the 85101C CPU This message is the highest priority interrupt in the 8510C Probable cause of failure 85102 A18 ADC e 85102 A19 ADC control 85102 A24 CPU interface e 85101C interrupt problem F display interconnect cable Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 1 A19 and 3 A18 Run 851016 service program tests 1 0 board tests fthe service program found no fault with any assembly refer to Other Failures on page 4 102 and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 61 Ma
230. built module exchange program 5 2 recommended process checks description 8 6 record program disc 4 66 rectifier board replacement 6 23 reference port extension cables 9 15 9 17 reflection phase uncertainty Erp 8 77 reloading operating system 4 67 remote or local operation 8 101 repacking system instruments 9 10 repeat test loop 4 65 replaceable parts 5 2 replacement 1 front panel 6 6 A15 LCD assembly 6 16 backlight on LCD assembly 6 18 CRT display 6 10 inverter board 6 18 motherboard card cage assembly 6 14 power supply capacitors 6 26 preregulator 6 13 rectifier board 6 23 rotary pulse generator RPG 6 8 replacement of assembly adjustments required after 7 2 replacement procedures 6 1 85101C 6 5 85102 6 21 required disassembly tools 6 3 requirement altitude 9 3 requirements electrical 9 5 line voltage and fuses 9 11 emissions compliance with 9 3 environmental 9 3 humidity 9 3 line voltage and fuses 9 11 other 9 6 source compatibility 9 12 space 9 5 Index Index temperature 9 3 rerun self test 4 65 resealing of components after adjustment 7 4 residual error example printout 8 59 error term symbols 8 79 responses ratioed and unratioed 4 86 retrieving saved custom data 8 20 revision of source firmware 9 12 RF paths troubleshooting 4 88 RF signal paths 4 86 R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs 4 53 rotary pulse generator RPG replacement 6 8 run main program 4
231. c The VTO frequency is about 202 2 MHz 1 82 GHz 9 In summary the pretune phase lock sequence tunes the VTO to a fundamental sampling rate and locks the pretune loop based on the N number chosen by the processor The fundamental frequency generated by the VTO is between 65 and 300 MHz 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 17 Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation Pretune IF Count Sequence This sequence consists of two or three steps an IF count an IF search routine when needed and a check step Pretune IF Count is less a count than a check It determines whether a comb frequency is near the RF input frequency The IF counter of the IF detector checks the presence and frequency of the IF The processor selects the active IF sampler a4 a5 with the PIN switch the IF counter board The 8510 pretune synthesizer is accurate enough to pretune the comb frequency to within 5 MHz of the desired LO frequency Ideally this creates an IF at 20 MHz x5 MHz the IF counter detects that the IF is strong enough to lock to and then the IF counter counts the IF to within 10 kHz resolution If the IF is not approximately 10 MHz to 30 MHz or if the IF counter has over ranged or if the IF is too weak to lock to the processor ignores the count and begins the IF search routine IF Search Routine is a series of ever widening steps of approximately 10 MHz that attempts to find the IF After several attempts if a valid count is found
232. cables be connected see Figure 9 6 Figure 9 6 System Connections HP 85102 IF DETECTOR B parr DORESS 16 SS SHORT MUST CONNECTED THE HP 85102 SWEEP N 0 10 PRESENT HP 851 23 5 5 cx NM FOR 8940 OR 6360 USE A ADORESS 20 EJ BNC OPEN MUST B CONNECTED TO THE HP 86102 TQR INPUT For systems without controllers connect any 1 Power cables must be connected to HP 85101 peripherals to the 8510 interconnect on the HP 85102 test set source and any peripherals HP 85101 For systems with controllers con 2 Connect the reference port extension cables as nect aniy peripherals and the controller tothe shown in Figure 9 7 Not applicable for HP IB connector onthe 85101 85110 8516 8517 4 An HP 8340 or HP8360 requires a source in terconnect cable connection when the test set used is an HP 8516 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 15 System Installation Making System Connections 8360 Series Source GPIB HP IB Language Switch When using an 8360 series source its rear panel GPIB language switches should be set as shown in Figure 9 7 Darkened switch positions indicate a depressed switch Figure 9 7 8360 Series Source GPIB HP IB Language Switch 00110011 LANG ADDRESS of 9452495 9 16 8510C On Site Service Manual System Install
233. cations Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications The information listed in this section helps to correctly generate specifications prepare the program for performance verification and interpret any results 8510 System Specification Criteria Assumptions The specifications for any system are valid only when certain conditions are met Agilent assumes that the following criteria is met for all specifications 1 Sources Synthesizers are in step mode not ramp mode Sweepers in ramp mode 2 Temperature of System Uncorrected 0 to 55 degrees C Corrected 23 degrees 3 degrees at calibration Also 1 degree from calibration must be maintained for valid verification and for measurements within specified uncertainty limits 3 Reflection Transmission Test Sets Use 10 dB attenuator for 8513 and 20 dB attenuator for 8512 on the transmission thru path These attenuators are available by ordering 8492A option 20 20 dB 7 mm or 8493C option 10 10 dB 3 5 mm Devices are connected directly to test port 1 for reflection measurements For transmission measurements the device is connected to test port 1 the attenuator is connected to the end of the device and the cable is connected between the attenuator and port 2 4 System Configurations Specifications apply to systems configured with hardware items available in the 8510 sp
234. ccurate 4 The test set separates RF power from the source into test and reference signals The test signal is applied to the DUT and transmitted through or reflected from it 5 The test set down converts the RF signals test and reference into separate 20 MHz IF frequencies 6 The IF detector down converts the 20 MHz signals to 100 kHz It autoranges IF gain steps to maintain the IF signals at optimum levels for detection over a wide dynamic range 7 The IF detector applies each IF signal to a synchronous detector which generates DC voltages proportional to the magnitude and phase of each input signal The synchronous detectors use digital techniques to develop outputs equal to the real X and imaginary Y parts of the signal 8 The IF detector digitizes the X and Y sample pairs 9 The display processor reads the sample pairs processes them and displays them on the CRT LCD 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 15 Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation System Phase Lock Operation Components of the phase lock system are in each of the 8510 system instruments the source the test set the IF detector and the display processor Therefore a malfunction or bad connection in any of the instruments can cause a phase lock problem and generate a running error message Running error messages indicate that a fault was detected at a particular step in the phase lock sequence not at a particular physical location Running error m
235. ce Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties NOTE In all of the terms below f the forward direction and r the reverse direction Table 8 12 Residual Error Term Symbols Error Term Eterm Symbol Additional Information Power of Source 1 Ps Condition Averaging factor Avg Condition Loss of Attenuator 12 Lal Condition Loss of Attenuator 2 t La2 Condition Cable Flex Factor Cff Condition Drift in Room Temperature Drt Condition Effective Directivity 1 Efd Erd Fac Comp Effective Refl Tracking t Efr Err Fac Comp Effective Source match t Efs Ers Fac Comp Effective Crosstalk Efc Erc Fac Comp Effective Trans Tracking t Eft Ert Fac Comp Effective Load Match t Efl Erl Fac Comp Effective Noise on Trace Efnt Ernt Fac Comp Effective Noise Floor Efnf Ernf Fac Comp Effective Power Ref out port1 2 Epr1 Epr2 Typical Effective Power max in port1 2 Epx2 Epx1 Typical Effective Power miN in port1 2 Epn2 Epn1 Typical Effective Dny Rng Ref min port1 2 Edrr1 Edrr2 Fac Comp Effective Dny Rng maX min port1 2 Edrx1 Edrx2 Fac Comp Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty tRelated to specifications of calibration kit devices and measurement calibration techniques tUsed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy 8 82 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measur
236. ce is used and is in ramp mode the problem is probably either the 8430 41 source or the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly Probable cause of error Testset VTO Testset A3 VTO summing amplifier e 85102 A23 main phase lock 85102 A20 sweep ADC 4 70 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Source is off frequency VTUNE line to test set summing amplifier from 85102 A23 main phase lock assembly 85102 0 10V swept input BNC cable is not connected not used with 8360 series sources Troubleshooting e Run the 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e Run 85102 service program tests 2 A20 and 9 A23 Check the source especially the 0 to 10 volt ramp linearity Check the test set VTO and summing amp boards Refer to Unratioed Power Failures 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 71 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages This page intentionally left blank 4 72 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Unratioed Power Failures Unratioed Power Failures Overview This section checks test set RF functionality to isolate the problem to either the test set or the rest of the system If the test set is at fault this section helps to further isolate the faulty assembly within the test set The following test sets are covered in this section 8514B 8514B Option 002 003 8515A 8516A 8516A Option 002 003 8517B
237. cement module Keep the defective module for return to Agilent Technologies Order a restored exchange replacement module from Agilent Technologies Refer to the replaceable parts section of this manual for appropriate part numbers of the restored exchange module When the replacement module is received place it in your spares stock Return the defective module to Agilent Technologies Restored exchange modules are shipped individually in boxes as shown above addition to the module the box contains an exchange assembly failure report and a return shipping label Open the box carefully so that it can be used to return the defective module to Agilent Technologies Complete the exchange assembly failure report Remove the return shipping label from inside the box Place the defective module and the failure report in the box Seal the box with tape For shipping within the USA affix the return shipping label over the existing label Mail the box to Agilent Technologies Postage is paid by Agilent Technologies on boxes mailed within the USA Outside the USA address and mail the box to the nearest Agilent Technologies office Do not use the return shipping label 5 3 Replaceable Parts Reference Designations Abbreviations Multipliers and Manufacturer s Code List Table 5 1 Reference Designators Ausente tendi Assembly Buana aaa m ayasa ni Fan Motor Capacitor E Miscellaneous Ele
238. certainty curve at 26 5 GHz what is the estimated system dynamic range Does the value correspond with the data sheet The estimated value is around 68 dB or 70 dB depending upon how you read the graph To estimate the dynamic range look on the 521 uncertainty curve The curve shows 521 in dB from reference power Find where the uncertainty becomes too large Too large can be considered to be gt 6 dB uncertainty estimated dynamic range about 68 dB where the noise power equals the signal power or gt 10 dB uncertainty which is off the graph corresponding to 70 dB dynamic range The data sheet value of 74 dB corresponds with the estimated value 3 Compare the 511 and 521 phase uncertainty curves with the data sheet Why are they The data sheet values for these curves do not include the effects of cable stability and system drift errors different Table 8 4 Using a Custom Calibration Kit Exercise 3a Answers Questions Answers 1 How can you verify that the 11 magnitude uncertainty curve is correct At S11 0 the value for the 26 5 GHz curve should be about 35 dB or 0 0178 linear since that is the of return loss of the load 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 29 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Table 8 5 Error Terms to Modify for Generating Uncertainty Curves Error Term Value Power of source 10 dB Effective
239. cise 3d You want to determine the measurement uncertainties for a 20 dB fixed attenuator You want to use this attenuator to make a measurement over the frequency range of 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz The attenuator has a worst case SWR of 1 25 The device length is about 3 cm Refer to Table 8 9 for the answers To determine the attenuator uncertainties use the following 3 5 mm 8510 system 8510C network analyzer 8515A test set 83631A synthesized source 85052B calibration kit choose a sliding load calibration 85131B D cables 85053B verification kit D S S S NNN Task Generate the worst case uncertainty specifications for an S21 magnitude measurement using the lower limits L Question What are the measurement uncertainties in each frequency range for the attenuator measurement 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 27 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Answers to Tutorial Questions Exercise questions from the tutorials are repeated in the first column of the tables Answers are stated in the column to the right of the question Table 8 2 Examining Error Term Tables Exercise 1 Answers Questions Answers 1 Which effective error term would dominate when The dominant error terms are you measure the following 2 Fora good 500W termination The directivity term 3 Fora short circuit The source match term 4 Foranamplifier with 10 dB of gain The load match t
240. covers removed should be performed by qualified service personnel only i Turn off the line voltage before removing or replacing printed circuit boards Damage to integrated circuits can occur if power is left on when printed circuit boards are removed or replaced Whenever the 8510 system is serviced an anti static workstation should be used to avoid damage incurred by static discharge into the static sensitive circuits of the 8510 system If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impared This product must be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only 8510C On Site Service Manual 2 3 Safety Licensing 8510 Safety Information Location of Hazardous Voltages in 8510 Instruments 1 of 2 Figure 2 1 65VDC 65VDC 15KV CRT LCD 1 5 KV A16 BACKLIGHT INVERTER 120 240 Vac 120 240 Vac POWER TRANSFORMER POWER LINE MODULE 120 240 Vac LINE SWTCH 10 38Vac vA J We TY A26 NOK NS RECTIFIER ul y Alc 120 240 Vac N 55427 WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the product from all voltage sources while it is being opened The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply 2 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Safety L
241. cs processor The control signals include backlight intensity It outputs a high voltage used to drive the backlight lamp Troubleshooting Image Problems The following information assumes that the display is illuminated when the instrument is turned on If the display remains dim dark or blank refer to the section LCD Failures Display Troubleshooting Procedure The display should be bright with annotations and the text should be readable This procedure allows you to check for non functioning pixels and other problems 1 Activate the default colors Press DISPLAY ADJUST DISPLAY DEFAULT SETTINGS If this does not correct the color problem proceed to step 2 2 Exercise the display test patterns by referring to Table 4 3 Check for damaged pixels look for the symptoms described in How to Identify a Faulty Display and other serious abnormalities If the A15 LCD is defective replace the complete display assembly Refer to A15 LCD Assembly Replacement on page 6 16 4 34 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures What Is A Faulty Pixel A pixel is a picture element that combines to create an image on the display They are about the size of a small pin point Damaged pixels can be either permanently on or permanently off e A permanently on pixel is red green or blue and is always displayed regardless of the display setting It will be visible on a dark background
242. ction Figure 4 12 Location of A10 Preregulator Diagnostic LEDs Line Voltage Selector Switch Red LED Green LED Normally Off Normally On Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post Regulator Turn off the 85101C Remove the 85101C display processor top cover and make sure that all board assemblies are firmly seated in their connectors Turn the 85101C on Locate the post regulator assembly and check to see if the five green LEDs on the top edge of this assembly are on Refer to Figure 4 13 for locations of these LEDs fany LED on the A3 post regulator is off or flashing refer to Determine Why the Green LEDs on A3 Are Not All On later in this procedure 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 81 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting e Ifall of the green LEDs on the top edge of are on there is 95 confidence level that the power supply is verified To confirm the last 5 uncertainty continue this procedure with the next paragraph Measure Voltages on the A3 Post Regulator Refer to Figure 4 13 and measure the dc voltages on the A3 post regular test points This figure lists the voltage and their limits Ifthe voltages are within their limits the 85101C power supply is 100 verified Ifthe voltages are not within their limits replace the post regulator Figure 4 13 A3 Post Regulator LEDs and Test Point Voltages LED TP1 LED TP2 15v 8654 GROUND
243. ctors too far clockwise Damage may occur to the inductors 12 Refer to Figure 7 9 for the location of L6 and L7 Alternately adjust L6 and L7 to get the minimum ripple seen on the analyzer display see Figure 7 10 13 Alternately adjust L4 and L5 to minimize the ripple Typically the ripple is less than 0 01 dB 14 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 15 Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to tighten the screws when reinstalling the board into the mainframe loose screws can cause crosstalk in the instrument Also be sure to reconnect the 85102 cables in the original configuration Figure 7 10 Synchronous Detector Adjustment Waveform CENTER 0 275000000 GHz SPAN 0 001000000 GHz 7 26 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 8 Clock Adjustment Procedure 8 Clock Adjustment Equipment Frequency counter 53151A Opt 001 4 ft BNC to SMB cable assembly 5062 7230 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure The clock assembly generates the reference signals for the main phase locked loop the 19 9 MHz LO generator and the YADC It also provides timing and LO signals for the 100 kHz synchronous detectors and a sinusoidal signal that is used to calibrate the 100 kHz IF system The 20 MHz LO oscillator is composed of an integrated circuit in a phase locked loop whose
244. ctrical Part Fuse Filter Electrical Connector Stationary Portion Jack MP Miscellaneous Mechanical Part Q Silicon Controlled Rectifier SCR Transistor Triode Thyristor Resistor Wests n n Transformer Integrated Circuit Microcircuit W Cable Transmission Path Wire Kna Crystal Unit Piezoelectric Quartz Abbreviations A Analog to Digital ADC Analog to Digital Converter ADP acts Adapter Alumninum Amplifier APC Amphenol Precision Connector 8 Assembly American Wire Gauge CNTR Control Controller Connector CONT Control Controller CONVTR Converter CPU Central Processing Unit Cover D Darlington Pair DBL n qas Double Degree DET itm Detector E EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory A Emulator External Extension F G Grommet 222 22 Grooved H HD aaa Head i Heat IG sed Integrated Circuit ID Identifying Inside Diameter em Intermediate Frequency Inch INTE usciti Internal es Input Output J
245. cturer s instructions keeping in mind the following it is imperative that at first it be placed no closer than 4 inches 10 cm from the face of the CRT while demagnetizing the display If this distance is too far to completely demagnetize the CRT try again slightly closer distance until the CRT is demagnetized Generally degaussing is accomplished with a slow rotary motion of the degausser moving it in a circle of increasing radius while simultaneously moving away from the CRT Figure 10 2 shows the motion for degaussing the display CAUTION Applying an excessively strong magnetic field to the CRT face can destroy the CRT Like most displays the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic fields generated from unshielded motors In countries that use 50 Hz some 10 Hz jitter may be observed If this problem is observed remove the device causing the magnetic field Figure 10 2 Motion for Degaussing the Display ne ven 24 10cm BULK TAPE ERASER CRT DEMAGNITIZER 8510C On Site Service Manual 10 5 Preventive Maintenance Inspect the Error Terms Inspect the Error Terms Error terms E terms or calibration coefficients are an indication of the condition of the instrument its calibration kits and cables When tracked over a period of time error terms can signal and identify system component and performance degradation Error term comparisons are best made with data generated periodically by the same instrument and calibrati
246. curve at 26 5 GHz do the following Estimate effective directivity Compare the estimate with the data sheet value 2 On the S21 magnitude uncertainty curve at 26 5 GHz do the following Estimate system dynamic range Compare the estimate with the data sheet value 3 Compare the S11 and S21 phase uncertainty curves Editing Specifications Exercise 3 The exercises in this section present typical examples of customizing a test setup Each exercise presents a task followed with a related question The answers to the questions are in tables located at the end of the chapter You are referred to the specific table number for the exercise you are doing Each exercise presents a different aspect of changing error terms for customizing specifications The exercises do not need to be completed in any particular order V Exercise shows you how to modify error terms for a custom system V Exercise shows you how to modify error terms for a custom test set V Exercise shows you how to edit error terms for custom cables in a test setup V Exercise shows you how to edit error terms to calculate uncertainties for measuring a non ideal test device Select Edit Specs from the Main menu This selection allows you to edit the system specifications tables You can change power levels averaging factors or error terms After you finish editing the software prompts you to recompute the effective terms that are calcula
247. d In such instances display information CRT or LCD is documented separately Some of the main differences are 85101C Equipped with a CRT 85101C Equipped with an LCD GSP display board positioned vertically card cage A14 GSP display board positioned horizontally on chassis slot directly behind A15 LCD assembly A11 CRT display A15 LCD assembly includes the A16 inverter board and backlight W1 cable and connections to boards WA W5 W6 W7 W8 cables and connections to boards Rear panel multi pin connector uses D1191A video Rear panel multi pin connector designed to work with cable supplied for external video connections external VGA compatible monitors standard 15 pin VGA requires special video monitor monitor cable not supplied NOTE In this manual GPIB and HP IB refer to the same protocol GPIB allows either the system display processor or an external controller to operate the various instruments of the system The GPIB interface operates according to IEEE 488 1978 and IEC 625 standards and IEEE 728 1982 recommended practices 1 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization On Site Service Manual Organization This manual is part of the documentation set included with the 8510C network analyzer Refer to the front matter of the 8510C Operating and Programming Manual for a graphic representation of the complete documentation set
248. d at the cable end must be significantly higher in performance than the cable under test See Figure 8 7 for an example of a return loss measurement Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable meets the return loss specification 8 36 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Figure 8 7 Return Loss Measurement of Cables START Q 124598278 GHz STOP 49 999999478 GHz Good Cable Insertion Loss of Cables 1 Replace the load with a short 2 To measure the insertion loss of the cable over the entire specified band press MARKER turn the front panel knob and look for the worst case measurement Power holes gt 0 5 dB indicate a bad cable See Figure 8 8 for example insertion loss measurements of a good and a bad cable Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable you are measuring meets its insertion loss specification In this S11 measurement the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and reflected back from the short Therefore the correct insertion loss is approximately the measured value divided by 2 one way path loss of the cable NOTE It is normal for the data trace to have a roll off toward the high end of the frequency range Figure 8 8 Insertion Loss Measurements of Cables log
249. d offers additional troubleshooting hints How to Reload the Operating System explains how to do this from memory and disc 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 39 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Self Tests and Other Failures Before or during self tests the instrument may detect other failures These are known as instrument errors and default test 15 The next paragraphs and What to Do If the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 explain these conditions What to Do If an Instrument Error Occurs An instrument error may occur at power up before the self test sequence runs or as it runs If this happens one of the following messages is displayed on the display Abort Break Instruction Error Address Error Processor Error An example of a processor error message is displayed below PROCESSOR ERROR The processor encountered an error from which it could not recover Technical Details Address executed or next instruction was PC 000 009 Status register at that time was SR 2700 Top of memory stack after the error 0002 FFAG 2700 0000 009C FFF1 423 016 0002 Reason for the error was Vector offset 0010 Processor illegal instruction error If any of the five messages above are displayed reload the operating system explained at the end of this section NOTE Do not use the memory operations menu softkeys GO SHOW WRITE CSHOW and CWRITE Agilent recommends that only qua
250. d on Error terms are numbers generated and stored in internal arrays during a measurement calibration They are also known as E terms or measurement calibration coefficients Descriptions of the individual error terms are provided at the end of this section Error terms can also serve a diagnostic purpose Specific parts of the analyzer system and accessories contribute to the values of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we know what typical error terms look like we can examine error terms to monitor system performance or to identify faulty components in the system Error terms are created by measuring well defined calibration devices over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for the devices Neglecting drift and random errors such as noise the differences represent systematic repeatable errors of the network analyzer system The resulting measurement calibration coefficients are good representations of some raw error sources of the system Use the procedures in this section to generate and examine error terms This information can be useful in two ways Preventive Maintenance A stable repeatable system should generate repeatable error terms over long time intervals for example six months Make a hardcopy record print or plot of the error terms then periodically compare current error terms with the record A sudden shift in error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic
251. d that is capable of generating a 1 5 V p p sine wave at approximately 20 Hz Running error messages displayed when these boards fail are included below ADC Cal Failed ADC Not Responding IF Cal Failed Sweep Time Too Fast Procedure 1 Remove the 85102 IF detector top cover Then remove all four snap on RF cables from A17 J1 J2 J3 and J4 2 Use an external signal generator to inject an approximate 1 5 V 20 Hz sine wave into A17J1 You can also use 50 or 60 Hz if your signal generator is not capable of producing 20 Hz 3 Onthe 8510 press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET Set both start and stop frequencies to 500 MHz 4 Set one of the 17 assembly multiplex inputs by pressing the following keys PARAMETER MENU and then select the appropriate USER 1 4 keys as follows beginning with User 1 4 102 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Other Failures USER 1 a1 softkey for A17J3 or J4 USER 2 b2 softkey for 17 or J2 USER 3 a2 softkey for 17 or J2 USER 4 b1 softkey for 17 or J2 Press FORMAT MENU and select one of the following REAL softkey for A17J2 or IMAGINARY softkey for A17J1 or J3 5 Press STIMULUS MENU MORE SINGLE 6 7 The 8510C LCD CRT should display two cycles of the 20 Hz sine wave 8 Press RESPONSE AUTO Repeat steps 4 through 7 of the procedure for each of the A17 inputs J2 J3 and J4 If the LCD CRT does no
252. data fields 8 20 environment and device temperature check 8 35 environmental requirements 9 3 equations measurement uncertainty 8 73 reflection uncertainty 8 74 transmission uncertainty 8 74 equipment required for specifications measurement uncertainties 8 9 for system performance verification 8 9 equipment verification for specifications and measurement uncertainties 8 9 equipment service test 1 7 Erm 8 76 Erp 8 77 error correction process 8 73 error models explanation of 8 76 error term editing 8 16 Index Index error terms calculated 8 95 changing values 8 18 preventive maintenance using 10 6 raw 8 6 errors magnitude due to device frequency response 8 97 measurement 8 3 phase 8 98 random 8 4 running error messages 4 6 4 69 sources of additional measurement 8 75 drift 8 4 8 75 measurement 8 74 random 8 74 systematic 8 74 systematic 8 4 test port example printout 8 60 what to do 4 52 Etm 8 78 Etp 8 79 exchange assemblies 5 2 extender board part number 7 22 extension cables for rear panel 9 15 extension cables for the rear panel 8 102 extension files for semi automated adjustments 7 4 F failure 14 GSP 4 44 A15 LCD 4 43 performance test 4 6 power supply 4 6 4 97 self test 4 4 software 4 6 4 121 unratioed power 4 6 failure during adjustment 7 2 failure check system bus configuration 4 75 failure fault indicator on 4 75 failure
253. des the line power switch voltage selector switch and main fuse The voltage selector switch adapts the instrument to local line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V The main fuse protects the input side of the preregulator against drawing too much line current Preregulated Voltages are converted from line voltage by the switching preregulator The regulated 5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard The following partially regulated voltages are routed to the post regulator for final regulation 70V 8V 8V 18V Regulated 5 V Digital Supply is regulated by the control loop in the preregulator It goes directly to the motherboard and from there to all assemblies requiring a digital supply A 5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to the preregulator In order for the preregulator to function the 5 VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies and the 5 V sense line must be working If not the other preregulated voltages will be incorrect However this condition will not cause damage as all circuits are over and under voltage protected Shutdown Indications The green LED is normal operation It is off when line power is not connected not turned on or set too low or if the line fuse has blown The red LED is off in normal operation It lights to indicate a 5 V supply fault or power transformer circuitry fault such as an undervoltage overvoltage overcurrent or overtemperature condition
254. directivity 30 dB Effective reflection tracking 0 011 dB Effective source match 25 dB Effective load match 30 dB Effective power ref out port 1 40 dBm Loss dc source to port 1 30 dB Loss dc port 1 to B1 50 dB Loss dc port 2 to B2 80 dB Loss dc source to A1 50 dB Table 8 6 Using a Special Test Set Exercise 3b Answers Error Term Value 1 What is the difference between the S21 As expected the lower case uncertainty is larger than the upper case magnitude uncertainty and the upper case uncertainty The plots for both the upper and lower case uncertainty lower case uncertainty are shown in Figure 8 3 and Figure 8 4 8 30 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Figure 8 3 21 Magnitude Upper Case Uncertainty User Parameters amp for Special Test Set 521 MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY USER PARAMETERS HP 51 C 511 NOSOURCE NOCRLKIT BL NOCABLES EXERCISE 3b m 18 EE 16 1992 ni 5 H oe d m 16 59 33 t Freq GHz 8 845 to 8 s 8 to 28 S 20 to 26 5 a DUT Length p 10 cm 8 B 611 gt S12 521 22 18 10 30 56 70 98 521 Measurement Level dB from Ref 521 10 088 045 8 248 8 20 258 20 26 5 351 Figure 8 4 21 Magnitude Lower Case Uncertainty User Parameters amp for Special Test Set Sel MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CAS
255. directly from the 18 V and 18 V supplies from the preregulator The fan is fused only with the line fuse so that it will continue to provide airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled If overheating occurs the main instrument supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full speed Full speed is normal at initial power up Low Power Fail Warning Circuit LPFW detects low power and shuts down the CPU gracefully Voltage Indicators The five green LEDs along the top edge of the post regulator assembly are on in normal operation to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply If they are off or flashing refer to Chapter 4 to trace the cause of the problem Display Power is routed through the motherboard to the graphics processor assembly and then to the CRT LCD 3 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 8510 Typical System Measurement Sequence 8510 Typical System Measurement Sequence 1 The 8510 display processor sets the source and test set VTO start frequencies 2 The system achieves phase lock as explained in System Phase Lock Operation 3 The source begins one of two basic types of frequency sweep Step sweep mode the system phase locks at each frequency point This mode is accurate relatively fast for current synthesizers and relatively slow for older models e Ramp sweep mode the system phase locks at the start of each band crossing This sweeper mode is fast but less a
256. e This is necessary because a running error message may be the result of the CPU executing a firmware instruction at the time of failure Therefore the displayed error message is indicating a related failure not the actual failure It is indicating a failure at the wrong place or wrong assembly The error message that continually repeats is the running error message you want to troubleshoot Make sure the system is powered up in the proper order to avoid a possible phaselock error The instrument power on sequence In systems with external controllers switch on power to the controller last the 85101C next to last In systems without external controllers switch on power to the 85101C last Always disconnect all unnecessary peripheral instruments and non terminated GPIB cables from the system when troubleshooting Check the cables and the connections to the boards Remove the 85102 top cover and check that all snap on cables are connected properly to the boards Each cable is labeled with a J jack number that corresponds to the J input on the board cover 4 60 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Alphabetical List of Caution Running Error Messages Troubleshooting suggestions and probable causes of failure are given with the following list of messages Always press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys to see if the error message repeats If it does not repeat it is proba
257. e Error Terms section of Chapter 4 in this manual for information on how to generate a list of error terms Periodically measure the same device daily for example and compare the current results to the results previously measured When the data begins to deviate greatly refer to Chapter 4 in this manual 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications are the limiting values of the individual system errors that describe the system performance This performance is different for each type of 8510 system configuration depending on test set source connector type calibration method and cables System specifications for your system configuration can be generated with the performance verification specifications software Except for the examples in this chapter there are no system specifications in the manual Example printouts appear under the title Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Measurement Uncertainties later in this chapter explains the sources and types of measurement errors and how they relate to measurement uncertainties To generate system specifications follow the How to Load the Software and How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program procedures in this chapter 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 7 Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and S
258. e 20 GHz source signal 4 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont CONTROL CONFIGURATION AND CABLING PRE OPERATIONAL CHECKS Front and Rear Panel Checks Instrument power on sequence source test set 85102 85101 Check power line modules for local line voltage Check GPIB addresses of all instruments For 8360 set language switch to 001 For 8340 41 set FREQUENCY STANDARD switch to INTERNAL Cabling Checks Connect cables as shown in Figure 4 1 System Connections Check all connections carefully ss418c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 9 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Figure 4 1 System Connections DISK DRIVE ADDRESS 9 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR DISPLAY INTERCONNECT F HP 85102 IF DETECTOR ADDRESS 16 IF PRESENT HP 851X TEST SET ADDRESS 20 NOTE FOR HP 8360 USE A 8NC SHORT MUST 8E CONNECTED TO THE HP 85102 SWEEP 0 10 NOTE FOR HP 8340 OR B350 USE A BNC SHORT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE HP 85102 TRIGGER INPUT HP 8360 RF SOURCE ADDRESS 19 HP 8340 SOURCE ADDRESS 19 85101 8510 INTERCONNECT NOTES 1 Power cables must be connected to 85101 85102 test set source and any peripherals 2 Connect the reference port extension cables as shown in Figu
259. e 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram at the end of this procedure If the source is an 8350 check the setting of configuration switch A3S1 The correct settings are shown at the left side of the 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram at the end of this procedure If you have completed the control configuration and cabling checks and you still have a self test failure running error message unratioed power failure or other obvious failure type go to the appropriate troubleshooting section Otherwise continue with No Obvious Failure Type on page 4 20 4 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated System Service Flowchart cont Firmware Revisions Operation Internal Switches continued Remove the top covers 85101 A5 CPU board free run switch all zeros Test set A3S1 configuration switch see troubleshooting block diagram 8350 A3S1 configuration switch see troubleshooting block diagram Make sure you have completed the control configuration and cabling checks If there is still a self test failure running error message unratioed power failure or other obvious failure type then go to the appropriate troubleshooting section If not continue to No Obvious Failure Type 55421 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 19 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline No Obvious Failure Type Verify the 85101C Display P
260. e GPIB chips to communicate with each other in both directions to and from The display message will prompt you to connect the GPIB to the SYSTEM bus Use the GPIB cable that would normally connect the test set to the 85101C and make the connection from the system bus to the GPIB on the rear panel of the 85101C Then run the test If the test fails the A7 board the cable connection or the cable may be faulty Static Interrupt System Test A7 8 This routine exercises the CPU interrupt system on the 7 1 0 board This is a static test of the interrupt system it is a simple means of detecting major system problems 4 110 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program RPG Test 1 A7 9 Tests the RPG rotary pulse generator knob and front panel interface to that knob Run the test and verify that the displayed RPG count is 00 Hex Turn the knob counterclockwise and verify that the count increases Then turn the knob clockwise and verify that the count decreases You can go either way because the count wraps around from 00 Hex to FF Hex Keyboards and LEDs Test 1 A7 A G n Tests the front panel keys and LEDs and their interface to the 7 1 0 board Run the test and first check that the 85101C front panel LEDs RLTS 1248 are flashing on and off If they are not the Al or A7 board is faulty However if they are flashing continue the test by pressing the key that is displayed on the LCD
261. e Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Chapter 5 in Table 5 5 Table 4 10 Post Regulator Fuses LED Test Point Fuse Designator Fuse Rating Agilent Part Number 1 1 5 125V 2110 0333 4 2 2 125V 2110 0425 5 2A 125V 2110 0425 If any A3 fuse burns out replace it If it burns out again when power is applied to the 85101C A3 post regulator or A10 preregulator is bad Determine which of these assemblies has failed as follows Remove the A10W1 cable at post regulator and measure the voltages at A10P1 with a voltmeter having a small probe Compare the measured voltages with those in Figure 4 17 e Ifthe voltages are within tolerance replace post regulator fthe voltages are not within tolerance replace preregulator A10 e Ifall post regulator green LEDs are now the A10 preregulator and post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A3 Continue this procedure with the next paragraph Remove More Assemblies Install post regulator A3 Remove the jumper from the GND pin on the top edge of post regulator A3 and chassis ground This jumper was connected earlier in this procedure Remove the following assemblies and turn on the 85101C A4 A14 GSP board Ab CPU board A6 EEPROM board A7 1 0 board Disc drive powe
262. e choice of returning to the hardware configuration menu or entering the software configuration menu The software configuration menu allows you to set the addresses of your 8510 and your printer plotter or select plotter trace pens System Specs In this menu you can choose several types of tables and formats for a hard copy of both forward and reverse error terms System Uncert This menu allows you to print or plot dynamic accuracy or total uncertainty for your system configuration 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 11 Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications Verify System This menu allows you to verify system performance If you want to verify the performance of your system follow the next procedure If you want to generate system specifications follow the procedure in How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program Using the Keyboard or Mouse for Program Control Use of the keyboard or mouse is supported in the software program The list below provides a brief overview of the different methods for controlling the cursor and modifying values Cursor Keys Use the cursor keys arrow keys to move the cursor up down left and right Done or SELECT Use either the softkey or the SELECT keyboard key to complete data entry Always press the key to retain edited data HOME Use the HOME key to page forward Combine the SHIFT key with the
263. e end of this chapter For the 83640 5 From the analyzer front panel enter 2 6 5 G n NOTE Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz input on the frequency counter The input switch must also be set to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz position Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter 6 In the 83640 an internal frequency doubler is used to generate frequencies of 20 GHz through 40 GHz Since the highest frequency that the frequency counter can measure is 26 5 GHz the doubler is disabled for the measurement at 40 GHz providing an RF output of 20 GHz This verifies a 40 GHz output except for the operation of the doubler Since the doubler is engaged to produce the 26 5 GHz RF output the operation of the doubler is verified in the 26 5 through 40 GHz On the synthesizer press SERVICE MORE TOOLS MENU MORE DISABLE DOUBLER asterisk on CW 4 0 G n Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter For the 83651 5 From the analyzer front panel enter 2 6 5 G n NOTE Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz input on the frequency counter The input switch must also be set to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz position Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this ch
264. e information on upgrading a network analyzer and or source firmware 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 15 4 16 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Switch off power Switch on the source the test set then the analyzer Check that each instrument preset condition is correct Then check the system preset condition by pressing Instrument State RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET The resulting analyzer display should be similar to Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 System Factory Preset State I Lg a E L 1 1 LLLA LLLI 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Firmware Revisions Operation Internal Switches continued Remove power then apply power to the source test set and the analyzer Check the preset condition of each instrument Check the system factory preset condition see Figure 4 2 55420 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 17 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Remove the 85101C top cover Remove the 5 CPU board and make sure the free run switch 551 is set to all zeroes See Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 Location of Switch 551 RED Remove the test set top cover Check the setting of configuration switch A3S1 The correct settings are shown at the left side of th
265. e mixer board while the output of the mixer is monitored on the spectrum analyzer The following adjustments optimize the matching of the crystal filter to the IF thereby minimizing the test set noise appearing at the mixer output 1 After loading BASIC into the controller memory insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC Type LOAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE When the program is loaded press RUN Press the softkey that selects the IF mixer adjustment ae co The following prompt is displayed Model number of spectrum analyzer being used Select a softkey 6 Press the appropriate softkey 7 Switch off the analyzer power Configure the equipment as the controller display shows Make sure that the addresses of the test equipment match the addresses appearing on the controller 8 Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup 7 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Figure 7 6 Location of the IF Mixer Adjustments A14 A1 IF MIXER A13 A2 IF MIXER A11 Bt IF MIXER 9 B2 IF MIXER 9 11 13 1 XTAL FILTER 1 2 5 11 BI F MIXER A13 A2 F MIXER ANY AT F 9 When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller 10 The follow
266. e oae cancer ute da bad d Rp eb obedit 4 122 o occu dent aed wat Sede maa 4 125 FP sends 4 125 Noisy Display VocS ado QUE Gor ardor 4 125 20 AZ SING Wave TEST u a l eres vase iaeo e EU a UR ACER deb ora Eb d i rd 4 125 Saute IESE us uis es Ed Par e Fd Repo qoa dk dup iori ae E pcd ose E 4 126 coii coe iac padadbad uA dde V Rees bodie did edi aud yd awed Ri 4 126 Bride oes Sape Oh tob aO Sy waka A adopta T 4 129 iD PPP cT 4 129 pd do SE E TTE mm 4 129 Running the 8510 Service uides deep EE 4 130 How to Interpret Service Program Test 4 130 8510 Service Program MIB ute skr rr Rex Rr e 4 130 85101 Display Processor Service Program 4 131 85101 CPU Beard ues 4 131 85101 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests AT A2 AJ nx eme wes 4 133 85101 Display Board and CRT Tests A4 A11 or LCD
267. e of 23 3 C Therefore the environmental temperature must remain in the range of 20 C to 26 C Once calibrated the environmental temperature must not vary more than 1 C The temperature of the devices is also important because their electrical characteristics change with temperature The devices should have been removed from their slots in the boxes and set on top of the foam to allow them to reach room temperature 5 Check the standards data in the verification printout against the printed data that came with the verification kit Make sure that the cal coefficients are the correct ones for your kit For example the 85052B calibration kit should be using a revision B xn xx or B n cal coefficient disk or tape where B B type cal kit n revision number x don t care If they do not agree contact your Agilent customer engineer 6 Perform the calibration and verification procedures again Make sure all connections are good and properly torqued When you connect a device you can gently tap on it with your finger to see if the display trace is stable If not reconnect the device and try again 7 f the procedure still fails and another calibration kit or verification kit is available try substituting kits 8 Use the verification program to print out the system error terms If necessary you will use this printout in step 10 9 Ifthe verification is still not successful the problem is elsewhere in the system Go to Unrati
268. e of the tests in this program For example if you have a running error message and you are referred to this section to run a test but it passes check Other Failures to see if there is any further testing you can do Failure After Repair If a failure is detected after a board is replaced the failure may be the result of a board that is indirectly related to the failed board If this happens you should check the following boards A15 power supply A6 clock board and the A24 processor interface Those boards affect all other boards and if they are faulty they can cause most other boards to fail a test Be sure to check those boards if a replaced board still fails a test ADC Control Test A19 1 Tests the ability of the A18 ADC board to execute a complete set of conversions and generate an ADC interrupt request This test verifies that the processor can trigger the ADC state machine on the A19 ADC control board It also verifies that the state machine on A19 sequences properly and that a conversion is actually completed by the closely related A18 ADC board Also it verifies that the A19 repeat and delay counters are working properly Other causes of failure on this test may be Afaulty A6 clock board e faulty 10 MHz input to the 19 ADC control board Afaulty 800 kHz signal in to the A18 ADC board Sweep ADC Test A20 2 This test checks the following items on the A20 sweep ADC board pulse generator trigger gener
269. e piece bottom and rear cover of the new display and discard 11 Remove the display power cable assembly shipped with the new display unit 12 Install the display power cable assembly item 3 used in the 85101C to the new display unit 13 To install a new display unit reverse the preceding steps When replacing the four screws in step 4 first hand tighten them then torque to 237 N cm 21 in Ib Torque all other screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Figure 6 2 CRT Replacement 11 places i o o o O O Q O 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 11 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A9 Rear Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver NOTE Old CRT chassis uses T 10 screwdriver New LCD chassis uses a combination of T 10 and T 15 screwdrivers Procedure To Disassemble The items shown in parenthesis refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 3 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove the top and bottom covers 2 Remove seven screws two from the top edge of the frame and two from the bottom edge of the frame item 1 and three from the middle of the rear panel of the instrument item 2 3 Slide the rear panel partway out to access the ribbon cable connections to the motherboard 4 Remove the ribbon cables from the motherboard and slide the rear panel out To Reassemble 5 Reverse the precedi
270. e routines are constantly checking power levels phase relationships frequency changes operator commands and so forth A message is displayed on the LCD CRT whenever the CPU detects a fault In other words running error messages inform you of any detected faults while the system is running When an error is detected and a running error message is displayed the system will usually continue running making measurements At this time the system has already passed the power on self test diagnostics Therefore it is unlikely that a running error message indicates a problem in the 85101C display processor unless the CPU has failed Whenever you get an error message be sure it is a consistent and repeatable error Press the ENTRY OFF key to remove the message from the display and then press the MEASUREMENT RESTART key to take another sweep Many times an error message like PHASELOCK LOST is only an intermittent loss of phase lock that can be corrected on the next sweep If the message is gone then there is no real problem However if the error message repeats find that message in this section and note the possible causes and troubleshooting suggestions Different Types of Running Error Messages The four types of 8510C error messages are Cautions Prompts Tells Errors These four types are described below Only those error messages which are related to service and repair are documented in this section Refer to the Keyword Dicti
271. ease the entry key Press to enter the test menu Unless you entered the menu with the SYSTEM key test 14 binary 8 4 2 should be indicated on the front panel LEDs of the display processor If a fault occurred before test 14 the self test sequence has stopped and the LEDs indicate the test that failed Press MARKER to enter the test menu How to Run a Single Self Test Repeatedly NOTE This mode in not recommended for field use It is typically used at the factory Use this repeating mode with external test equipment to trace waveforms and signals through circuits in question and detect intermittent failures Note that if an error is found the front panel LEDs do not clear until you rerun the entire self test sequence even if the fault has cleared Access the test menu and enter the number of the self test with the entry keys Then press gt MARKER test repeats continuously unless a processor error halts it To exit the loop press any entry key 4 46 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures How to Run the Self Test Sequence Once Press the recessed TEST button to run the self test sequence once Alternatively access the test menu and enter number 17 rerun self test with the entry keys Then press MARKER How to Run the Self Test Sequence Repeatedly Access the test menu and enter number 18 repeat test loop with the entry keys Then press Test 18 runs the entire
272. ecifications database 5 Test Set Ports RF Input Connectors Reference Channel Power Characteristics for the test set ports RF input connectors and maximum and minimum reference channel power are defined in the test set manuals 45 MHz Calibration and Verification If the verification kit data disc has 45 MHz data always use the fixed load for the loads portion of the 45 MHz calibration and always select the lowband load from the menu 800 dB or 180 Degree Values The program will not display a magnitude value less than 800 dB or a phase value greater than 180 degrees covers the full Smith chart Therefore whenever these values appear it is likely that even greater values were calculated For example if a magnitude error is a negative number that is less than 800 dB for example 4 000 dB or minus infinity it will appear as 800 dB 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 89 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Aborting Plots and Printouts with the ABORT Key You can press this softkey whenever you want to stop plotting or printing a program selection Use this key instead of turning off the peripheral or pressing the controller STOP or PAUSE key Some printers and plotters will continue after ABORT is pressed because data is held in an internal buffer NOTE If incorrect characters or traces appear the printout turn OFF the printer en
273. ection accuracy as a function of level for signals or arbitrary phase Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded Time and date the plot was made For reflection plots 811 or 522 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 or 12 S11 and S22 0 linear and 21 S12 DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm the DUT length for the data sheet values is O cm System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Power level the specifications apply to dB Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band dB Phase uncertainty data for each frequency band degrees 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Measurement Uncertainties Overview In any measurement certain measurement errors associated with the system add uncertainty to the measured results This uncertainty defines how accurately a device under test DUT can be measured Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into two types raw and residual The raw error terms are the errors associated with the uncorrected system that are called systematic repeatable random non repeatable and drift errors The residual error terms are the errors that remain after a measurement calibration The error correction p
274. ed service personnel WARNING Adjustments in this chapter are done with power supplied to the instrument and protective covers removed There are voltages at many points in the instrument that can if contacted cause personal injury Adjustments should be done only by trained service personnel WARNING Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board in the 85101C or 85102 remove the power cord from the rear panel WARNING Capacitors inside the instrument may still contain a charge even if the instrument is disconnected from its source of supply Use a non metallic adjustment tool whenever possible Equipment Required Table 7 4 lists the equipment required for the adjustment procedures All recommended equipment refers to Agilent model or part numbers unless otherwise indicated If the test equipment recommended is not available other equipment may be used if the performance meets the critical specifications listed in the table The test setup used for an adjustment procedure is shown on the display Adjustment Tools For safety reasons Agilent recommends that a non metallic tuning tool is used for all adjustment procedures Never try to force any adjustment control in the instrument This is especially critical when tuning variable slug tuned inductors and variable capacitors NOTE Many adjustment procedures require the use of various miscellaneous tools and accessories Adjustment procedures reference the tools and
275. eflection plots 11 or S22 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 or 12 11 and S22 0 linear and S21 12 DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm airline the DUT length for the data sheet values is 0 cm System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Reflection coefficient linear magnitude Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band linear magnitude Phase uncertainty data for each frequency band degrees 4 811 Uncertainty Specifications Table 8 66 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 11 11 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Plots S11 MAGNITUDE DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS HPBSIBC HP851 R HP83651R HPBS SEA SL HPB5133F 1 Nov 1888 12 59 82 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 48 40 to 50 DUT Length 18 8 521 800 512 800 522 Sit Dynamic Accuracy Lin 511 Reflection Coefficient S11 PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS 510 HP8S17A HPB3651R HP8S0SGR SL HP85133F 17 Nov 19998 13 33 34 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 48 S11 Dynamic Accuracy Deg 48 to 50 iL J Tai az si em 5125 511 Reflection Coefficient 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 67 Performance Verification and Specifications In
276. el PHASE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS 510 HP8517R HP83651R 5 5 SL HPBS133F 100 17 Nov 19930 sa 13 27107 GH 26 req z 045 to 2 18 PIS ME UTERE 2 to 20 5 28 ta 40 te SB _ 1 DUT Length 45 19 8 Slle 0 0 2 512 521 S22 8 8 Sel Measurement Level dB from Ref 8 69 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 14 21 Uncertainty Specifications Table NI Z 21 UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS Os NOTES Oo00 oun ON 2 8 70 Networt oz est Set Source Calibration Kit Calibcation Technique Test Port Cables ssessssssss Measurement parameter S21 Uncertainty limits upper or lower the limits only apply to transmission measurements Type of plot worst case uncertainties This is a field bottoms up uncertainty analysis of the HP 8510 being verified using the worst case specifications of the HP 8510 system Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded Time and date the plot was made For reflection plots 511 22 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 or 812 11 and S22 0 linear and S21 S12 DUT length is assumed to be 10 c
277. elow Using the error term table editor Saving edited error term values Recalling a custom error term table file 8 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Performing System Verification Using the Error Term Table Editor To display an error term table for editing select Edit Specs in the Main menu Refer to the Error Model flowgraphs at the end of this chapter Find the error term of interest on the figure The figure can help you determine the relative physical location of the error term in your system configuration Refer to the steps below to edit the values oF ce ox Locate the error term in the displayed table that represents the error term of the hardware change Use the mouse arrow keys or TAB key to position the cursor at the term that needs to be edited Use the number keys to enter the values Continue editing error terms until your system or device is defined Press Done when you have finished editing error terms At the prompt Re compute effective terms from raw terms respond with Yes The function of the Edit Specs menu keys are described below Undo Term Undo All Reset Term Save Eterms Recall Eterms Done Prior Menu 8510C On Site Service Manual Use this key to restore all values of the currently highlighted error term to the value listed just prior to your most recent change If you have changed an error ter
278. em uncertainty equations is obtained from the following error model Example plots of generated dynamic accuracy curves are located earlier in this chapter Figure 8 18 ss437c Dynamic Accuracy Error Model Flowgraph b1 Path 1 Lxb1 1 Geb1 1 4 1 Mpb1 Geb1 IF autorange gain error Pccb1 compression error Mpb1 error of magnitude versus phase shift Lbx1 crystal filter linearity error Rebli Reblc IF residuals signal error Ldvib1 Lfvib1 Loss of converter Where all the terms are expressed in linear format Dynamic Accuracy which is used the corrected error model flow graph to determine measurement uncertainty 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 85 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Measurement Traceability To establish a measurement traceability path to a national standard for a network analyzer system the overall system performance is verified through the measurement of device characteristics that have a traceability path This is accomplished by electrically measuring devices in an Agilent verification kit Refer to How to Verify System Performance for the system performance verification procedure The measurement of the verification kit device characteristics has a traceable path because the factory system that characterizes the devices is calibrated and verified by measuring standards that have a traceable path to the National Institute of Standards Techno
279. ement Uncertainties Table 8 13 Test Port Error Term Symbols Error Term Eterm Symbol Additional Information Drift Source Frequency Dsf Typical Raw Directivity Rfd Rrd Factory Raw Reflection Tracking Rfr Typical Raw Source Match Rfs Rrs Factory Raw Crosstalk Rfc Factory Raw Transmission Tracking Rft Rrt Typical Raw Load Match Factory Low Freq Cutoff Source of port to 1 27 51 Fes2 Fac Comp Low Freq Slope Source of port to 1 27 Fss1 Fss2 Fac Comp Loss dc Source to port to 1 21 Fes1 Fes2 Typical Loss sqr F GHz Source to port to 1 27 Fss1 Fss2 Typical Drift Mag deg c Src to port to 1 27 Dms1 Dms2 Fac Char Drift Ph deg c Src to port to 1 21 Dps1 Dps2 Fac Char Drift Ph deg c F GHz Src to port to 1 21 Dpfs1 Dpsf2 Fac Char Connector Repeat Refl port 1 2 Crr1 Crr2 Fac Char Connector Repeat Trans port 1 2 Crt1 Crt2 Fac Char Loss dc port 1 2 Cablet Ld1c Ld2c Cust Site Loss sqr F GHz port 1 2 Cablet Lf2c Cust Site Cable Refl Mag stab port 1 2 Crm1 Crm2 Fac Char Cable Trans Mag stab port 1 2 Ctm1 Ctm2 Fac Char Cable Ph F GHz stab port 1 2 Cpf1 Cpf2 Fac Char Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty TUsed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 83 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Table 8 14 Channel Er
280. ent 2 After completing hardware configuration and model selection press Done to save the information 3 From the Main menu display select Edit Specs By selecting EDIT SYST SPECS from the Main menu you can modify error terms for your hardware configuration You can use the modified data to compute custom uncertainties to use during performance verification Refer to Using the Error Term Table Editor on page 8 19 to learn how to edit specifications Using Customizing Features In addition to the ability to edit error terms and compute custom specifications you can save recall and label your customized information Using Markers on Uncertainty Plots Markers automatically turn on when the uncertainty plot is displayed The marker appears on the plot as a vertical dashed line To display the plot and use the marker function refer to the steps below 1 From the Main menu press Syst Uncert 2 From the plot options choose the desired selections 3 Press Done to display the graph 4 To move the marker use the left or right arrow keys NOTE You can control the position of the marker with the mouse however it is not recommended The mouse s sensitivity may make it too awkward to use 5 Read the marker values along the bottom row of the display The readings include the X axis value and marker readouts for each frequency range 6 Use the Marker ON OFF key to turn markers on or off 7 Usethe Mkr Sens k
281. ent uncertainty and compare it to the factory uncertainty for each frequency measurement of each verification device The comparison calculation can be done by following the steps below 1 Extract a factory measurement uncertainty value from the verification device data contained in the verification kit or make a printout using the software 2 Subtract the value in step 1 from the total measurement uncertainty value on the performance verification printout The example below shows where the equation values are located on the device data sheet and the verification printout The example also shows how the equations can be arranged to make a table A blank table is provided for you to write the comparison equations for your system HEWLETT PACKARD DEVICE CHARACTERIZATION DATA SHEET FOR 8510 HPGGIOC PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 13 52 25 18 1991 Date 3 Jul 1990 Kit 85057 Serial 2803800356 J J U Item 20 dB ATTENUATOR 05057 60010 Serial 00649 Ser 543 Origins 3 90 Mabient conditions 23 deg C Uncertainties for Factory Test System Ser 9 72803800356 rigin 3 90 PORT IDENTIFICATION With the device label facing the user 2 n I ns Q l nra mare he nennen Port 1 A is on the left and Port 2 B on the right Netuork Analyzer PBS S N 503100614 2844880410 Pee a ete
282. ept frequency accuracy test 3 Total system uncertainty test a The program sets the frequency range of the 8510 system to the corresponding frequency of the traceable verification devices The program prompts you to perform a full 2 port measurement calibration You measure the verification devices The program compares the measured data with the traceable data and uncertainty limits supplied with the verification devices and generates pass fail results 4 Defining a custom system in the software The first menu that appears in version A 03 01 software is the Hardware Configuration menu From this menu choose the model numbers of the hardware you are using If you plan to make measurements with a custom test setup choose model numbers from this menu that most closely matches the capability of the equipment you are using To calibrate a custom system new features in the software allow you to modify error term parameters You can store the error term changes in tables compute customized specifications from the new error terms then use the tables for plots and system verification If you plan to use hardware configuration values listed in the Hardware Configuration menu already follow the No path in the flowchart Figure 8 1 To create unique specifications for a custom system follow the Yes path in Figure 8 1 NOTE LIMITATION OF WARRANTY Agilent Technologies does not warrant the performance of systems that are c
283. equency Agilent 33250A A Dual Power Supply Dual 0 to 15 Vde Agilent E3631A A Spectrum Analyzer 100 kHz to 26 5 GHz Agilent E4407B A GPIB Controllable Degausser CRT only 200W input Radio Shack 44 233 A A Adjustments P Performance Verification T Troubleshooting Other calibration kits verification kits and cables may be required depending upon the system configuration 8510C On Site Service Manual 1 7 Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization 1 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Safety Licensing 2 1 Safety Licensing 8510 Safety Information SAFETY SYMBOLS This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation This product has been designed and tested in accordance with the standards listed on the Manufacturer s Declaration of Conformity and has been supplied in a safe condition The documentation contains information and warnings that must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition Instruction manual symbol the product will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual refer to Table of Contents Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates earth ground terminal The WARNING sign denotes a hazard It call attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could resul
284. er than 4 inches 10 cm from the face of the CRT Generally degaussing is done with a slow rotary motion of the degausser moving it in a circle of increasing radius while simultaneously moving away form the CRT Figure 7 2 shows the motion for degaussing the display CAUTION Applying an excessively strong magnetic field to the CRT face can permanently destroy the CRT Like most displays the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic fields generated from unshielded motors In countries that use 50 Hz some 10 Hz jitter may be observed If this problem is observed remove the device causing the magnetic field Figure 7 2 Motion for Degaussing the Display SIDE VIEW DEGAUSSER 4 zu 10cm BULK TAPE ERASER OR CRT DEMAGNITIZER 7 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 3 CRT Display Intensity Adjustments Procedure 3 CRT Display Intensity Adjustments Equipment photometer Tektronix J16 Option 2 photometer probe Tektronix J6503 Option 2 light occluder Tektronix 016 0305 00 Description and Procedure There are two display intensity adjustments background black and operating default In general these adjustments should not be required Yet when either the 5 CPU A4GSP A6 EEPROM or A11 display assembly is replaced do a visual inspection of the display If it appears to need adjustment proceed with these adjustments NOTE This procedure should be done with a photometer and only by qualified service perso
285. erences to GPIB and refer to the same protocol NOTE Always turn off power to instruments when connecting GPIB cables As many as fifteen instruments can be connected in parallel on GPIB but proper voltage levels and timing relationships must be maintained Observe the following limitations e 2 meters 6 feet is the maximum cable length to each instrument e 20 meters 65 feet is the maximum total cable length between all units The following GPIB cables are available 10833 4 13 feet 10833B 2 m 6 feet 10833A 1 m 3 feet 10833D 0 5 m 1 5 feet Serial Printer Setup 1 See Figure 9 9 Connect the desired 8510C serial input to the laser printer serial input and turn on the laser printer 2 Use the laser printer controls to select the serial bus and select a BAUD rate of 9 600 Refer to the laser printer user s guide for instructions These settings will remain in effect even if you turn the laser printer OFF For further information about printer setup including parity stop bit and so forth refer to the following information Address of Printer RS 232 Port 1 in the 8510C Keyword Dictionary and Copy in the 8510C Operating and Programming Manual 9 18 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Making System Connections Figure 9 9 Laser Printer Connections HP 8510 SYSTEM BUS MICROPRINT 4SCH Seriol Porallel Input Port Input Port RS 232 CABLE CENTRONICS CABLE HP P N 24
286. erm 5 For switch isolation The crosstalk term 6 Whatis the raw directivity at 26 5 GHz The value should be about 27 dB How does this value compare with the data sheet The raw directivity at 26 5 GHz on the data sheet is 27 value dB 7 Whatis the difference between system and Notice that in the first table Residual Errors Correction receiver dynamic range On there are two values for effective dynamic range One refers to the system dynamic range while the other refers to the receiver dynamic range These terms are defined below a System dynamic range ref P b Receiver dynamic range P max P min _ Pret is the nominal or reference power at the test port Pin 5 the minimum power that can be measured above the noise floor Is the maximum power that can be applied to port 2 before 0 1 dB compression 8 28 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Table 8 3 Computing Uncertainty Curves Exercise 2 Answers Questions Answers 1 On the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve at 26 5 GHz what is the estimated effective directivity How does the estimated value compare with the data sheet value The value is 0 004 linear which is equivalent to 48 dB To estimate the effective directivity look for the uncertainty when 511 0 a perfect load 48 dB is close to the data sheet value of 50 dB 2 Onthe 521 magnitude un
287. errors or a degradation of cal standards and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting A long term trend usually reflects drift connector or cable wear or gradual degradation of calibration devices indicating the need for further investigation and preventive maintenance Note that the system may still conform to specifications The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors and cal standards or inspecting cables Troubleshooting If a subtle failure or minor performance problem is suspected the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously with the same system and calibration kit This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem Consider the following while troubleshooting These procedures are especially good for determining if a calibration is bad or the test set is faulty v All parts of the network analyzer system including cables and calibration devices can contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms v Connectors must be clean gaged and within specification for error term analysis to be meaningful v Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement calibration to minimize cable instability errors V Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration The connector interface must be repeatable Refer to information in the test set manual and cal kit manuals for information on connection 4 128 85
288. ertainty and Dynamic Accuracy Limits Upper or 8 102 Penmorinanke Test RECM Lus iua ds cased cn au adie baia d 8 103 9 System Installation DUBIVIBA RES 9 2 oh DE dudo wade AoA barks mirika hp RNG ena 9 3 cei be s hadas ba Mx b de eden de RE bra 9 3 System Heating and ODE 9 4 SGS ODIO IBRD PU ceded sues 9 5 BERE odo baba ode bc Randall EX ca Cod ws AU 9 5 Electromagnetic Intel fel elici RENE 9 6 Non Agilent System Cabinet Requirements 9 6 Inirido PDT n uu u u u s OUT 9 6 Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System 9 6 Checking the Shiprieht sce serre ort bre peri er unb ER ERR 9 6 Bop kl Loa aom E pao bb eius pads 9 6 Unpacking the System Cabinet u ul uuu us d bbb bene E LEE bas dias pb ea 9 8 Hep B coin d bain eed ede Rd b di re i b dene lade
289. es of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 or 12 11 and S22 0 linear and 21 12 DUT length is assumed to be 10 the DUT length for the data sheet values is 0 cm System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Reflection coeffecient linear magnitude Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band linear magnitude Phase data for each frequency band degrees 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 13 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts 21 Uncertainty Specifications Plots S21 MAGNITUDE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS HP8510C HPB51 R HP83651R HPBS S6A SL 51 17 Nov 1990 12 14 03 Freq GHz 845 to 2 DUT Length 19 8 cm 511 512 522 9 0 521 591 Worst Case Uncertainty dB 521 Measurement Level dB from Ref S21 MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS HP8518C HPB51 R 8 65 HPB5856R SL HP85133F 1 Nov 1990 12 45 57 gt t Freq GHz 8 045 2 5 2 to 28 5 28 to 40 48 to 50 2 SSS sk c rYb T TFj 9 9 DUT Length 18 8 cm amp 511 0 0 512 521 S22 n 521 Worst Case Uncertainty Deg 8510C On Site Service Manual S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref S
290. ess Measure Data 17 If the measurement calibration sets and corresponding analyzer registers that appear on the display are not correct return to the system calibration menu by pressing Prior Menu Prior Menu If the measurement calibration sets are valid connect the verification device between the test port cables and press Resume 18 After the measurement is complete view the results of each parameter measurement Press 11 S12 S21 522 19 Press Print AII to create a hardcopy of the verification results 20 If the system passes all the parameter measurements of the device press Select Standard to select another verification device measurement If the system does not pass all the parameter measurements refer to If the System Fails Performance Verification later in this chapter 21 Use the cursor keys and the Next and Previous softkeys to select another verification standard and to change the device serial number Press Done Resume 22 Repeat steps 16 through 21 until all the devices in the verification kit are measured The system performance verification is complete Refer to Examples 8 3 and 8 4 to interpret the printout of your measurement results 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 49 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the Performance Verification Devices You can determine your system measurem
291. essages allow the system to keep running Until cleared the messages remain on display even if the problem has ended Four main assemblies constitute the phase lock system Pretune assembly in the IF detector VTO summing amp assembly in the test set IF counter assembly in the IF detector Main phase lock assembly in the IF detector Additionally the display processor memory and processor assemblies are involved in controlling and monitoring the phase lock system The IF detector IF mixer assemblies are part of the main phase locked loop but they are less important in determining loop operation The 8510 uses two separate phase locked loops a pretune phase locked loop and a main phase locked loop The pretune phase locked loop is a narrow bandwidth synthesized high accuracy loop The main phase locked loop locks to 20 MHz and has enough bandwidth to track the fast sweeping ramp Pretune Phase Lock Sequence A pretune phase lock sequence precedes the beginning of every sweep and each band crossing Its main purpose is to generate an LO frequency about 20 MHz higher than the RF To do this the processor computes the start frequency and all other necessary programming information That information includes digital information for a DAC which drives the VTO the appropriate harmonic number of the VTO and a divide by N number 3 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation Figure 3
292. essor instruments see Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Forward Transmission Test Signal Path in 8510 Base System DIGITAL TEST SET IF DETECTOR DISPLAY PROCESSOR The source produces RF signals that allow the network analyzer to examine DUTs devices under test with a signal applied The test set splits the source signal into a reference signal and a test signal The test signal is transmitted through or reflected from the DUT and goes to the receiver for comparison to the reference signal In Figure 3 1 only the transmitted signal path is shown In the 8510 system the test set also down converts the source frequency RF to an IF of 20 MHz The IF detector down converts the 20 MHz IF signals from the test set to 100 kHz and then detects processes and digitizes them The display processor compares the transmitted or reflected signal to the reference signal It performs all of the math operations on the digitized signals and displays them The display processor also coordinates the actions of the system instruments It is the system controller 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 3 Theory of Operation Sources Sources The system source provides an RF stimulus over the desired frequency range and power level as set by the 8510 Most sources cover their full frequency range in several bands because the individual oscillators are limited in frequency range Low frequency and higher frequency oscillators are used alone and mixed to produce the e
293. et Metal sa67d 6 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Procedure To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the LCD assembly Refer to A15 LCD Assembly Replacement 3 4 Tilt the sheet metal LCD retainer up before sliding tabs and free Remove the two nuts behind the softkeys that secure the sheet metal LCD retainer NOTE To avoid dust or dirt particles from getting in between the display glass and the LCD do not completely separate the display from the bezel Helpful Hints When replacing the backlight lamp remove the two screws holding the lamp in place on the LCD Tilt the LCD in the bezel just enough to allow the lamp to be replaced If the inverter is replaced be sure the plastic cover is held securely in place by one of the mounting screws If the LCD is to be replaced the complete LCD assembly should be replaced To Reassemble 5 Reverse the order of the disassembly procedure 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 19 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures This page intentionally left blank 6 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations This product contains static sensitive components When handling these components or assemblies work on an anti static surf
294. eviation Prefix Multiple T tera 1012 da deka 10 n nano 10 6 giga 10 d deci 19 p pico 10 12 M mega 106 centi 103 f femto 10 15 k kilo 103 m milli 103 a atto 10 18 u micro 10 9 Manufacturer s Code List Mfr No Manufacturer Name Address Zp Code 00000 Any satisfactory supplier 00853 Sangamo Elec Co S Carolina Div Pickens SC 29671 01295 Texas Instr Inc Semicon Cmpnt Div Dallas TX 75222 24355 Analog Devices Inc Norwood MA 02062 28480 Agilent Co Corporate Hg Palo Alto CA 94304 56289 Sprague Electric Co North Adams MA 01247 75402 Trw Inc Philadelphia Philadelphia PA 19108 91673 Dale Electronics Columbus NE 68601 5 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Software Documentation and Accessories Replaceable Parts Software Documentation and Accessories Table 5 3 Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Number Code Number Software 85101 80116 1 Operating System Firmware for LCD or CRT displays set of 28480 85101 80116 two disks 08510 10033 1 Test Set Specifications and Performance Tests Disk Note 28480 08510 10033 These tests are used for all test sets except the 8511A B 08510 10024 1 85102 and Test Sets Adjustment Software 28480 08510 10024 08510 10034 1 Master Calibration Disk 28480 08510 10034 85103 10002 1 Software Toolkit Disk 28480 85103 10002 Documentation 08510 90275 1 8510C Operating and Service Manual Set 28480 08510 90275 Includes the following separately avail
295. ey to change the marker sensitivity You can choose a marker sensitivity of 1 3 or 10 The setting determines the distance the marker moves on the graticule each time you press the left or right arrow key Choosing User Generated Error Terms To select edited error terms for generating system specifications tables refer to the steps below 1 Press System Specs in the Main menu 2 Choose User Parameters for Table Type 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 15 Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance 3 4 Use the softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed Press Done to display the specifications table Generating Customized System Uncertainty Plots To select edited error terms for generating system uncertainty data refer to the steps below 1 gt Press System Uncert in the Main menu For Compute Using select User Parameters Use the softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed Press Done to display uncertainty plots Using User Generated Specifications in System Verification You can choose user generated specifications for system verification Refer to the steps below 1 T Press Verify System in the Main menu Press Select Standard Move the cursor to Verify Using and select User Parameters Use the softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed Press Done to begin system verification
296. f parts 5 4 detector adjustment synchronous 7 25 diagnose a failure 4 61 diagnostics running error messages as 4 69 disassembly tools required 6 3 disc command 19 load program disc 4 65 20 record program disc 4 66 21 initialize disc 4 66 disc communication error 4 74 disc hardware problem 4 74 disc read or write error 4 74 disk drive replacement jumper position 6 7 6 10 procedure 6 10 disk media wearing out replace soon 4 75 display CRT degaussing demagnetizing 10 5 display degaussing demagnetizing 7 12 display CRT replacement 6 10 display LCD replacement 6 16 displaying error term tables 8 19 documentation part numbers 5 6 drift errors 8 4 sources of 8 73 driver files for semi automated adjustments 7 4 DUT length and default S parameter values 8 97 dynamic accuracy 8 22 error model 8 82 limits 8 102 specification plots of 511 8 65 8 71 specification plots of 521 8 69 8 72 specification table of 11 8 68 specification table of 521 8 70 dynamic accuracy error model flowgraph 8 91 dynamic range check 8 40 E editing error terms 8 15 editing for custom calibration kits 8 24 electrical length of devices phase errors due to 8 98 electrical requirements 9 5 electromagnetic radiated interference 9 6 EMC requirements compliance with Canadian 2 6 emissions requirements compliance with German 2 2 6 emulator source 4 22 test set 4 22 entering information into
297. formance of the calibration standard deviates from the actual electrical performance of the standard The calibration kit should be periodically recertified to ensure the actual electrical performance matches the model Refer to the calibration kit manual for information on how to recertify your kit Measurement Process The measurement process includes the measurement of calibration and test devices This process encompasses connector care the amount of flex on test port cables the method of measurement calibration the way you make connections for both the measurement calibration and the DUT measurement and connection repeatability Connection quality is typically a small component of total system measurement error when connections are correctly made However poor connection quality can induce errors that significantly affect the accuracy of the measurement Measurement Errors Measurement errors prevent measured data from being a true representation of the unknown test device In all applications measurement errors can influence the application goals Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into three types systematic errors those which are stable and repeatable random errors those which are random in nature and cannot be characterized and removed and drift errors those associated with temperature humidity pressure or other factors related to 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 3 Performance Verification and Specificat
298. ful in your interpretation of these error messages Remember the message indicates that a problem has been detected on a certain assembly but the message does not always indicate where the actual problem is located Prompt Type Messages Prompts are displayed whenever the CPU wants you to act during the normal running of the instrument These messages do not indicate a failure For example if you have just finished calibrating the system and you do not have enough room to store the calibration the prompt NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL DELETE A CAL SET will be displayed Here the CPU knows that you have previously saved calibrations in all of the available cal sets It is prompting you to delete one or more cal sets so that you can store the one you have just finished Tell Type Messages Tell messages are displayed whenever the CPU is telling you what it is doing or has done This type of message does not indicate a failure or a problem unless the message is unrelated to a key you thought you pressed For example if you want to save the current state of the 8510C for any reason you would press the INSTRUMENT STATE SAVE key on the 85102 The CPU would immediately recognize your command and tell you that it is obeying by displaying the message SAVING INST STATE Error Type Messages These messages are displayed whenever the system cannot continue running because of a programming error Error messages are not related to CAUTION messages For example if
299. g Source Emulator Apply 60 MHz from the 85102 to the test set using the source emulator Follow the procedure in Other Failures For 8360 source use the front panel emulator over the 85102 keys Other Tests for the Source If a source failure is indicated run the source operator s check procedure in the source manual 55423 8510 On Site Service Manual 4 23 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 24 8510C On Site Service Manual 85101C DISPLAY PROCESSOR OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM LCD DISC 34 DISC 3 4 KEYBOARD 134 KEYBOARD
300. g down the A10 preregulator Continue this procedure with Remove Assemblies If the voltages are within tolerance it is likely that the post regulator is good and both the A10 preregulator and A3 post regulator are being loaded down by an assembly connected to it Continue this procedure with Remove Assemblies to isolate the faulty assembly 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 85 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Figure 4 17 A10P1 Plug Detail and Output Voltages FROM A10 PREREGULATOR REGULATOR SOLDER 120090000 2 11000000 1 A10 Preregulator Mnemonic Supply Block Diagram A10P1 Voltages Connected to A3J1 A10P1 Voltages Disconnected from A3J1 merum 92 97 A10P1 Wire 1 sr qes _ r 3 sers o C 9 a m s s o NONE The 5V digital supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at all times or the voltages shown here will be wrong The 5V digital supply voltage connects from preregulator A10 to 8 motherboard connector A8J8 9 10 4 86 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Remove Assemblies Check power supply loading from the assemblies
301. gher drivers and language extensions disks uses approximately 0 6 megabytes of memory 8510 Specification Performance Verification software 08510 10033 Revision A 05 01 DOS and LIF formats Compatible printer or plotter Cables test port cables 2 coax 3 5 mm m to f Adapters 2 4 mm f to 3 5 mm f for 50 GHz system 3 5 mm f to BNC m 53151A Opt 001 10 Hz to 26 5 GHz frequency counter Calibration kit customer supplied Verification kit customer supplied Note It is not required to have the 8510 system connected to the computer controller when generating specifications or measurement uncertainties All that is required is the software and computer controller A printer is required for hardcopy output All of the equipment listed is required for performance verification 8360 source with 1 Hz resolution needed to pass performance verification Wrap around display problem Only 2 0 Mb of memory 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 9 Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications How to Load the Software There are many ways to load BASIC therefore the example below is one common sequence Refer to the manual of your computer for an exact procedure 1 Insert the BASIC disc into the controller disc drive 0 2 Cycle the power of the controller to activate the BASIC start up NOTE You must have 3 megabytes of me
302. gilent 85056A Verification 3 5 mm Agilent 85053B 2 4 mm Agilent 85057B Test Port Cables 3 5 mm Agilent 85131D 2 4 mm Agilent 85133D Computer Controller Laptop or PC running BASIC for Windows various Rev 6 32 greater under Windows 95 98 NT GPIB card for PCs National Instrument or Hewlett Packard card for Laptops National Instruments Workstation Basic 5 0 or higher and 4 Mbytes RAM and HP 9000 Series 200 or 300 3 0 for dual source systems HP Vectra 386 with an 82300C BASIC language processor card UNIX based workstation with Rocky Mountain BASIC RMB Photometer CRT only Tektronix J16 Opt 2 A Photometer Probe Tektronix J6503 Opt 2 A CRT only Light Occluder CRT only Tektronix 016 0305 00 Power Meter 50 MHz to 50 GHz Agilent E4418B Power Sensor 50 MHz to 26 5 GHz 3 5 mm Agilent 8485A 1uW to 100mW 50 MHz to 50 GHz 2 4mm Agilent 8487A 1 uW to 100 mW Digital Multimeter General Purpose DMM Agilent 34401A 32 mV to 300 V ac dc Frequency Counter 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz Agilent 53151A Opt 001 10 dB Attenuator 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz 3 5 mm Agilent 8493C Opt 010 P 45 MHz to 50 GHz 2 4 mm Agilent 8490D Opt 010 P Power Splitter 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz 3 5 mm Agilent 11667B 45 MHz to 50 GHz 2 4mm Agilent 11667C Pulse Generator 35 ns to 1 second pulse period Agilent 81101A A Function Generator 20 MHz 1 Hz waveform fr
303. grade Many improvements New features for millimeter systems B 04 00 8510B 85101 80078 11575C upgrade Requires two ICs Adds many new features including 8516A operation May require 8340 41 to be upgraded using 11875A kit B 05 00 8510B 85101 80081 Adds pulsed RF capability and improved external triggering Included in both the 85111A and 11575D upgrade kits B 05 14 8510B 85101 80111 This release allowed operation of the 83420 lightwave test set software It also fixed anomalies found with dual channel cal TRL cal millimeter system TRL cal and triggering in FASTCW mode Included in both the 85111 A and 11575E upgrades C 06 00 8510C 85101 80098 8510 first release Features include a color and 4 parameter display 3 5 inch disc drive and RS 232 interface 83650 51 50 GHz compatibility B 06 00 8510B See Note 3 C 06 30 8510C 85101 80098 Released for DOS support and color paintjet support B 06 30 8510B 85101 80102 Released for 8510B support of 50 GHz 83650 51 8517 and quickstep C 06 50 8510C 85101 80113 11595G Rev C 06 00 C 06 50 to C 06 54 minor bug fixes B 06 50 8510B 85101 80109 11575F Rev B 03 00 B 05 14 to B 06 54 minor bug fixes C 06 54 8510C 85101 80113 11575G Rev C 06 00 C 06 50 to C 06 54 B 06 54 8510B 85101 80109 11575F Rev B 03 00 B 05 14 to B 06 54 C 06 58 8510C 85101 80132 Bug fix 8510 firmware problem with writing year 2000 and higher DOS file dates C 06 60 8510C 85101 80132 Bug fix 8510 firmware p
304. gram Menu LCD 4 149 8510C Service Program Menu LCD 4 150 CPU UM 5 apt Sharh abe nae Siu eee 4 151 DT mm 4 151 Calan Nissen ia iore Sx dtr EEREF REA MR ERA ERR wa CPU kuski 4 152 Ert r Terme Inspection 5 2 2 253 5 b Ee 4 152 BOITE aL eds Molan ee eee meee Ed exa iac ene err S 4 152 dio MP 4 152 Eri ua eds Ros AMOR Mc eee xod ib leta 4 154 Divectivity Edf and Edi as scented ie aed AEG TERRE 4 154 Match Bet and setae 4 154 Reflection Tracking EFT and cresgi uei ea odor e ob TREES 4 154 Isolation Grasstalk EX and 2 4 155 Logd Match EN atit Lusso donee ERR REPE IS PP ER ERE ES 4 155 Transemissinn Tracking Ef SEN Mii eR EXER 4 155 QD E 4 155 5 Replaceable Parts Software Documentation and
305. hancement selection in the software configuration menu Adapters Test Port When you use adapters on a test set the program will calculate and include the adapter errors The program compares the test set port connector type to the calibration kit and determines if an adapter is required for that configuration Attention Messages and SCPP Settings When the program exercises the 8510 to determine if it and its peripherals are correctly addressed and responding it will display a message if there is a problem This message will tell you to check the GPIB address Check the software configuration menu addresses so that they correspond to the address switches set on the peripherals SCPP is an BASIC abbreviation for select code primary address It is possible to have an 8510 address anywhere from 716 through 3130 depending upon your system address configuration BASIC 5 0 and HP UX Systems setting the time on your system If you are using BASIC 5 0 that is running from a hard disc shared with an HP UX system you may find that the time displayed by the program is incorrect because BASIC requires explicit information to set the correct time Do not use the program to change the system clock Instead use the TIMEZONE IS command to set the correct time and re run the program Refer to the BASIC Language Reference manual Calculated Error Terms Some of the error terms that appear in the specifications are calculated by the program They
306. hat s Wrong First consider four questions before any other troubleshooting is attempted These questions quickly focus the direction troubleshooting should take The questions are Are there any self test failures Are there any running error messages Is there an unratioed power failure 15 there any other obvious failure type Before you continue with the individual troubleshooting for each of these problems go to the Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 These checks can quickly correct up to 70 of failures Self Test Failures The network analyzer performs a series of self tests each time it is powered up If the analyzer passes all the tests it loads and runs the operating system program A self test failure is indicated on the display by one of the 14 self test messages listed at the right side of the 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram If one of these messages appears go to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then if necessary to Self Test Failures on page 4 39 4 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart WHAT S WRONG Consider these questions before troubleshooting 1 Are there any self test failures running error messages beeping raw channel unratioed power problems 2 Is there an obvious failure If
307. he A15 LCD The A14 assembly receives the 5 V power from the motherboard that is used for processing and supplying power to the LCD 3 3 V and backlight inverter 5 V LCD Assembly A15 is an 8 4 inch liquid crystal display LCD with associated drive circuitry It receives a 3 3 V power supply from the A14 graphics processor The display receives the following signals from the A14 digital horizontal sync digital vertical sync digital blanking data clock digital red video digital green video digital blue video The A15 LCD display includes the backlight lamp and inverter The lamp attaches to the LCD display frame but is electrically separate The backlight is powered by a separate connection to the attached backlight inverter A16 which is also electrically separate Backlight Inverter A16 is a part of the A15 LCD assembly It receives a 5 V power supply and control signals from the A14 graphics processor The control signals include backlight intensity It outputs a high voltage used to drive the backlight lamp Input Output Assemblies Disc Drive Assembly A2 is a 1 44 Mbyte double sided disc drive It can use standard or high density 3 5 inch disks 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 11 Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor 1 0 Assembly A7 is the main interface for the system The main processor data address and control buses are routed throughout the 85101 via the motherboard and this
308. he corresponding printouts Use the 8510 marker to read the trace values If the trace values are close to or better than the specified values this is a normal situation If the trace value is significantly worse than the specified value first suspect the calibration Recalibrate and display the E terms again If this does not solve the problem the fault is in the cables or calibration devices the test set or the source Try substituting cables and calibration devices If the problem still exists after another recalibration refer to the section Unratioed Power Failures on page 4 73 NOTE If you cannot solve the problem save the results of this entire procedure and contact an Agilent customer engineer 4 130 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Error Terms Error Term Descriptions The following paragraphs describe the individual error terms the devices used to characterize them measurement calibration the measurements they affect and explain how they relate to faults in the system Directivity Edf and Edr These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity errors of the system mainly of the test set These terms vary with frequency but values that are worse than the specifications may indicate an error or mechanical malfunction in the test set or in the devices used for the reflection calibration The calibration device used to characterize the directivity error term is usually a lo
309. he main menu The examples that follow are explanations of typical tables and plots generated by this program 8 58 8510C On Site Service Manual Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example printouts are used to explain the various information included Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph Example 8 3 Residual Errors System Specifications Residual Errors Correction ON NOTES 1 NOGA N NA T Netuork Analyzer Calibration Kit Calibration Technique Test Port Cables Description Of Error Tera Power of Source dBm Power Slope of Source Freq ghz dB AVeraGing factor Loss of Attenuator dB Lose of Attenuator 2 dB Cable Flex Factor Lin Drift in Room Temperature ideg C Effective Fwd Directivity dB Effective Fud Refl tracking dB Effective Fud Source match dB Effective Fwd Crosstalk dB Effective Fwd Trans tracking dB Effective Fud Load match dB Effective Fwd Noise on Trace dB Effective Fud Noise Floor dB Effective Power Ref out port dBm Effective Power maX in port2 dBm Effective Power miN port2 dBm Effective Dyn Rng Ref min pt2 dB Dyn Rng pt2 08 tEtera 851 Enhanced Model Test Set HPB51
310. he performance is specified at an ambient temperature of 23 C 3 Therefore the environmental temperature must remain in the range of 20 C to 26 C Once the measurement calibration has been done the ambient temperature must be held to 1 C 2 Open the calibration and verification kits and place all the devices on top of the foam so they will reach room temperature NOTE Temperature of the device is important because device dimensions electrical characteristics change with temperature 3 Switch on the power to the system instruments Switch on the controller last and the 85101 next to last To achieve the maximum system stability allow the system instruments to warm up for at least 1 hour before measurement calibration User Parameters Check Unratioed Power Refer to the Unratioed Power Failures section in Chapter 4 for a procedure to check that the system RF power level is correct NOTE Check the user parameters with the source at different power levels and in the ramp and step modes 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 35 Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Inspect Clean and Gage Connectors CAUTION SMA connectors can easily damage the verification devices Always use adapters when verifying a system with SMA connectors 1 Visually inspect all the connectors for any burrs gold flakes or places where the gold is worn 2 Clean all the connectors with alcohol and foam tip
311. he source emulator and test set emulator are used to verify operation of the other instruments in the system by substituting these service tools for the individual instruments they emulate 8510C On Site Service Manual 1 5 Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Table of Service Equipment Table 1 1 lists the equipment required to verify adjust and troubleshoot the network analyzer The table also notes the use and critical specifications of each item and the recommended models In addition to the test equipment listed in the table the following tools are also required 1 and 2 Pozidrive screwdrivers Flat blade screwdrivers small medium and large 5 16 inch open end wrench for SMA connector nuts 3 16 inch and 5 16 inch hex nut drivers e Non conductive and non ferrous adjustment tool e Needle nose pliers Tweezers Anti static work mat with wrist strap e 710 and T15 TORX drivers Miscellaneous cables adapters and other equipment as listed in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts 1 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Table 1 1 Service Test Equipment Instrument Required Critical Specifications Recommended Model Use Oscilloscope 100 MHz Dual Channel Agilent 54622D Oscilloscope Probes 10 1 Divider Agilent 10074C AT 1000 1 Divider High Voltage N2771A Calibration Kit 3 5 mm Agilent 85052B 2 4 mm A
312. he system attempts to lock one more time during the sweep Lock may be recovered or not If lock is not recovered the loop stays unlocked until the next bandcrossing In any case the error message is displayed Phase lock problems of this nature may be caused by the main phase lock board A23 or a power hole in the reference channel Monitoring the VTO If the VTO is driven near the end of its tested range but maintains lock the processor displays this error 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 19 Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation message OVER RANGE In essence the system especially the VTO is operating near its limits The system is still functioning properly but it may become unreliable Often this condition indicates the source should be calibrated to the 8510 through its trim sweep adjustment refer to the 8510 Operating and Programming Manual Phase Lock Learn Mode This mode enables the system especially a sweeper based system to sweep quickly and accurately after the first sweep In this context the first sweep means the first sweep at a new start or stop frequency or new sweep speed The first sweep takes longer than subsequent sweeps for two reasons 1 Prior to the first sweep the processor determines band crossing frequencies based on default or calculated values This determination takes some time 2 Atthe end of the first sweep the processor recalculates the band crossing frequencies based on
313. hen select Verify Using User Parameters 8 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Using the Software A Tutorial The tutorial chapter is intended to help you get comfortable using features of the software The features allow you to create your own equipment specifications for a calibration test setup Additional marker features simplify determining the results of these customized setups Answers to the questions are provided in tables at the end Selecting the hardware for 8510SX system Examining error term tables exercise 1 Computing uncertainty curves exercise 2 Editing specifications exercise 3 Answers to tutorial questions Selecting the Hardware for an 8510SX System After loading the software as directed in the section following the flowchart Figure 8 1 the first selection menu that appears is the Hardware Configuration menu For this tutorial select the following equipment 8510C network analyzer 8515A test set 83631A synthesized source 85052C 3 5 mm TRL cal kit choose TRL calibration 85131F 3 5 mm test port cable set 85053B 3 5 mm verification kit SS GN GS Examining Error Term Tables Exercise 1 Select System Specs from the Main menu Review the following descriptions to learn more about a few of the menu selections Output Table You can look at the residual errors with correction on the test port errors with co
314. her than those in this manual can be done in the field this includes both customers and service centers Any other adjustments to the display will void the warranty Equipment screwdriver non conductive flat head Description and Procedure There is one vertical position adjustment and one focus adjustment In general these adjustments should not be required Warm up time 30 minutes Vertical Adjustment NOTE The vertical position can be adversely affected by magnetic interference Before adjusting the vertical position be sure the analyzer is in a non magnetic environment and the CRT is degaussed 1 To access vertical position and focus adjustment controls remove the side panel nearest the display 2 Insert a narrow non conductive flat head screwdriver at least 2 inches long into the vertical position hole 3 Adjust the control for the best alignment of the softkey lable with the softkeys See Service Program in Chapter 4 for procedure to display the Softkey Label Alignment Pattern Focus Adjustment NOTE The CRT focus can be adversely affected by the CRT intensity set too high or by magnetic interference 4 Use the same screwdriver used in step 3 to adjust the focus until the display has the best readability Look for equal width of both the horizontal and vertical segments of the H character Also check the focus in all four corners of the CRT 7 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure
315. i d d 9 19 Switeling Dh PERWBE PT RA 9 19 Making Backup Operating System Disk ae ce 9 20 Checking System Operatii vade diane ER HERD TE 9 20 BON Sel Sh 35532 SEU dE SERIE dE 9 20 Contents 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents P OSP CARS DIC 5 bapa 9 20 S Parameter Test uet Deck 9 21 User Parameters Unratioed Power 9 21 li ase or DIGG ae roti ro e Ere EP 9 21 10 Preventive Maintenance A MUERE TET TT ELT T T TE TIU ULT TT 10 2 Proper Al CREARE d MR Pr E Fed 10 2 Cean E Onie reann Sardo ER E aDXG acad d deen wees whee 10 3 Clean the Test Set Hear Panel 6 lt gt gt 5 5 x bids KR ER REX ag 10 3 Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the 10 4 Degauss Demagnetize the Display CRT 10 5 Enor TONG
316. ice Manual 8 63 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 8 Raw A2 Channel Errors N 8 64 System Specifications fif Channel Errors Correction OFF oo Netuork finalyzer HP8510B Enhanced Model Test Set HPB5IEROO3 2 4 S Parameter 45MHz 406Hz Source 6 amp BSIG Synth 10MHz 40GHz Calibration Kit 8505 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Pori Cables 851330 pair short cabl Z 4mn 2 4mm Eterm Frequency GHz Description Of Error Term 045 2 2 79 20 36 few Freq Cutoff Source to AT 0 000 9 0020 0 000 lou fre Slope source to dE iFssa2 9 00 9 00 0 80 ta dB 0475 0475 0475 0475 ch deg 0 0000 9 0000 i7 deg iDpfsa Lource to A dB iLdsa2 ref ghz Source to A2 dB Lfsa2 conVerter io 1 7 Ac 5982 119 1 2 4 03 3 2 to 1 f A7 dB 277 06 Damage Level 38 Dla2 20 00 20 00 at Cone for 0 1 db Comp d8m Fcca2 1 10 00 10 80 rms Noise on Trace AC 4 dB iRntal 007 0090 rms Noise Floor AZ L f t3Bm 800 00 800 00 Faw rms Noise Floor A7 Con
317. icensing 8510 Safety Information Figure 2 2 Location of Hazardous Voltages in 8510 Instruments 2 of 2 120 Vac 120 240 Vac TRANSFORMER 38 Vac 15 REGULATOR 120 240 Vac 120 240 Vac UNE SWITCH UNE SWITCH 8510C On Site Service Manual 2 5 Safety Licensing 8510 Safety Information Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements The Agilent 8510C network analyzer complies with German FTZ 526 527 Radiated Emissions and Conducted Emissions requirements This is to declare that the products listed below are in conformance with the German Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordnung 3 GSGV Deutschland Instruments with fan installed Gerate mit engebautem Ventilator Operator position Normal operation ISO 7779 4195A 83631A B 85101B C 85309A 8350B 83640A B 85102B R 85106A D 8620C 83642A 8511A B 85108A L 83601A B 83650A B 8512A 8702B 83602A 83651A B 8513A 8703A 83620A B 83420A 8514A B 8719A 83621A B 83421A 8515A 8720 83622 83422 8516A 8722A 83630A B 83423A 8517A B 8753B C 83624A B 83424A 85105A 8757C E 83630A B 83425A 85110A L Acoustic Noise Emission Geraeuschemisslon LpA lt 704 LpA lt 704 am Arbeitsplatz normaler Betrieb nach DIN 45635 t 19 Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB du Canada
318. ification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Plotter Pens The software configuration menu lists pen numbers and colors If your plotter has a pen wheel the pen numbers correspond to the wheel numbers Otherwise plotters with only two pens use the first and second pens listed The color relates to color monitors and the choice of pen colors is arbitrary When the plotter is connected to the 8510 system bus you can use the 8510 COPY key on the front panel to access its plotting capabilities for plotting 8510 displays Plot Traces on the Controller Display Some traces may appear to be missing from program plots that show four frequency bands Whenever three traces appear instead of four it is because the bands have the same values and are overlaid This overlay cannot be distinguished on low resolution monitors or plotters For example the 511 magnitude uncertainty specifications for an 8510 using an 8340 source and an 8514 test set have the same uncertainty values for traces labeled 8 to 18 GHz and 18 to 20 GHz Plot traces are designed for all controller CRT combinations but they appear best on high resolution color monitors When the program is calculating the values for plot traces it beeps each time a trace is calculated Therefore if you hear four beeps but only see three traces that indicates that four traces were generated but one is overlaid on the other Program Modifica
319. ified with any single error term using this method 2 extremely cautious when interpreting the results of E term displays compared with specification printouts A system failure is indicated only if the error is significantly worse than the specification 3 values listed for reflection tracking and transmission tracking refer only to the ripple of the frequency response However the reflection and transmission tracking E terms include both the tracking E term ripple and the frequency response rolloff It is difficult to determine what part of the E term ripple is independent of the rolloff Therefore the reflection and transmission tracking E terms may not be as useful as the other values 4 132 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 5 1 Replaceable Parts Overview This chapter contains illustrations and corresponding parts lists of the major assemblies cables and other hardware software and accessories for use with the analyzer Parts tables for individual test sets and sources are in their respective manuals Sections include parts listings for Software and documentation Available service tools e 85101C equipped with a CRT display 851016 equipped with an LCD 85102B NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT display The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD Exchange Assemblies Some of the major assemblies can be rep
320. ify that a particular board is faulty In most repair situations subtest information is not required or useful because of Agilent s assembly level repair strategy for this instrument If you want to simulate this type of failure to see an example of a failure message press 9 and keep it pressed in Then press TEST Keep the entry key 9 pressed in until the failure message appears How to Identify a Self Test Failure Self test failures are displayed three ways By the LCD CRT By the front panel LEDs By the CPU board LEDs When the display is operating properly it displays self test failure information as shown above In such instances read the most likely causes for failure and troubleshoot accordingly To rerun the self test sequence or a single self test to verify the fault refer to How to Run the Self Test Sequence Repeatedly How to Identify a Self Test Failure When the Display Is Not Working When the display does not indicate a self test failure but you suspect a failure observe the front panel LEDs They may or may not indicate the failed self test 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 43 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures If all of the front panel LEDs are lit refer to What to Do If the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 on page 4 41 This is not a self test failure but default test 15 condition If some combination of the 8 4 2 1 LEDs stays lit and none of the R L
321. in America tel 305 269 7500 fax 305 269 7599 Canada tel 1 877 894 4414 fax 905 282 6495 Europe tel 31 20 547 2323 fax 31 20 547 2390 New Zealand tel 0 800 738 378 fax 64 4 495 8950 Japan tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Australia tel 1 800 629 485 fax 61 3 9210 5947 Singapore tel 1 800 375 8100 fax 65 836 0252 Malaysia tel 1 800 828 848 fax 1 800 801 664 Philippines tel 632 8426802 tel PLDT subscriber only 1 800 16510170 fax 632 8426809 fax PLDT subscriber only 1 800 16510288 Thailand tel outside Bangkok 088 226 008 tel within Bangkok 662 661 3999 fax 66 1 661 3714 Hong Kong tel 800 930 871 fax 852 2506 9233 Taiwan tel 0800 047 866 fax 886 2 25456723 People s Republic of China tel preferred 800 810 0189 tel alternate 10800 650 0021 fax 10800 650 0121 India tel 1 600 11 2929 fax 000 800 650 1101 Hewlett Packard to Agilent Technologies Transition This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies To reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number i
322. in Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Autorange Cal Failed The CPU tries to calibrate the switchable gain amplifiers 0 dB 12 dB 24 dB 36 dB and 48 dB gain steps on the 85102 IF amplifier boards A10 and A12 If the measured values exceed the normal error limits this message is displayed Probable cause of error e 85102 A10 or A12 IF amplifier Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e Run 85102 service program test 5 A10 A12 Caution Optional Function Not Installed This message occurs if the A8 security key assembly in the 85101C is removed Probable cause of failure Missing 85101C 8 security key Disc Communication Error This message occurs when an external disk drive loses communication with the 85101C 7 1 0 board assembly Probable cause of failure Missing or bad GPIB cable between the 85101C and the external disk drive e 85101C A7 1 0 board Disc Hardware Problem This message occurs when attempting access to an external disk drive and indicates a hardware type problem with the drive This message does not indicate a failure with the 8510C internal disk drive Probable causes of failure Hardware failure in the external disk drive Disc Read or Write Error This message indicates an internal disk drive communication failure Probable causes of failure Badmedia disk e 85101C A7 1 0 board 85101C internal disk drive 4 62 8510C On Site Ser
323. ing prompt is displayed ADJUST XTAL FILTER 1 2 AND 3 FOR MINIMUM RIPPLE 1 2 dB 20 kHz BW 11 Refer to Figure 7 6 for the location of the XTAL FILTER adjustments To get the minimum ripple of the RF envelope seen on the spectrum analyzer iterate XTAL FILTER adjustments 1 2 and 3 Adjust for minimum ripple at 100 kHz 10 kHz see Figure 7 7 12 If you are unable to adjust the XTAL FILTER within specification or if the following prompt is displayed check the equipment setup for configuration errors or refer to the troubleshooting chapter 100kHz LEVEL TOO LOW 20 dBm 13 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 14 Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 19 Adjustments Procedure 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Figure 7 7 IF Mixer Adjustment Waveform 115 00 kHz REF 7 6 dBm ATTEN 10 dB 3 Fit LITTLE 7 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment Equipment Service extender board 85102 60030 Adapter SMB M M 2 1250 0669 12 inch SMB cable assembly 2 5061 1022 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure The 100 kHz IF amplifiers provide port selection switchable IF g
324. intervals Note that as the 8510 system sweeps the intervals are determined by the display processor Clock A6 assembly provides four reference timing and calibration signals Reference IF signals for the main phase locked loop 3 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 85102 IF Detector Timing signals for the synchronous detectors Timing signals for the 19 9 MHz local oscillator e The 100 kHz calibration signal for the IF Phase Lock Assemblies IF Counter A21 assembly counts the 20 MHz IF signal and checks for the power level and valid frequency count for both pretune and main lock Pretune Phase Lock A22 assembly lets the system initiate a pretune phase lock based on the start frequency input to the display processor It also counts the VTO fundamental frequency Main Phase Lock A23 assembly is used during pretune and as part of the main phase locked loop Miscellaneous Assemblies Motherboard A25 assembly interconnects all of the other assemblies Regulator A15 assembly provides four regulated DC voltages 15V 15V 5V 5V Rectifier A26 assembly rectifies line voltage ac to dc for the IF detector 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 9 Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor 85101 Display Processor The 85101 display processor is the system controller data processor and display unit for the 8510 system It consists of the processor EEPROM non volatile memory the display and 1 0
325. ion and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then to Software Failures on page 4 98 4 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Running Error Messages If a running error appears press ENTRY OFF MEASUREMENT RESTART If the message repeats refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks If necessary see Running Error Messages Unratioed Power Failures If you suspect an unratioed power failure refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks If necessary see Unratioed Power Failures Other Obvious Failure Types With each of the following failures refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks before going to the section that troubleshoots the failure Power Supply Failures See Power Supply Failures Performance Test Failures See Chapter 8 Specifications and Performance Verification Software Failures See Software Failures ss417c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 7 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks Refer to the 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram at the end of this section Front and Rear Panel Checks Switch off power to all instruments Switch them on in this sequence the source test set 85102
326. ion and reflection measurements Measurement calibration does not correct random errors Drift Errors These errors result from frequency drift and instrumentation drift They affect both transmission and reflection measurements Instrumentation drift is primarily temperature related Measurement calibration does not correct drift errors 8 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance Verification System Performance Verification Performance verification is a process that verifies that the overall system is making measurements within the expected total measurement uncertainties The entire system hardware calibration kit and connections is verified using the following procedures Operational checks Frequency tests 8340 and 8360 only Total system uncertainty test Recommended process checks Operational Checks Description The first level of system performance verification is a series of recommended but not required functional checks The assessment of the system operating environment and the functional operation of the system components help identify faulty equipment The procedures check the environmental temperature and humidity the typical power out of the analyzer measurement channels the typical system dynamic range and the connector dimensions pin depths Test port cable stability is also tested in a subset of the operational checks procedure The Operational
327. ion in one of the analyzer registers When the measurement calibration is completed and saved press Resume If you have selected a performance verification for 45 MHz perform a full 2 port measurement calibration at 45 MHz Use only the lowband load for the loads portion of the calibration Save the measurement calibration in a different analyzer register When the measurement calibration is completed and saved press Resume 10 Press Select Standard and fill in the serial number for the verification standard listed 11 Leave the number of averages at 1024 unless you changed it for the measurement calibration The number of averages MUST be the same for the measurement calibration AND the verification device measurements 12 Select the appropriate register s where you saved the measurement calibration s 13 Select the 45 MHz measurement if the system operates in that frequency range and the 8 48 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure characterization data is available Press Done 14 Insert the verification kit disc into the analyzer disc drive and press Resume 15 Measure the environmental temperature and record the results on the test record at the end of this chapter NOTE For specified performance the environmental temperature at the time of verification must be within 1 C 1 8 F of the measurement calibration temperature 16 Pr
328. ion phase uncertainty Etp 8 79 transmission uncertainty equations 8 78 trim sweep procedure 8 102 troubleshooting component level 3 2 image problems 4 46 instrument level 3 2 LCD 4 43 LCD display problems 4 46 performance verification failures 8 54 power supply summary 4 98 test set unratioed power 4 88 with the service adapter 4 86 typical measurement sequence 3 15 U unable to lock to ext 10 MHz ref 4 82 uncertainties comparison of verification devices 8 50 equations for 8 73 generation of system measurement 8 80 interpreting printouts 8 59 test procedure 8 47 total system test description 8 5 uncertainty and dynamic accuracy limits 8 102 uncertainty curve generation 8 22 uncertainty equations measurement 8 76 reflection 8 77 transmission 8 78 uncertainty plot customizing 8 16 uncertainty plot marker control 8 15 uncertainty specifications example plots of S11 8 65 of 521 8 69 table of S11 8 66 uncorrected error model flowgraph 8 83 unpacking system cabinet 9 8 9 9 unratioed power 9 21 troubleshooting 4 88 unratioed power failures 4 6 user 1 2 3 and 4 4 85 user parameters 9 21 user defined parameters 4 85 user generated data recall 8 20 using the tutorial 8 21 verification and calibration at 45 MHz 8 94 failure troubleshooting 8 54 of system performance 8 5 8 13 results interpreting 8 52 Verify using softkey options 8 18 verifying system performance 8 18
329. ions System Performance time Measurement errors that remain after measurement calibration are called residual measurement errors See the Measurement Calibration chapter in the operating manual for a detailed description of the systematic errors corrected by measurement calibration The measurement errors of the system are explained in relationship to error model flowgraphs and uncertainty equations later in this chapter If measurement accuracy measurement uncertainty specifications were written for each possible 8510 system configuration and measurement condition several thousand specifications would need to be generated Therefore the specifications performance verification software calculates the total measurement uncertainty of different systems This allows you to print out the specifications for your system configuration Refer to How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program in this chapter to determine the system performance of your 8510 system To verify this calculated system performance refer to How to Verify System Performance Systematic Errors These errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards connector standards and interface interconnecting cables and instrumentation Measurement calibration can reduce systematic errors Random Errors These non repeatable errors are due to trace noise noise floor cable repeatability and connector repeatability They affect both transmiss
330. irection Erm Systematic Ramon Drift Systematic Efd Efr S11 Efs 5112 521 512 Efl S11 Random decry Rr Nr Cr 2Ctm1S11 Crm1s11 Crm2 21 12 2 Rr em 2Crt1 11 emisti Cr2821812 2 2 Nr 1 Efnf Drift amp Stability Dm1b1 S11 where Crm2 cable 2 reflection magnitude stability Efnt effective noise on trace Dms1 drift magnitude x C source to port 1 Efnf effective noise floor Efs effective source match error Crt1 connector repeatability transmission Efr effective reflection tracking error connector repeatability reflection Efl effective load match error Ctm1 cable 1 transmission magnitude stability Efd effective directivity error Crm1 cable 1 reflection magnitude stability Crr2 connector repeatability reflection e The detailed equation for each of the previous terms is derived from the signal flow model in Figure 8 18 8 76 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Due to the complexity of combining these terms manually the specifications performance verification software calculates the terms for you However the software makes some ideal device assumptions e For S11 and 522 uncertainties the device is a one port device therefore the value of S21 and 512 are oo dB The value of 11 or 522 is varied e ForS21 and 12 uncertainties
331. it Description The 14 graphics system processor GSP display interface board is the main interface between the Ab central processing unit CPU board and the A15 liquid crystal display LCD The A5 CPU board converts the formatted data into GSP commands and writes itto the A14 GSP display interface board The GSP processes the data to produce generate the necessary analog and digital video signals that are used for the following purposes The analog video signals are used for the VGA compatible RGB output signals which are then routed to the rear panel The digital video signals are translated to 3 3 volt levels and routed to the A15 LCD The A14 assembly receives 5 V from the motherboard that is used for processing and supplying power to the A16 backlight inverter board 5 V and the A15 LCD 3 3 V Diagnostic Tests Self tests and service program tests see 85101 Display Processor Service Program Menu on page 4 108 check the functionality of the 14 graphics display GSP and the A15 LCD If any of these display related tests fail it usually indicates that the display interface board needs to be replaced Reference Information for Troubleshooting Refer to Figure 4 4 and Table 4 2 for connector locations on the A14 GSP and pinout information from A14J4 to motherboard 4 32 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 4 4 A14 Graphics Display Board Connectors Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures o
332. it to select the specific menu that you want four categories correspond to the four boards in the card cage instructions for removing and replacing boards in it are given in Chapter 6 Replacement Procedures Note that the boards tested in each menu are shown in parentheses below NOTE If you disconnect the 85101 display processor from all of the other instruments you can verify its stand alone operation Disconnect all GPIB cables and all other cables so that only the line voltage cord remains Turn on the 85101C by pressing the line switch on the left edge of the 85101C 85101 CPU Board Tests Ab This menu tests the functions of the CPU board the address bus and the data bus The tests marked with an asterisk are intended for factory use only DRAM Refresh Test 1 Tests the dynamic RAM refresh controller The interrupt system is turned on and is delayed by 8 ms before checking that a refresh interrupt occurred Read Write Shift Accumulator Test 2 Tests the math processor on the A5 CPU Press 0 and ZMARKER to run this test automatically Data is written into the accumulators shifted and then read back and checked for proper results A manual version of this test is for factory use only Multiplier Test 3 Tests the math processor by doing multiplication in the registers Run this test in auto mode to find any failures in the multiplier A manual version of this test is for factory use only Complex Multiply Test
333. itude Uncertainty Using 85131F Cables 21 MAGNITUDE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY USER PARAMETERS 19 HP8511R NOSOURCE NOCRLKIT BL NOCRBLES 16 Dec 1992 I e s 16 54 48 m 1 ad e GI RS THEMEN Med F GHz 2 puppe ped req z pL L L L m L qnss to 20 a 20 to 26 5 2 sd DUT Length eo oo 10 05 EE GE k k L i 1 i I eee SEEN Sli g SE L L S12 S21 01 NE 622 0 10 10 30 50 70 90 521 Measurement Level dB from Ref 521 10 000 045 8 233 0 20 250 20 26 5 33 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 33 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Table 8 9 Using Non ldeal Test Device Exercise 3d Answers Questions Answers What are the measurement uncertainties a After setting up the hardware configuration for the non ideal test for each frequency range in the device go to the Main menu and press the System Uncert key b Selecta plot for S21 magnitude Lower Limit Worst Case Uncertainty and Computed Using Specifications c Notice that by default the program assumes an ideal test device which has S21 12 with no reflection from either the input or output ports d Next move to the space for entering
334. k Disc Command 21 Initialize Disc Use this selection to initialize a disk prior to recording the operating system on it You can use a disk that has been recorded on before or not but it should be double sided high density 1 44 MB and of good quality Slide the disk into the disk drive In the Main Service Functions test menu press 2 1 MARKER In about a minute the disk will be initialized in the LIF format needed for recording the operating system Service Command 22 Run Service Program Refer to the Service Program section to use this selection Service Command 23 Diagnose a Failure This selection displays the failure message for a self test and subtest of your choice Use it to read failure messages when the display goes blank but is not faulty Refer to How to Identify a Self Test Failure toward the beginning of this section Obtain the self test and subtest numbers as directed Press SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU to enter the Main Service Functions test menu Then press 2 3 ZMARKER to display the diagnose a failure screen Enter the self test and subtest numbers obtained above and press ZMARKER The LCD CRT should display the appropriate failure messages 4 54 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures How to Reload the Operating System You can reload the operating system from RAM or from the disk To reload from RAM press the recessed TEST bu
335. labels to display the plot Entering User Labels or Comments System Verification Reports If desired use the features in this software to enter your own titles or comments on system verification reports The comment you enter appears on the test record for the selected verification kit device 1 IW 19 Ov Press Verify System in the Main menu Press Select Standard Move to the Comment selection at the bottom of the screen Press Previous until the asterisk in the data field blinks From the keyboard enter a one line comment that you want to appear on the system verification report If desired repeat the above two steps to enter a second comment line Press Done when you are finished entering comments 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 17 Performance Verification and Specifications Performing System Verification Performing System Verification After configuring the system decide whether you want to choose user generated specs or software defined uncertainties Select Verify System in the Main menu In this menu you can start the 8510C system verification using either the defined system specifications or custom specifications calculated from edited error term values To choose the desired specifications for system verification follow the steps below 1 Press Select Standard 2 Go to Verify Using 3 Select either Specifications for defined values or User Parameters to use the customized specificati
336. laced on a rebuilt exchange R E basis Exchange factory repaired and tested assemblies are available only on a trade in basis the defective assemblies must be returned for credit within 30 days For this reason assemblies required for spare parts stock must be ordered by the new assembly part number Figure 5 1 explains the rebuilt module exchange procedure R E assembly part numbers are listed in the parts list below the part numbers for the corresponding new assemblies Ordering Information To order a part listed in the replaceable parts tables quote the Agilent part number indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Agilent office 5 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 5 1 Module Exchange Program Replaceable Parts The module exchange program described here is a fast efficient economical method of keeping your instrument in service Locate the defective module using the troubleshooting procedures described in this manual Is a replacement module in stock Order a restored exchange replacement module from Agilent Technologies Refer to the replaceable parts section of this manual for appropriate part numbers of the restored exchange module When the replacement module is received replace the defective module with the replacement module Return the defective module to Agilent Technologies formt120 8510C On Site Service Manual Replace the defective module with the repla
337. lator Measure Voltages on the A3 Post Regulator Determine Why the Green LED on A10 Is Not On Steadily V Check the line voltage selector switch and fuse Determine Why the Red LED on A10 Is On or Flashing Disconnect A10W1 Check the A10 preregulator and related assemblies Measure voltages on A10W1 and at A3J1 Remove assemblies Remove A8 motherboard connector cables Check the operating temperature S lt M ULL Inspect the A8 motherboard Determine Why the Green LEDs on A3 Are Not All On Remove the post regulator from its motherboard connector maintain A10W1 cable connection Check the A3 fuses and voltages Remove more assemblies Disconnect display power cable CRT only Disconnect A15 LCD assembly cable and or A16 backlight inverter cable LCD only Inspect motherboard Fan Troubleshooting V Fan speeds v Check the fan voltages Intermittent Problems V Replace the 5 CPU board assembly V Ifthe problem continues replace the 10 preregulator assembly 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 79 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Power Supply Failures Table 4 9 Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary 2 of 2 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator Four green LEDs should be on one red LED off v Ifnot cycle power and measure the test points Check the 5 V Test Points on A24 Interface V Remove assemblies and check 5V LED A15
338. leeve nut and washer from the RPG shaft 4 Disconnect the cable from the A1 J2 RPG connection item 8 and remove the RPG from the front panel assembly To Reassemble 5 Reverse steps 2 through 4 Perform step 8 of front panel A1 replacement procedure 6 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A2 Disk Drive Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver Needlenose pliers Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 Perform the 1 front panel disassembly procedure 2 Remove the two screws holding the disc drive to the front panel item 6 3 Remove the disc drive from the front panel assembly To Reassemble 4 Reverse steps 2 and 3 Torque the two screws in step 2 to 79 N cm 7 in Ib Perform step 8 of A1 front panel replacement NOTE If a new disk drive is being installed and it has jumpers verify the jumper positions item 7 before installing If necessary use needlenose pliers to move the jumpers item 9 to their correct positions 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 9 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A11 CRT Display Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in p
339. lem or rerun the test to confirm it 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 45 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures How to Troubleshoot a Self Test Failure If a self test failure message is visible on the display troubleshoot the instrument based the most likely causes for the failure If the most likely causes for failure are not displayed or for additional troubleshooting suggestions refer to the appropriate self test paragraph in Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting on page 4 48 How to Access the Test Menu and Run a Self Test To run a self test you must first access the test menu Then you can run the self test in one of three diagnostic modes Runone test repeatedly the self test sequence once and stop in case of a failure or go on to run the main program normal operation Runthe self test sequence in a repeating and failure logging loop How to Access the Test Menu If the operating system is running properly press the SYSTEM key Then press MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS SERVICE MENU The self test selections should appear with other selections If the instrument is off press and hold in any key and turn on the instrument When the keyboard self test failure message appears release the key Press MARKER to enter the test menu With the instrument on press and hold in any key Then press and release the recessed TEST button When the keyboard self test failure message appears rel
340. les were used in the system The effects of the non specified cables cannot be taken into account in the performance verification procedure without fully characterizing the cables and modifying the verification program to include this data Contact an Agilent system engineer for more information Calibration Kit Substitution The accuracy of the 8510 when used with any calibration kit is dependent on how well the kit standards are defined The measurement specifications for the 8510 system include measurement calibration with an Agilent calibration kit Measurement calibrations made with user defined or modified calibration kits are not subject to the 8510 performance specifications although a procedure similar to the standard verification procedure may be used Contact an Agilent system engineer for more information Calibration Cycle The recommended system calibration cycle is once every year However that does not extend past the test ports of the test set if non Agilent cables are used test port cables test fixtures adapters etc The calibration cycle for the system is unknown with non Agilent cables and must be determined by the owner since the stability repeatability and aging rate characteristics of the test port cables are unknown The user of the system should determine the calibration interval based on the amount of use and the degree of cable movement 8 88 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifi
341. lified Agilent service personnel use these selections If reloading the operating system does not eliminate instrument errors contact your Agilent customer engineer 4 40 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures What to Do If the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 Default test 15 is the condition when all eight of the front panel display processor LEDs R L T S 8 4 2 1 stay lit This condition occurs at the beginning of the self tests sequence If it persists it probably means that the sequence could not start or the processor was unable to clear the front panel LEDs If this condition occurs check the numbered items below using the information on the power supply test points located in Power Supply Failures on page 4 77 or refer to the test points on the 85101 block diagram 1 Check the 5 V power supply at the post regulator Refer to the Power Supply Failures section for information on power supply test points 2 Confirm that the A4 GSP assembly A14 GSP if equipped with an LCD is properly seated 3 Confirm that the 5 CPU assembly is properly seated 4 Check that all 551 switches see Figure 4 8 are closed 5 Check these pins of the Ab assembly Pin Reading Line P2 13 gt 2 5V LHMF P2 45 lt 0 7V HMULBSY P2 59 gt 2 5V LGINT low general interrupt masked P2 68 gt 2 5V LPOP low power on pulse from post regulator 6 Remove these assemblies 7 1 0
342. logy NIST This chain of measurements defines how the verification process brings NIST traceability to the 8510 system measurements Therefore when your analyzer system is verified through the performance of the Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure a measurement traceability path is established Figure 8 19 shows the traceability path for the calibration and verification standards 8 86 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Figure 8 19 National Institute of Standards Technology Traceability Path for 8510 System Calibration and Verification Standards MICROWAVE THEORY NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS TECHNOLOGY NIST STANDARD RESISTOR DC RESISTANCE MECHANICAL GAGES HEWLETT PACKARD STANDARDS LAB SELECTED VERIFICATION DEVICES SELECTED CALIBRATION DEVICES PRODUCTION SERVICE CENTER TEST SYSTEM VERIFICATION CALIBRATION KITS KITS Substitution of System Components PROCESS CONTROL VERIFICATION KIT All Agilent components that are specified for an 8510 system provide a top quality system product that ensures good measurements The performance verification can be performed with 8510 system components other than those manufactured by Agilent However when the components used are not part of a specified 8510 system the measurement integrity can be compromised Source Substitution
343. ltage is set with a line voltage selector switch or a voltage selector card at the rear panel of the instrument CAUTION Severe damage to the instruments can result if line voltage settings are incorrect when power is applied Use an autotransformer if the line voltage is not within the following voltage ranges 90 to 127 V or 195 to 253 V Some of the instruments may have wider ranges as noted in their operating and service manuals WARNING Death by electrocution is possible if both the common terminal of an autotransformer and the protective earth terminals of the 8510 system instruments are not connected to earth ground CAUTION Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this product Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage Verify the value of the line voltage fuses in all instruments of the system The correct fuse values are listed on the rear panel of each instrument 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 11 System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Source Compatibility Requirements If you are installing a source that is not the newest version available it must have the modification or firmware revision or both noted on pages 4 12 through page 4 15 for 85106 compatibility Configuring the System in a Cabinet If your system will be used in a system cabinet follow the configuration instructions here Otherwise refer to Configuring the System on Bench Top
344. lty assembly A14 A15 or A16 if the display is dim dark or blank If the display is illuminated and showing an image but the color mix is faulty or other image problems refer to the A15 section Troubleshooting Image Problems 1 If the display is dim the backlight assembly is probably defective Refer to LCD Assembly Details on page 6 18 for replacement procedures 2 If the display remains dark after the instrument is turned on follow the procedure in Verifying the Inverter Board and Backlight Lamp on page 4 37 3 If the display lights up when the instrument power is turned on but the display remains blank continue with the following a Connect an external VGA monitor to the rear panel VGA output connector on the instrument b Ifthe external VGA monitor is blank the A14 GSP display interface board assembly is probably defective Remove the top cover of the instrument to facilitate troubleshooting Ifthe external VGA monitor is functioning as expected verify that the LCD data cable 7 is properly connecting the 14 GSP display interface board to the A15 LCD If the cable is properly connected and the display is blank the most probable cause is the A15 LCD If the LCD is defective replace the complete display assembly Refer to A15 LCD Assembly Replacement on page 6 16 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 31 Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures A14 GSP Display Interface Board Circu
345. m the DUT length for the data sheet values and systems using sweepers is 0 System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Power level the specifications apply to dB Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band dB Phase uncertainty data for each frequency band degree 512 521 045 2 i Mag dB Deg 9386 329 0330 286 9314 276 0312 276 9 0322 238 9 301 342 391 9603 515 0850 693 hi 1 025 2242 1 627 3817 2 706 B557 4 629 1 1228 8 0 5 1 8966 14 257 3 1224 25 784 4 9490 50 295 7 4735 180 098 10 6918 180 000 14 5013 180 000 1 Nov 522 0 QUeREEENEMAH EMAEAMASARERARSERRRERREZREI2RMEIRZA ww wwsw 133 Device Length 10 0 cm HP8S1 C Color Model HP8S17 2 4mm S Parameter 45 2 506 2 HPBSESIA Synthesizer 45MH2 S GHz HP8S5O56R 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade SL Sliding Load Cal HP85133F pair short cables 2 4mm Z 4mm 2 20 Mag dB Deg 9927 1 427 0702 1 278 0631 1 231 0649 1 247 0652 1 250 0654 1 251 9676 1 275 0681 1 281 9724 1 319 0763 1 351 0910 1 460 1197 1 597 1504 1 867 2241 0 367 3558 3 268 5865 4 873 9830 7 755 1 6466 12 921 2 7144 22 395 4 3394 41 266 6 6411 180 090 20 40 Mag dB 1882 2 548 1385 2 475 1332 2 430 1322 2 425 1336 2 439 1367 2 467 1447 2 531 16840 2 570 1972 2 900 2588 3 222 3682 4 079 5630 5 422 98980 7 846 1
346. m then changed it again but you want to restore the value to your first change press Undo Term Use Reset All only if you want to use the software s predefined error terms Use this key to restore the values of all the error terms to the previous change As with Undo Term this key changes all the error terms of the table to previously changed values Use Reset All only if you want to use the software s predefined error terms Use this key to restore the value of the currently highlighted error term to the software s predefined error term values Use this key to save the edited error term table under a file name you specify Use this key to display a data field for you to enter the name of an error term table file to recall You need to press Next or Previous until the asterisk flashes before entering a filename Use this key when you have finished editing the error term table New uncertainties are computed based on the error terms Use this key to return to a previous menu Performance Verification and Specifications Performing System Verification Saving Edited Error Term Values Use the new features in the software to save your specific error terms in a user parameters file Use the following steps to save customized error terms The original data files are isolated from changes made to the error term tables for your specific system As a result you can choose to use standard error terms or your customized values
347. m Performance The performance of a network analyzer system is attributable to the accuracy and stability of the entire system The accuracy of the system is dependent on the measurement error correction The error correction also known as measurement calibration is dominated by the quality of the calibration kit devices and the device models The stability of the measurement calibration is dependent on the raw performance of each system component Individual System Components The following characteristics and conditions of the system components affect the performance of the com bined system configuration Operating characteristics source frequency accuracy test set stability test port cable stability and connector type User selected operating conditions analyzer measurement parameter 511 521 512 522 averaging source sweep mode sweep speed and power Condition and quality of the components Calibration Kit The quality of the measurement calibration is dominated by the accuracy of the calibration kit device models and how closely the actual electrical performance of the device meets the model Model limitations can be overcome by using a calibration method that requires a less precise device model For example a TRL thru reflection line calibration method requires less precise modeling of the devices than an open short load method Measurement calibration errors occur when the expected or modeled electrical per
348. ment to earth ground 4 Discharge the capacitors one by one by attaching one end of an insulated clip lead to the chassis and the other end of the clip lead to the capacitor terminal large Pozidrive screws item 3 Do this to every capacitor terminal To Disassemble 5 Remove the two screws item 3 of the desired capacitor and remove the capacitor To Reassemble 6 To install a new capacitor apply one drop of conductive Loctite to each capacitor screw hole and install the capacitor Torque the capacitor screws to 237 N cm 21 in Ib Torque the plastic shield screws to 79 N cm 7 in Ib NOTE It is important to observe polarity when installing a capacitor There is a plug in the bottom of the capacitor that can be seen through a hole in the motherboard if the capacitor is installed correctly 6 26 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Rear Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 9 To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove all covers 2 Remove two screws from the bottom edge of the frame item 3 four screws from the top edge of the frame item 2 and two screws from the rear panel item 4 3 Disconnect the 14 or 13 BNC to SMB coaxial cables leading from the rear panel to the corresponding PC b
349. mory for the program to run To check this type SYSTEMS AVAILABLE MEMORY RETURN 3 After BASIC is loaded the drive LED goes off and a BASIC ready prompt appears on the controller display Remove the disc 4 The following binary files must be loaded into the controller memory ERR CLOCK MAT 1 0 check which binary files are already loaded the controller memory type LIST BIN RETURN 5 To load the binary files insert the language extensions disc in the disc drive and type LOAD BIN ERR RETURN LOAD BIN CLOCK RETURN LOAD BIN MAT RETURN LOAD BIN RETURN 6 To load the HP IB binary file remove the language extensions disc and insert the drivers disc into the disc drive and type LOAD BIN HPIB Remove the drivers disc 7 5 700 0 RETURN on the controller to specify the system mass storage device drive 0 of the disc drive NOTE This procedure is used only with older revisions of BASIC i e 3 0 BASIC 5 0 automatically loads these files 8 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications NOTE The mass storage device must be set to the correct location for the program to run smoothly 8 Insert the program disk into the computer s disk drive 9 Set the active drive Type MST and enter the mass storage specifier 10 Type LOAD SPECS 8510 and wait for the program
350. n Use the effective dynamic range specifications Ref min Edrr2 Edrr1 that are found on the residual error w correction on table generated from the specifications performance verification software 1 Terminate each test port with a broadband load included in the calibration kit On the analyzer press FORMAT LOG MAG PARAMETER S21 RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON for sweepers 1 2 8 x1 for synthesizers 1 0 2 4 x1 Allow at least one complete sweep until the asterisk at the left side of the display disappears 2 Compare the measured dynamic range to the specification on the generated table NOTE Test sets with Option 003 reversed coupler have a different specification for forward and reverse measurements Measure the dynamic range in both 512 and 521 parameters 8 40 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures Frequency Test Procedures The frequency tests are only for 8340 8360 sources The 8350 source frequency accuracy is tested during the total system uncertainty test Source frequency accuracy is tested across the entire sweep range in both the swept and CW sweep modes NOTE Allow at least one hour for the system instruments to warm up CW Frequency Accuracy Test The front panel emulation software contained on the 8510 operating system disc is required to do this test for an 83621 31 51 The analyzer keypad overlay is part of the front panel emula
351. nectors WARNING To prevent electrical shock disconnect the 8510 system from the mains before cleaning Use dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external parts Do not clean internally For accurate and repeatable measurement results it is essential that connectors on calibration and verification devices test ports cables and other devices be cleaned and gaged regularly It is also necessary that standard devices are handled and stored properly and that all connectors are regularly inspected for signs of damage This not only ensures the best performance from the connectors but also extends their life Refer to a calibration kit manual for a detailed description of microwave connector care techniques This manual also describes proper techniques for making connections Visually inspect the test port connectors They should be clean and the center conductor pin is centered If so gage the microwave connectors gages are supplied in Agilent calibration kits Confirm that the center pin recession is correct Refer to the Specifications section in the test set manual for connector specifications Also inspect clean and gage the connectors of the calibration kit and verification kit devices Refer to the kit manuals for center pin recession specifications Clean the Test Set Rear Panel Extensions Over a period of time the test set rear extensions can affect the performance of the 8510 system unless they and the co
352. ng steps Torque frame screws item 1 to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Torque rear panel screws item 2 to 79 N cm 7 in Ib Figure 6 3 6 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A10 Preregulator Replacement Tools Required T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Large Pozidrive screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 2 To Disassemble 1 Perform the rear panel A9 disassembly procedure 2 Disconnect the preregulator cable from the A3 post regulator board If necessary remove the 21 screws item 7 from the card cage cover Remove the card cage cover item 8 the RFI gasket item 6 and the PC board spacers item 5 3 Remove the four screws in the rear frame two on the top and two on the bottom item 4 4 Pull the preregulator assembly away from the frame Disconnect the cable harness assembly at the J8 preregulator connection on the motherboard To Reassemble 5 To install a new preregulator reverse steps 2 through 4 Torque all screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Perform step 5 of rear panel replacement procedure 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 13 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Motherboard Card Cage Assembly Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver P
353. nimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output 516 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output 517 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output A6R51 CLOCK 8 Adjusts for a clock frequency of 20 MHz A7L4 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output 715 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output A7L6 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output A7L7 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output A9C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A9C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A9C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A10L1 100KHZ TUNED FILTER 6 Tunes the filter to 100 kHz A11C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A11C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple 7 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 2 Adjustable Components in Alpha Numeric Order Reference Adjustment Name Adjustment Adjustment Function Number Designator Procedure Number A11C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple 1211 100KHZ TUNED FILTER 6 Tunes the filter to 100 kHz A
354. nnel Warm up time 30 minutes Background Intensity Black Adjustment 1 2 Remove the top cover of the analyzer In a dimly lit room or with the analyzer CRT shaded from bright lights press PRESET SYSTEM MORE softkey 8 SERVICE FUNCTIONS softkey 8 TEST MENU softkey 1 2 2 MARKER 1 MARKER 3 MARKER 5 ZMARKER 8 5 1 7 Z MARKER x1 Alternating vertical bars of three different intensities are shown on the CRT Each bar has a number written below it either 0 1 or 2 Adjust the analyzer front panel knob until the vertical bar labeled 1 is just barely visible against the black border Vertical bar 0 must not be visible indistinguishable from the black border 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 13 Adjustments Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment 4 When the adjustment is complete press MARKER Operating Default Intensity Adjustment This adjustment sets the default level of the display intensity The analyzer normally presets to the same intensity level that was last used This level is stored in volatile memory If you switch the power on and off the memory is lost Then the analyzer uses the default display intensity to ensure that the display is visible and eliminate concern that the display may not be functioning The level is set using a photometer that measures the output light 1 To start the adjustment press 2 Setthe photometer probe to NORMAL Press PO
355. nostics and troubleshooting Refer to Display Test Patterns on page 4 35 in the LCD Failures section for more information Softkey Label Alignment Pattern 8 This is a screen test pattern used to vertically align the display to the softkey positions This test is for CRT displays only and does not apply to LCDs 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 113 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board A6 Tests CAUTION These tests require initialization of the EEPROMs on the A6 EEPROM board This procedure erases parts of the operating system The operating system MUST be reloaded after these tests are completed Do not run these tests unless you are sure they are required for service and unless you can reload your operating system from disk when finished Password Entry When the A6 EEPROM board test menu is selected from the 85101 Display Processor Service Program menu a message is displayed that requires a password to allow access to these tests The password is 8515 The purpose of the password is to ensure that these destructive tests are not run by accident Initialize Memory Board 1 This routine is used to initialize a new or repaired AG EEPROM board prior to loading the operating system It must be done at least once to an A6 board or the assembly will not function This test should not be used for any other reason because it will erase the operating system code in that area of memor
356. ns Measurement Uncertainties The system raw errors are combined with the uncertainties of the calibration kit standards in a manner determined by the measurement calibration process This results in a set of specifications for the residual error terms effective directivity tracking source match load match crosstalk and dynamic range The residual error terms are included in the corrected system flowgraph The flow graph is then solved with measurement uncertainty equations resulting in the measurement uncertainty and dynamic accuracy tables and plots See Figure 8 17 for the graphic representation of this process NOTE Examples of generated system uncertainties and dynamic accuracy are located earlier in this chapter System Error Models The system error model flowgraphs illustrated in the following pages show the relationship of the various error sources in the forward and reverse directions These flowgraphs can be used to analyze overall measurement performance Use the lists of error terms in the following tables as a guide to the abbreviations in the error model flowgraphs The additional information column helps clarify how the error terms are derived The system flowgraphs show the following Error model of the uncorrected analyzer system without measurement calibration Error model of the corrected analyzer system the residual errors remaining after measurement calibration 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 81 Performan
357. nt Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment Equipment Function generator 33250A Service board extender 85102 60030 4 ft BNC to SMB cable assembly 5062 7230 2 12 SMB cable assembly 5061 1022 2 adapter SMB M M 1250 0669 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure 5 A7 synchronous detector assemblies provide two voltages that are equal to the real and imaginary components of the vector representing the input signal to the sample and hold assembly The following procedure adjusts the two output filters of the synchronous detector to equalize the delay through them 1 After loading BASIC into the controller memory insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC Type LOAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE When the program is loaded press RUN Press the softkey that selects the synchronous detector adjustment a d The following prompt is displayed Adjustment on which SYNC DET module Select a softkey 6 Press the appropriate softkey 7 Switch off the analyzer power Remove the board 5 or 7 from the 85102 and install it on the extender board Reconnect the cables as the controller display shows using adapters and extra cables provided in the service kit It is necessary only to reconnect the cables that are noted in the setup on
358. nt on the characteristics of the device under test The expected measurement uncertainty of your analyzer system when measuring the verification kit devices can be determined by using the performance verification software The expected measurement uncertainty of ideal terminations and thus may be determined by using the uncertainties portion of the software The following measurement uncertainty equations and system error models flowgraphs show the relationship of the systematic random and drift errors These are useful for predicting overall measurement performance 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 73 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Sources of Measurement Errors Sources of Systematic Errors The residual after measurement calibration systematic errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards the connector interface the interconnecting cables and the instrumentation All measurements are affected by dynamic accuracy and frequency error effects For reflection measurements the associated residual errors are effective directivity effective source match and effective reflection tracking For transmission measurements the additional residual errors are effective crosstalk effective load match and effective transmission tracking The listing below shows the abbreviations used for systematic errors that are in the error models and uncertainty equations Erd effective direc
359. ntermittent Problems Preset states that appear spontaneously without pressing INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET typically signal a power supply or Ab CPU assembly problem Replace the 5 CPU board assembly as it is the most likely failure If the problem continues replace the A10 preregulator assembly 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 91 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Anytime during this procedure refer to the 85102 Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram for an overview of the 85102 IF detector power supplies Disconnect the interconnect cable from the rear panel Switch on the 85102 Check to see that the amber LINE LED on the front panel is on normal If the front panel LED is off it is likely there is a problem with the 85102 power supply continue with this troubleshooting Exception Some early models of 85102 derive the 5 V power for the front panel LED from the 85101 and the line LED in these models will therefore not light when the 85101 and 85102 are not connected Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator Partially slide back the top cover of the 85102 The A15 regulator is the board furthest back on the left side Check the five LEDs on A15 Normally the four green LEDs should be on and the red LED should be off If so the power supply is verified with 85 confidence To increase the confidence level
360. ntire frequency range In the figure below the source uses two oscillators for a frequency range of 10 MHz to 7 5 GHz Oscillators with different frequency ranges and multipliers are also used to cover different frequency ranges Figure 3 2 Source Covering Frequency Range in Two Bands LOW BAND RF 2GHz to 10MHz TO 2 1GHz 7 5GHz QUT lags 10MHz to 2 1GHz HIGH BAND RF 2GHz to 2GHz TO 7 5GHz 7 5GHz OUT o The source lets the 8510 know its frequency over digital interconnect lines It starts and stops its frequency sweeps in response to commands from the 8510 As explained below the system can use a synthesized sweeper a sweep oscillator or both as a source Synthesized Sweepers Synthesized sweepers or synthesizers achieve frequency resolution to within a few hertz 8510 dedicated Agilent 836X1 synthesized sources come with 1 Hz resolution standard 1 Hz is optional on other 8360 series sources Modern synthesizers are as fast as or faster than sweep oscillators in most circumstances Older synthesizers tend to be slower but offer the same resolution A synthesizer can operate in step mode where it phase locks at each frequency point for the number of points selected At each point it takes one or more measurements depending upon the number of averages selected It can also operate in ramp mode Sweep Oscillators Sweep oscillators or sweepers are less frequency accurate than synthesizers They operate in
361. nts the limits are the worst case values that will add to or subtract from the measurement These limits are derived from the equations Upper Limit 20 log 1 Uij Sij Lower Limit 20 log 1 Uij Sij where U is the uncertainty and S is the measured S parameter and jj is a vector number Whenever U j Si 1 the worst case is be times the log of 2 6 dB for the upper limit and 20 times the log of 0 minus infinity for the lower limit This is due to vector numbers adding in phase and subtracting out of phase For example if you were measuring a 60 dB band stop filter and the upper limit was 6 dB you could add 6 dB to the measurement 60 dB 6 dB 54 dB And if the lower limit was minus infinity the measurement of the filter could be considered 54 dB or less 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 97 Performance Verification and Specifications Performance Test Record Performance Test Record The complete system performance verification record includes the printout from the performance verification software this test record and a certificate of calibration Use this sheet to record the results of the frequency tests You may wish to copy this sheet to retain it as a master Table 8 15 Performance Test Record Test Facility Report Number Date Date of Last System Calibration Tested By Customer Text Equipment Used Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date 1 Frequency Counter Ambient temperature
362. nts Software Disk 2 IF Display Interconnect Cable 10 Specifications and Performance Verification Disk 3 Power Cables 2 11 Software Toolkit Disk 4 BNC Cables 2 12 Operating and Programming Manual 5 RS 232 Cable 13 Keyword Dictionary 6 External Display Cable for CRT only 14 Test Sets and Accessories Binder 7 Operating System Disk 15 On Site Service Manual 8 Master Calibration Data Disk 16 Pocket Quick Reference inside binder of 12 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 7 System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Unpacking the System Cabinet CAUTION The cabinet packaging is designed for the system cabinet standing upright pallet Do not store or install instruments in the cabinet when it is on its side or back Major damage to the instruments and to the cabinet can occur 9 8 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Figure 9 2 Unpacking the System 1 Cut the wrapping bands on the crate Snap off the retaining clips on the sides of the crate Remove the cardboard cover 2 Take out the ramp The cardboard spacer below it can be discarded as can the plastic foam around the cabinet 3 Remove the wooden spacer at the lower end in back of the cabinet Slide the ramp over the short rear panel at the bottom Atleast two people are required to control the system cabinet in the next step Theloaded cabinet weighs approximately 600 po
363. nual 9 5 System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System V 0 5 in between stacked instruments V 3 0 in between instrument side and cabinet v 6 0 in between rear panel and instrument and cabinet Other Requirements Install a telephone next to the system in case assistance is needed Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Checking the Shipment Ensure that all system components ordered have arrived by comparing the shipping forms to the original system purchase order Keep the shipping containers in one area and do not unpack them until all the instruments are delivered As you unpack the system components compare the serial numbers on the shipping forms to the serial numbers on the instruments Unpacking the System If any container or instrument is damaged or incomplete save the packing materials and notify both the carrier and Agilent See Contacting Agilent on page iii WARNING Some of the instruments are heavy and can cause injury Unpack them on the floor and handle them carefully When you unpack the 8510 check that you have received the accessories illustrated in Figure 9 1 9 6 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Figure 9 1 Accessories Supplied OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING MANUAL TEST SETS ON SITE DICTIONARY amp ACCESSORIES SERVICE MANUAL ss444c 1 GPIB Cable 9 85102 Adjustme
364. o Tutorial Questions u u s s sss arut 8 28 Operational Check Procedures cis oaa ipao x actae ded OG AU d eX ce Mean be 8 35 Environment and Device Temperature 8 35 User Parameters Check Unratioed 8 35 Inspect Clean and Gage Con ectors a s sassa etes dar eir br REPE ERE ERE 8 36 cauaa xx Te eh A ARCA TRO hd qa C BOUE JU OC E Ne de Ek BS aa amc 8 36 Ret m boss 22 RR iba eodd dde ER P 8 36 Lose ss us Exe doi Rodi 8 37 Magnitude and Phase Stability 8 38 Cable Connector Repeatability doa dolce eed 8 39 Dynamit Ranga Cheek PPM 8 40 PICUUENGCY i iua got Ei li deu ob Sede dane aed do beg 8 41 CW Nedgamucy Accuracy TEST Ea EE eed RE 8 41 PON EO aB WM Tcr 8 42 bed Eb E bp Le SERES 8 42 DUTICHIB S ca a usay
365. o n do RU m am ass qhu 9 10 Configuring and Connecting the 9 11 Wa Mage aii ESETE 9 11 Source Compatibility Requirements 20cisicieveedciesdveycan sess RR RARE ERE ERI Edd edel 9 12 Configuring te System ina Cabinet ii iior IRA 9 12 Pr contig red SUVS Ia EE Ini a SRE Db 9 12 Systems that Are Mor Precotifigrad sssri eee ekaaup RR REX RIA ERE EN EP dad 9 12 Recommended Cabinet 9 13 Configuring the System oria Bench Top xin 5555 Ada 9 14 Making System Donnectig ls 2 u l u u Rer e RE PERO 9 15 8360 Series Source GPIB Language 9 16 UE V EFL sm UM 9 17 Reference Port Extension Cables not applicable Tar 85110 8518 B517 eet RR E denen beware PROCHE ERES 9 17 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB 9 18 Sahal Printer cc P ETT 9 18 Puralleb ribet d suyan a epo dao CR EE o db ox oc RE Ra b HOD Radun
366. o run 8 56 software 8 8 substitution of system components 8 92 substitution cables 8 92 subtests 4 55 sweep ADC gain adjustment 7 16 7 18 sweep oscillator 8350B as system source 8 96 sweep oscillators theory of operation 3 4 sweep time too fast 4 81 swept frequency accuracy test 8 43 switching on power 9 19 symbols channel error term 8 84 synchronous detector adjustment 7 25 synthesized sweepers 3 4 system base 3 3 configuration 9 12 9 14 connections 9 15 heating and cooling 9 4 how to reload the operating system 4 67 maintenance 10 2 Index Index not preconfigured 9 12 options 9 2 preconfigured 9 12 requirements of non HP 9 6 unpacking 9 6 unpacking the cabinet 9 8 9 9 system bus address error 4 81 system bus 5 error 4 81 system cabinet 9 12 system command 15 run main program 4 65 16 memory operations 4 65 17 rerun self test 4 65 18 repeat test loop 4 65 system components effects on performance 8 3 effects on system 8 3 substituting 8 92 system error model flowgraphs explained 8 81 of all errors with correction off 8 84 of all residual errors with correction on 8 91 system measurement sequence of 3 15 system uncertainty test procedure 8 47 systematic errors 8 4 8 74 systems specialized 3 2 T table annotation and wording verification program 8 97 table data you change 8 23 tables reviewing error terms 8 21 tape eraser bulk for use in deg
367. o the 8360 source asking for identification and the source sends back its identifying string if the communication is successful Front Panel Emulator 2 This is primarily used to access the menus resident in 836X1 sources that do not have a front panel It is used to perform diagnostics and calibration of the source This is done by using a combination of the softkeys on the 85101C and hardkeys on the 85102 A front panel overlay for the 85102 shows the location and function of the keys on the 85102 that access the menus and control the various source functions The front panel overlay is shown in the available service tools section in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Change GPIB HP IB Address default is 19 3 This allows you to select the source within a system to be addressed by the front panel emulator This is used if the system has multiple sources i e RF and LO or an RF source at a different GPIB address than the default Make sure that the dip switches on the desired source are set the same as this selection The default address for an RF source in an 8510 system is 19 The default address for an LO source is 18 4 122 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 123 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 8510C Service Program Menu CRT Insert 11x17 side 1 File rr59c Remove This Page Formt117 4
368. oard covers inside the 85102 Reference designators W19 W27 W28 W30 W32 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W38 W40 and W41 For additional information on the location of specific cables see Figure 5 22 85102 Cable Locations 4 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the A24 processor interface board See item 2 Figure 6 8 Disconnect the wire harness assembly from A25J2 on the motherboard Remove two screws item 1 from the left side frame and disconnect the ground wires Disconnect all wires from the transformer N Remove the rear panel To Reassemble 9 Reverse the preceding steps Torque screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Figure 6 9 2 places 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 27 Replacement Procedures Related Adjustments Procedures Related Adjustments Procedures When an assembly is replaced adjustments may be necessary to assure the analyzer meets its specifications Use Table 7 3 to identify the adjustment s required after replacing an assembly In addition to any necessary adjustments performance verification may be needed depending on the assembly replaced 6 28 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 Adjustments 7 1 Adjustments Overview Overview This chapter provides adjustment procedures for the 8510 network analyzer These procedures should be used 1 after replacement of a part or 2 when performance tests show that the specification cannot be met Table 7 1 lists the adjustment proced
369. oduct in a cabinet the convection into and out of the product 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 3 System Installation Preparing the Site must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the product by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Air conditioning requirements depend on the amount of heat produced by the instruments Use the BTU hour ratings from the table below to determine the total rating of your system Each VA rating is multiplied by 3 4 to determine the BTU hour rating of each instrument To convert the total BTU hour figure to tons divide the total BTU hour value by 12 000 A ton is the amount of heat required to melt a ton 907 kg of ice in one hour Table 9 2 Maximum VA Ratings and BTU Hour Rating of Instruments Agilent Instrument Maximum VA Rating Subtotal Maximum BTU hour BTU hour Subtotal Standard Equipment 85101 Display Processor 250 850 85102 IF Detector 210 714 8340 Synthesized Sweeper or 500 1 700 8360 Synthesized Sweeper or 400 1 360 8350 with Plug In 375 1 275 851x RF Test Set 145 323 Standard System Total Accessory Equipment 9000 Series 300 250 850 19 inch CRT 98751A 98752A 98753A 4
370. oed Power Failures and perform the troubleshooting procedures in that section to see if the problem is in the test set 1 If step 9 did not resolve the problem refer to Error Terms and use the information there to analyze the error terms printout made in step 8 4 96 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Performance Test Failures 11 If the verification still fails return to the main troubleshooting procedures to check the system hardware 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 97 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Software Failures Software Failures Overview Use the information in this section if you are having problems running the operating system or the verification software or controlling the system over GPIB Only use this section after going through the Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks in the Main Troubleshooting Procedure This section explains how to resolve software and firmware failures and provides a list of 8510 operating system revisions beginning with revision A 01 00 How to Resolve Software and Firmware Failures The following procedure for the resolution of software and firmware failures is in two parts 1 Make a list of programming codes or key presses Check the programming code descriptions with the documentation to verify that the intended operation is valid 2 List all system components and the 8510C and source firmware revisions
371. oller Keyboard Keys The program is capable of responding to many of the BASIC operating system key presses including INSERT CHAR DELETE CHAR INSERT LINE etc Controller Displays with Limited Scrolling Capabilities Some controllers do not have enough screen memory to allow you to scroll through a display of a table This is especially true for high resolution monitors Agilent recommends that you always print out the specifications DUT Length N cm and Default S Parameter Values A default DUT length and the values of the other three S parameters will always appear on uncertainty and dynamic accuracy plots This length is based on a 10 cm airline The DUT length for data sheet values is 0 cm For the reflection plots 511 or 522 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 and 12 11 and 22 0 linear and 21 12 Explanation of the Wording on Tables Origin date the verification kit was certified Factory verification kit disc data Field uncertainty calculated by the program Magnitude Errors Due to Device Frequency Response When measuring high frequency selective devices 8350B frequency errors can cause additional magnitude uncertainty As shown in the following filter measurement frequency errors cause a shift in the measured data resulting in a difference between the measured data and the actual data Also the measurement data shows increased noise due to the
372. on A10 Is Not On 4 103 Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and 4 103 Determine Why the Red LED on 10 Is On or 0 4 104 accorde 4 104 Check the A10 Preregulator and Related 4 105 Determine Why the Green LEDs on Are Not 4 108 Remove the Post Regulator from Its Motherboard Connector 4 108 Check the Fuses and Voltages 222222222524 62551 ERG RR bees dune wien 4 108 Contents 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents Remove More Assemblies AG RR RR vk ERE 4 109 Disconnect Display Power Cable CRT RR ER REX ous 4 110 Disconnect A15 LCD Assembly Cable and or A16 Backlight Inverter Cable LCD Only 4 110 spect Motherboard PROPIpE rCF 4 110 Fan Ireublesh dgtl 4 111 Pal SPAS DECIDES 4 111 Gheck the Fan u 4 111
373. on kit the kit normally used with the analyzer For this reason generating error terms at the time of installation and at regular intervals thereafter is recommended A log book can be a helpful to store the error term plots Error term plots are generated by performing the verification procedure Refer to the operating manual for information on how to perform a full 2 port or TRL 2 port microwave calibration To inspect the error terms or compare them to typical values refer to Error Terms in Chapter 4 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 10 6 8510C On Site Service Manual 11 Instrument History Instrument History Overview Overview This manual applies directly to analyzers with serial prefix numbers indicated on the title page If your analyzer has a lower serial prefix and you need additional documentation it will be located in this section The original HP 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted 11 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Index Numerics 8340 synthesized sweeper connecting to system 4 8 system compatibility using 4 8 8350B omit isolation measurement for 8 99 sweep oscillator as system source 8 96 8360 source front panel 5 6 8360 series synthesized sweepers front panel emulator description 4 22
374. on the sampler control pin to each sampler to verify TTL levels 0 volts turns the sampler on and approximately 3 volts or greater turns it off You can press the S parameter front panel keys to toggle the samplers Defective cable in the IF signal path Test set component failure A weak VTO bad power amplifier step recovery diode or 4 way power 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 65 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages splitter in the VTO 851010 A5 math CPU 85102 stop sweep cable not connected e Occasionally the 85102 A20 sweep ADC can cause this error accompanied by a Source Sweep Sync error message Troubleshooting Check the RF source to test set cable e Run the 85102 service program in the Run All mode e Run 851010 service program test 1 CPU 5 and the 85102 tests 2 A20 and A21 e Perform the unratioed power test in Unratioed Power Failures to see if the samplers are working e Check the IF test set interconnect cable If the test set is an 8514A or 8515A compare the S11 and S22 traces If one looks bad and the other looks good the 85102 and 85101C are probably working Therefore suspect a problem with the test set or the IF test set interconnect cable If both S11 and S22 look bad first suspect a problem with the 85102 or the source NOTE This check does not work for 8512A and 8513A test sets However you can compare the a1 and b1 channels for unratioed power levels Refer
375. onary for an explanation of caution and tell messages Messages such as those following are not documented in this section because they are not related to service and are mostly self explanatory FILE NOT FOUND caution type POSITION SLIDE THEN PRESS KEY TO MEASURE prompt type RECALLING CAL SET tell type INSUFFICIENT MEMORY error type 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 57 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Error Message Characteristics The general characteristics of each type of error message are described in the following paragraphs Caution Type Messages These messages are preceded with the word CAUTION and are accompanied by a beeping tone They usually indicate a problem with the 85102 IF detector test set source or disk drive They are the main subject of this section because they are related to hardware failures more than the other types of messages Except for those caution messages that are concerned with the disk or disk drive most of these messages relate to the hardware phaselock system For example if you disconnect the RF source power from the test set the message CAUTION NO IF FOUND will be displayed Immediately the CPU has determined that there is insufficient IF power and reports the error on the display However because the CPU uses the information supplied by the 85102 A21 IF counter assembly it is possible that this board A21 is faulty and not the IF signal Therefore be care
376. ons For additional information on performing system verification refer to the Total System Uncertainty Test Description later in this chapter Changing Error Term Values Before you start editing the error terms determine the characteristics of the equipment in your system that are not already defined in the software As an example you may plan to use a calibration kit that is manufactured by a company other than Agilent You need to determine the directivity of the load in this kit You may want to use custom cables if so you need to know the loss factor You also need to know which error terms to edit and what values to enter for the error terms changed Refer to the 8510 System Uncorrected and Corrected Error flowgraphs at the end of this chapter Review the error term labels and locations You need to understand which error term gets modified with respect to the unique components within your system setup In the Uncorrected Error Model flowgraph the device under test is identified with the labels 11 521 522 and 512 and is in the center of the graph You can use the location of the device in this illustration to help you determine which error term to change In there are examples to help you understand how to change error terms for some typically used hardware modifications Handling Customized Error Terms The information you need to understand about customized error terms is explained in this section The topics are listed b
377. ons and serial numbers of the 8510C and the source s used Check the 8510 revision by pressing AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS SOFTWARE REVISION Thelist of key presses or GPIB programming codes used to create the conditions that showed the problem This list was created in List Programming Codes earlier in this procedure Anyother details about the state of the system during failure that may be important to troubleshooting Contact Agilent If you need assistance contact Agilent by internet phone or fax see Contacting Agilent on page iii Your CE has access to a software tracking system that includes reports of known problems and their solutions or workarounds Firmware Revisions The following firmware revisions for the 8510A 8510B and 8510C are listed for historical purposes Information about any later versions used with the 8510C will be published as they occur 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 99 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Software Failures Table 4 12 8510 Operating System History Revision Analyzer HP Agilent Significant Contribution Number Part Number A 01 00 8510A 85101 100012 3 8510A first release Order A 02 00 A 02 00 8510A 85101 100012 11575A upgrade Contains latest 8510A Operating System B 03 00 8510B See Note 3 8510B first release Major speed and feature enhancements B 03 11 8510B 85101 80070 11575B up
378. or example plots of this measurement Press MARKER MARKER 2 turn the front panel knob In this 511 measurement the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and reflected back from the short Therefore the measured deflection value must be divided in half to reach the correct value Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable meets the magnitude and phase stability specifications 8 38 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Figure 8 9 Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability 5 log MAG REF is 1 V 0 0109 599 GORE SOGHZ TEST PORT C BLE CHP PNXBS133 F MS MAG PHASE STABILITY SQ DEG BENDO 0 02 24 75 INCH A 5 0 9 A MARKER 1 5 49 625934644 GHz Cable Connector Repeatability 1 To measure the cable connector repeatability connect a broadband termination at the end of the cable NOTE The connector repeatability specification that the specifications performance verification software computes is not related to this check It is determined from the same connector type as the calibration kit devices 2 Press the following keys on the analyzer CHANNEL 1 DISPLAY SINGLE CHANNEL DATA RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON 1 2 8 x1 3 To normalize the data trace press DISPLAY MORE MATH OPERATIONS MATH DISPLAY DATA gt MEMORY 1 MATH RESPONSE REF VALUE
379. ors in the instrument Perform the following procedure to discharge the power supply capacitors before performing the disassembly procedure 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 23 Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Capacitor Discharge Procedure 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove top and bottom covers Refer to Figure 6 7 for this portion of the procedure 2 the bottom of the instrument remove three screws item 2 from the plastic safety cover Carefully remove the cover taking care not to touch capacitor terminals eight large Pozidrive screws item 3 3 Connect the chassis of the instrument to earth ground 4 Discharge the capacitors one by one by attaching one end of an insulated clip lead to the chassis and the other end of the clip lead to the capacitor terminal large Pozidrive screws item 3 Do this to every capacitor terminal Figure 6 7 3 placesX8 places 8 places O o O To Disassemble 6 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Refer to Figure 6 8 for this portion of the procedure 1 From the top side of the rectifier board remove the two clear plastic safety covers Pull the top one off using the black handle Remove the four plastic screws to remove the lower cover 2 Disconnect the wire harness from the rectifier board Using a 1 4 in nut driver remove the eight hex nuts from
380. orward and reverse uncorrected load match errors a measure of the impedance match of the output port of a two port device including the match of test port cables Load match error terms are characterized by measuring the responses of a thru connection during the calibration procedure S11 for all test sets plus 522 for S parameter test sets Large variations in the forward or reverse load match error terms may indicate a bad thru cable or if a reflection transmission test set is used a bad system attenuator The measurements most affected by load match errors are all transmission measurements and reflection measurements of a two port device with low insertion loss for example an airline Transmission Tracking Etf and Etr Tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference channel and the frequency response of the test channel Large variations in the transmission tracking E terms may indicate a problem in the reference or test signal path in the test set or bad connections during the measurement calibration procedure Transmission tracking error terms are characterized from the transmission measurements of a thru connection in the measurement calibration procedure All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors Notes 1 The TRL thru reflection line calibration method uses a thru connection an airline and a short or open to obtain all twelve error terms No individual TRL device is ident
381. ot meet the specifications listed on the test record refer to the source manual for adjustment and troubleshooting instructions Swept Frequency Accuracy Test This check is helpful for systems that are primarily operated in ramp mode and is optional This procedure is not part of performance verification Performance verification requires step mode only The front panel emulation software contained on the 8510 operating system disc is required to do this test for an 83621 31 51 The analyzer keypad overlay is part of the front panel emulator kit 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8 12 NOTE The 8514 8515 test sets must have the ports unbalanced Connect long cables between the front panel ports and short cables between the back panel ports or vice versa 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 43 Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures Figure 8 12 Swept Frequency Accuracy Setup 8510 0 By SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER ooon n r 00 ee cooo 5 ser Q CABLE 55439 2 preset the system instruments press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET For 83621 31 51 Synthesizers 3 Run the front panel emulation software On the analyzer press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 1 9 LOAD PROGRAM DISC ZMARKER 4 LOAD FILE 2 FR
382. output match therefore 511 and 522 linear and 521 512 The value of 521 or 512 is varied For phase uncertainty calculations an arbitrary length of 10 cm is assumed If your device is longer than 10 cm your phase uncertainty will be greater than the value shown Likewise if your device length is shorter than 10 cm your phase uncertainty will be less than the value shown For system performance verification the S parameters of the verification standards measured at the factory are used in the actual uncertainty calculations NOTE At any time you can return to the hardware configuration menu and change any of the items For example if you change calibration kits you can print out the specifications for the same system with the different calibration kit and compare the results 7 Make the menu selections you want and press the Done softkey when finished The same keys used in the system specs menu are used to select and toggle the selections in this menu The program computes the values and the controller beeps each time the values for a particular frequency band are completed The table or plot appears on the controller display with a softkey selection for sending the display to the printer or plotter NOTE If you want to run the performance verification on your system keep the program running and refer to How to Verify System Performance on page 8 13 If you want to exit the program press the Quit Program key in t
383. pecifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications Both the performance verification and the specifications use the same software The program consists of a number of menus and forms that are selected by controller hardkeys and softkeys The program softkeys are always labeled on the display and correspond to the menu selections you make When you want to change an item or move to another selection you can use the program softkeys or the controller arrow keys up down or the Next and Previous keys NOTE Using the BASIC STOP or PAUSE keyboard keys will not reset the program Even pressing the keyboard BASIC RESET key will not reset the program s menus to their default settings The program keeps data in the controller memory so that you can perform other computer tasks when paused in the middle of the program You can then rerun the program without having to reload files The program database includes error models for hardware components of the system The software only generates specifications and allows performance testing for system hardware that is included in the database For example specifications for systems using cables other than those available through Agilent cannot be generated because error models for them are not contained in the data Refer to Substitution of System Components located later in this chapter NOTE Specifications for a system using an 8511 frequency converter test set can be generated u
384. ped swabs Dry the connectors with dry foam tipped swabs 3 Gage all devices cables and test port connectors The procedures for correct use of gages are in the calibration kit manuals Cable Check The following series of cable tests return loss insertion loss magnitude stability phase stability and connector repeatability can be done to check the stability of a test port cable This check is recommended to avoid spending a considerable amount of time on the verification only to have a failure caused by the cables Return Loss of Cables 1 Press STIMULUS MENU STEP 2 Perform an 511 1 port measurement calibration at test port 1 Use a lowband load and a sliding load for the loads portion of the calibration If your calibration kit is an economy grade use the broadband load only If necessary refer to the operating manual for a detailed measurement calibration procedure NOTE If the fixed load in your calibration kit is labeled BROADBAND you can use this load in the lowband portion of the measurement calibration Connect the test port cable to PORT 1 and tighten to the specified torque for the connector type Connect a broadband termination to the end of the cable To measure 511 of the cable and load combination press Parameter 511 To measure the return loss over the entire specified band press MARKER turn the front panel knob and look for the worst case S11 measurement NOTE The termination use
385. plies only to transmission measurements where The Upper Limit is 20xlog 1 error The Lower Limit is 20xlog 1 error lower limit always produces the larger uncertainty value Compute Choose from the worst case uncertainty RSS uncertainty dynamic range or test port power levels e RSS uncertainties are calculated with the RSS of all systematic errors but the 3 sigma values of random errors are still used for 99 7 certainty Dynamic accuracy shows the worst case uncertainty due to IF residuals and detector inaccuracies without the effects of noise frequency response directivity port match cross talk and connector repeatability Compute Using The uncertainty may be computed using Specification Data Sheet User Parameter user modified values The specific s parameters and electrical length of the DUT can also be entered This is important for determining the phase uncertainty of 8350B sweeper based systems 8 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Look at the worst case uncertainty curves data sheet for S11 and 521 magnitude and phase Notice that you can generate read out values on the display with the vertical marker Instructions about using the marker are in the section following Using Markers on Uncertainty Plots Refer to Table 8 3 for answers to the questions 1 On the 511 magnitude uncertainty
386. pment 9 6 checks operational 8 5 process 8 6 cleaning and gaging of connectors 10 3 CRT 10 4 glass filter CRT 10 4 LCD 10 4 test set rear panel extensions 10 3 clearance for adequate system cooling 9 4 clock adjustment 7 28 comparing measurement uncertainties for verification devices 8 47 compatibility source 9 12 component level troubleshooting 3 2 components degaussing 7 12 in system and effects of 8 3 resealing 7 4 substituting 8 92 configuring the system and connecting 9 11 in a cabinet 9 12 on a bench top 9 14 connections 9 18 of HP laser printers 9 18 of system configuration 9 14 9 16 connector maintenance 8 96 repeatability of a cable 8 22 connector repeatability 8 22 cable 8 36 connectors inspecting and cleaning 10 3 considerations safety for adjustments 7 3 contents of shipment 9 8 controller CRT displays and high resolution monitors 8 96 keyboard keys 8 97 controllers with limited scrolling 8 97 cooling and heating system 9 4 corrected error model flowgraph 8 82 8 83 8 84 creating customized uncertainty plots 8 16 CRT cleaning 10 4 glass filter cleaning 10 4 CRT displays 8 96 custom calibration kit use 8 23 custom data recall 8 20 custom test set calculations 8 23 customizing error terms 8 18 CW frequency accuracy test 8 41 D data field entry 8 20 default intensity adjustment 7 15 demagnetizing display degaussing 7 12 10 5 designators o
387. ports The 85101 controls the 85102 IF detector via a dedicated interface bus IF display interconnect It controls the test set and source via one dedicated GPIB HP IB port 8510 system interconnect and interfaces with an external controller printer or plotter via a second GPIB port In addition the display processor can address printers and plotters via two RS 232 ports Processor Assemblies Processor Assembly A5 performs all system control and computation functions This assembly contains The main processor or CPU a 68020 32 bit microprocessor Aseparate math coprocessor The main processor memory RAM 2 Mbyte The system ROM LEDsto indicate self test and subtest results Memory Board A6 consists of 26 EEPROMS arranged in 13 banks The main program resides in this nonvolatile memory NOTE The original HP 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted Some troubleshooting procedures schematics replaceable parts and replacement procedures may differ depending on the display installed In such instances display information CRT or LCD is documented separately Display Assemblies CRT Graphics Processor A4 provides an interface between the processor and display assemblies The CPU converts the formatted data to
388. procedure How to run the system specifications Interpreting the specification and uncertainties printout Measurement uncertainties Sources of measurement errors Generation of system measurement uncertainties System error models Dynamic accuracy error model Measurement traceability Substitution of system components 8510C On Site Service Manual Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Calibration cycle Reference information for performance verification and specification Performance test record Installation Chapter 9 This chapter describes the following Site preparation Checking the shipment and unpacking the system Configuring and connecting the system Checking the system operation Preventive Maintenance Chapter 10 This section details some simple procedures necessary to maintain the system Definition of an 8510 System There are many varieties of systems using an 8510 network analyzer In the strictest sense a basic 8510 system consists of the following 1 85101 Display Processor 1 85102 IF Detector 1 or more RF Test Set s 1 or more Source s Peripherals such as controllers plotters printers disk drives and millimeter devices may be added to the basic system Service Tools Available Special service tools used in the troubleshooting procedures can be ordered separately These include extender boards source emulator test set emulator cables and so forth T
389. provides troubleshooting information for the system and the 8510 network analyzer You may also need to refer to the service manuals for the test set and the source 4 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Troubleshooting Outline WARNING Death or injury can result from voltages inside the instrument when it is connected to ac line power Only qualified personnel who are aware of the hazards involved should perform service on this instrument when its covers are removed CAUTION Turn off the line voltage before removing or replacing assemblies to avoid damage to the instrument Use an antistatic work station to avoid damage from static discharge The troubleshooting strategy uses several different processes This main procedure explains the appropriate times when each of these troubleshooting processes should be used Control configuration and cabling pre operational checks These can quickly identify many failures Specific procedures for certain obvious failures When the nature of a failure is obvious the procedure goes immediately to symptom related troubleshooting steps Internal diagnostics The service program checks various circuits in the network analyzer Hardware service tools Test devices emulate the test set and source to determine if the problem is in the analyzer 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 3 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline W
390. r DOGUIS incon ek deb or RR AG RR BERRY aq 4 52 Contents 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents What to Do If the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 4 53 22 4 53 How to Identify a Self Test 4 55 How to Troubleshoot a Self Test 4 58 How to Access the Test Menu and Run 4 58 Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting yo 4 60 System Disc and Service 5 4 65 System Command 15 Run Main 4 65 System Command 16 Memory 4 65 System Command T7 Rerun 222222229414 iiir GER ERA 4 65 System Command 18 Repeat Test J dk nh ko Rc e RR ERROR UR 4 65 Disc Command 19 Load Program Euh EE e PRSE 4 65 Disc Command 20 Record Program DISC RARE 4 66 Disc Command 215 Initialize OSG cor oa
391. r connector J3 on the A8 motherboard A8JI keyboard cable A8J2 disk drive cable If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing it is likely that the assemblies just removed are not causing the problem e Ifall green LEDs are now on turn off the 85101C Reinstall each assembly one at a time and turn on the 85101C after each is installed The assembly that causes the A3 green LEDs to go off or flash is suspect It is possible that this condition is caused by the A3 post regulator supplying insufficient current To check this repeat the step but replace the assemblies in a different order to change the loading If the same assembly appears to be faulty replace that assembly If a different assembly appears faulty post regulator A3 is most likely bad unless both of the other assemblies are bad 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 89 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Disconnect Display Power Cable CRT Only Turn off the 85101C If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT remove the display power cable W1 see Figure 4 15 on page 4 84 Turn on the 85101C e Ifall green LEDs are now on replace or repair the A11 display e If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing continue with Inspect Motherboard Disconnect A15 LCD Assembly Cable and or A16 Backlight Inverter Cable LCD Only A15 LCD assembly is powered through the A14 GSP board Remove cable W7 from A14
392. ramp mode only A sweeper is fast but less accurate and sweeps through the frequency range as many times as the selected averaging factor 3 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation Test Sets Test Sets The standard test sets designed to work with the 8510 include the Agilent 8511 8514 8515 8517 85110 They differ in several respects operating frequency range dynamic range front panel test port connectors and internal RF path mechanics An identification code in ROM or configuration switches within each test set allow the 8510 to recognize each type at power up for proper operation Test sets have two main functions 1 To separate the RF signal into reference and test signals 2 To down convert the RF signals to 20 MHz IF signals after separation Test sets separate the signals with couplers or triax bridges During the RF to IF conversion the test sets maintain the phase coherence of the measured signals so that they can be kept in ratioed pairs after calibration Most test sets for the 8510 are either sampler based or mixer based A third type is the frequency converter Sampler Based Test Sets These test sets have samplers driven by a VTO The VTO acting like a second source or LO local oscillator enables the samplers to down convert the RF signal to an IF signal according to this formula LO RF IF Note that the LO frequency must vary as the RF varies to maintain a constant IF of 20 MHz The VTO
393. re 4 11 85101C Power Supply Simplified Block Diagram MOTHERBOARD A8 A10 PRE REGULATOR UNE POWER 5V DIGITAL LOW POWER FAIL WARNING Refer to the 85101C Power Supplies Detailed Block Diagram at the end of this section to see signal paths and specific connector pin numbers 85102 Power Supplies Summary The 85102 power supply consists of A power transformer with two center tapped secondary windings A separate bridge rectifier for each secondary winding Four regulators that supply 5 V 15 V 5 V and 15 V Filtered but unregulated supply voltages of 5 V 15 V 5 V and 15 V Fuses test points and LEDs for all regulated supplies The 85102 power supply troubleshooting procedure is located in this section after the 85101C power supply troubleshooting procedure 4 78 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Power Supply Failures Table 4 8 Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary 1 of 2 This summary gives an overview of the power supply troubleshooting procedure If you are already familiar with troubleshooting the power supply you may save time by following this summary instead of reading the entire procedure Headings in this summary match the headings in the procedure Troubleshooting procedures are preceded by a check 85101C Display Processor Supply Troubleshooting Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post Regu
394. re 9 8 Not applicable for 85110 8516 8517 4 10 T HP 8350 SOURCE ADDRESS 19 TO TEST SET To 85102 STOP SWEEP SWEEP OUT N TO HP 85101 8510 INTERCONNECT 3 For systems without controllers connect any peripherals to the 8510 interconnect on the 85101 For systems with controllers connect any peripherals and the controller to the GPIB connector on the 85101 4 An8340 or 8360 requires a source interconnect cable connection when the test set used is an 8516 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Refer to Figure 4 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 11 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Firmware Revisions Check the 8510C operating system firmware revision It should be C 07 00 or higher On the analyzer press SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS SOFTWARE REVISION Upgrading an Agilent 8360 Source For complete compatibility with 8510C revision C 07 00 or greater firmware your source must be an Agilent 8360 series source If an 8360 series source is not used quick step test port power flatness correction receiver calibration and power domain functions will not work Revision C 06 xx firmware does not support receiver calibration or power domain functions 8510 works with all 8360 synthesized s
395. rement calibration process would take approximately 30 minutes Also the test sets do not introduce enough crosstalk that this error removal is critical 8 94 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Parameter Step Resolution Software Configuration Menu The software configuration menu allows you to specify how many data points will be used to generate plot traces This is called the parameter step resolution size Using this feature you can increase or decrease the trace resolution on plots Since the grid scale is always a fixed size you can select tabular data to examine exact scale values Performance Verification Criteria A complete performance verification requires that you measure all of the devices in your kit Do not change any of the 8510 parameters or stimulus settings that the program uses for your system The averaging factor should always be 1024 for synthesizers for example 8360 8340 8341 and 128 for sweepers for example 8350B For sweepers the program always sets the 8510 sweep time to 500 milliseconds Remember that sweep time does not apply to synthesizers because the system is in step mode The four devices are slightly different for each configuration However every kit has one of the following 20 dB attenuator 40 or 50 dB attenuator Airline length varies with kit type e 25 ohm mismatch airline length
396. rent modes CORRECTION ON after measurement calibration These system specifications are values based upon residual errors after a measurement calibration as specified in the configuration menu by the type of calibration and calibration kit used These errors are the effective system errors CORRECTION OFF uncalibrated These system specifications are values based on the same system configuration but without a measurement calibration These errors are the raw system errors 3 Press the Next or Previous softkeys to change the selection in the window For example if you select All Tables Specifications dB and CRT and press the Done softkey the controller display will quickly display or scroll through the system specifications as explained in Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications later in this chapter You can temporarily pause the printing that goes to the display by pressing any key on the keyboard To continue printing again press any key 4 Make the selections you want and press the Print softkey to print them out 5 Press Prior Menu to return to the main menu 6 To print or plot dynamic accuracy or total uncertainty for the system configuration specified press System Uncert These specifications are available as plots or tables based on data sheet or system specification values with upper or lower limits explained in Reference Information for Performance Verification
397. residual FM of the sweeper 8 92 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Figure 8 20 1 15 9 LI I L 1I LL nr LL I lM LLL Wl l 4114 11 LL PI HII UI 11 IJJ I lI START 12 590000000 GHz STOP 0 100000000 GHz Measurement Calibration Method Before verification you must do a full two port calibration for systems with S parameter test sets and a one path two port calibration for systems with reflection transmission test sets The calibration method selected in the program is based on the type of load you use sliding load offset load broadband load or TRL Phase Errors Due to Device Electrical Length In measurements of devices with finite electrical length the frequency accuracy of the sweeper causes additional uncertainty in phase measurements The phase uncertainty 00 is given by the following equation DO 360 c F L Where c is the propagation velocity in a vacuum 3x1 0 cm sec DF is the frequency accuracy specification of the sweeper in ramp mode and L is the length of the device under test The following plot shows this uncertainty for the 8350B 83592A Figure 8 21 Phase error deg P 0 19 20 30 uo 590 60 Electrical Length 8510C On Site Service
398. rintout the results of all four measurement parameters Printthe error terms and examine them for anomalies near the failure frequencies Refer to Error Terms in Chapter 4 Make another measurement calibration and follow the flow chart on the next page Verify that the data disk from the verification kit is for an 8510 and not for an 8720 8 54 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure VERIFICATION FAILS VERIFICATION DEVICE REMEASURED PRINT OUT RESULTS AND CONTINUE TO MEASURE ALL THE VERIFICATION DEVICES FAILS AT THE SAME FREQUENCY WITH MORE THAN ONE DEVICE SUBSTITUTE CAL KIT SUBSTITUTE VERIFICATION KIT VERIFICATION KIT SUBSTITUTED GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER SUBSTITUTE ADAPTERS GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 55 Performance Verification and Specifications How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program The figure below shows a menu map of the system specifications and uncertainties program Step by step instructions follow Figure 8 16 START LOAD BASIC LOAD SPECS_8510 RUN PROGRAM ENTER DATE AND TIME HARDWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT HARDWARE HP8510 TEST SET SOURCE CAL KIT CABLES VERIF KIT ETC
399. roblem with 8360 series source firmware dated year 2000 and higher 4 100 8510C On Site Service Manual Table 4 12 8510 Operating System History Main Troubleshooting Procedure Software Failures Revision Analyzer HP Agilent Significant Contribution Number Part Number C 07 00 8510C 85101 80116 Allows 8510C to work with 8517B Option 007 and power domain functions limit lines dissimilar connector compensations and color printer compatibility features C 07 10 8510C 85101 80116 Compatibility to calibrate inside of a pulse instead of CW for TRL calibrations and minor bug fix C 07 14 8510C 85101 80116 Bug fix 8510 firmware problem with writing year 2000 and higher DOS file dates C 07 16 8510C 85101 80116 Bug fix 8510 firmware problem with 8360 series source firmware dated year 2000 and higher C 08 XX 8510C 85101 80116 Released to support 8510C equipped with color liquid crystal display LCD 8 1 Replacement of 8510A or 8510B operating systems with time domain option 010 must be ordered through Agilent see Contacting Agilent In this case the 85101 serial number is required 2 Revision A 01 00 is not orderable even though it has the same part number as revision A 02 00 Revision A 02 00 is available 3 Not recommended for replacement may contain many bugs 4 Included 11575J Upgrade Kit 11575J upgrades revision C 06 xx to the current version 07 or higher
400. rocedure To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove all handles and covers 2 Perform the front panel A1 disassembly procedure which removes the LCD assembly If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT perform the CRT display 11 disassembly procedure Perform the rear panel A9 disassembly procedure Perform the preregulator A10 disassembly procedure Remove all PC boards from the instrument m eo Remove all screws from the frame of the instrument The front and rear frame are now free from the motherboard card cage assembly To Reassemble 7 Reverse the preceding steps torquing screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib 6 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures This page intentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 15 Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A15 LCD Assembly Replacement The LCD assembly consists of the display glass the LCD and backlight and the inverter board Refer to LCD Assembly Details for replacement of these parts Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 5 To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove the top cover 2 Disconnect the LCD data cable W7 from connector
401. rocedure also called measurement calibration measures a set of calibration devices with known characteristics It uses the measurement results to effectively remove systematic errors using the vector math capabilities of the analyzer The residual systematic errors remain after error correction primarily due to the limitations of how accurately the electrical characteristics of the calibration devices can be defined and determined The random non repeatable and drift errors cannot be corrected because they cannot be quantified and measured during the measurement calibration and device measurement However the effects of random errors can be reduced through averaging Random errors that occur during a measurement calibration are part of the error correction and become systematic errors when the calibration is turned on For this reason it is best to use a large number of averages during measurement calibration to reduce to the effect of the random errors The averaging may then be reduced for device measurement The residual systematic errors along with the random and drift errors continue to affect measurements after error correction adding an uncertainty to the measurement results Therefore measurement uncertainty is defined as the combination of the residual systematic repeatable random non repeatable and drift errors in the measurement system after error correction Measurement uncertainties of any analyzer system are highly depende
402. rocessor The best approach to troubleshooting an 8510C when you are not aware of any obvious failure type is to verify that the 85101C display processor is working properly When its operation is verified it will act as your diagnostic controller Reduce the analyzer system to its basic structure Disconnect all peripherals such as printer plotter controller and all their cables The core system remaining should consist only of 8510 network analyzer test set source The system should be connected as shown in Figure 4 1 on page 4 10 If the 85101 display processor passed the self tests at power up without displaying self test failure messages 1 to 14 itis already verified to a 70 confidence level The following tests will verify it to a 95 confidence level Run all the tests in the 85101 Display Processor Service Program Menu on page 4 108 If a service program test fails follow the instructions in the Service Program section If all the tests pass the problem is almost certainly in one of the remaining instruments the 85102 IF detector the source or the test set or their interfaces Verify the 85102 IF Detector Next run the all the 85102 IF Detector tests in the service program This verifies the IF detector to an 80 confidence level 4 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont NO OBVIOUS FAILURE TYPE Verify
403. ror terms do you need to degrade to account for this cable Refer to Table 8 7 for answers TIP Consider how the cables impact your measurements The cable s known worst case loss is 1 85 dB at 16 GHz and 0 25 dB at 45 MHz You can determine the RF cable loss by assuming that similar to Agilent cables the total loss on these cables has a constant dc loss component and an RF loss component that varies with the square root of the frequency in GHz 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 25 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial The error term is Loss sqrt F GHz port 1 2 cable Use the following formula to calculate the error term assuming gt F Loss1 Loss2 Fi GHz F GHz 1 Question What is the value of this error term for the cables described above L1 Question Which transmission and reflection tests do you perform to determine the stability of the non standard cables Refer to the 8510C On Site Service Manual as needed While you are working on the system you perform a 2 port calibration Then you connect the cables together and store the transmission measurement in memory Next you bend the connected cables by the same amount that the cables are bent during a measurement Looking at 521 data memory you find the cable s transmission magnitude repeatability to as indicated below 0 02 dB for frequency range ending at 2 GHz 0 03 dB for frequency range ending a
404. ror Term Symbols Error Term Eterm Symbol Additional Information low Freq Cutoff port 1 2 to b1 b2t Source to a1 a2 low Freq Slope port 1 2 to b1 b2t Source to a1 a2 Drift Mag deg c port 1 2 to b1 b2t Source to a1 a2 Drift Ph deg c 2to b1 b2 Source to a1 a2 Drift Ph deg c F GHz Src to port to 1 2 Source to a1 a2 Loss dc port 1 2 to convertor b1 24 Source to a1 a2 Loss sqr F GHz port 1 2 to conv b1 b2t Source to a1 a2 Loss dc convertor to IFt Loss F GHz convertor to IFt Damage Levelt Power at conver for 0 1 compress Raw rms IF noise floor Residuals at IF Linearity of Xtalt IF Gain Err1 34 to 46 dBmt IF Gain Err2 46 to 58 dBm IF Gain Err3 58 to 78 dBm IF Gain Err4 78 to oo dBm Mag Error vs Phase Shift B1 B2 A1 A2 Fe1b1 Fc2b2 Fcsal Fcsa2 Fs1b1 Fc2b2 55 1 Fssa2 Dm1b1 Dm2b2 1 Dmsa2 Dp1b1 Dp2b2 Dpsal Dpsa2 Dpf1b1 Dpf2b2 Dpfsal Dpfsa2 Ld1b1 Ld2b2 Ldsa1 Ldsa2 Lf2b2 Lfsa1 Lfsa2 Ldvib1 Ldvib2 Ldvial Ldvia2 Lfvib1 Lfvib2 Lfvia1 Lfvia2 D1b1 D1b2 Dial Dla2 Pccb1 Pccb2 Pccal Pcca2 Rntb1 Rntb2 Rnta1 Rnta2 Rnfb1i Rnfb2i Rnfali Rnfa2i Lxb1 Lxb2 1 Lxa2 Gelb1 Ge1b2 Gelal Gela2 Ge2b1 Ge2b2 2 1 2 2 Ge3b1 Ge3b2 3 1 Ge3a2 Ge4b1 Ge4b2 Ge4al Ge4a2 Mpb1 Mpb2 1 Mpa2 Fac Comp Fac Comp Fac Char Fac Char Fac Char Typical
405. rrection off the test set channel B2 1 A2 errors with correction off or All Tables Table Type Choose Specification Data Sheet or User Parameter values Data sheet values are published in Agilent s technical literature The values do not include effects due to cable stability or system drift errors Specification values are used during system verification User parameter values are tables which have been modified by the user with the Edit Specs function To examine the error terms tables select All Tables You see displayed both the effective corrected and raw 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 21 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial uncorrected error terms Refer to Table 8 2 at the end of this section for answers to the questions below 1 Which effective error term would dominate when you measure the following a b 4 very good 50W termination A short circuit An amplifier with 10 dB of gain The isolation of a switch 2 What is the raw directivity at 26 5 GHz How does it compare to the data sheet 3 What is the difference between system and receiver dynamic range Computing Uncertainty Curves Exercise 2 Select System Uncert from the Main menu Review the following descriptions to learn more about a few of the menu selections Parameter Select the appropriate s parameter Format Choose magnitude or phase Uncertainty Limit Selection ap
406. rresponding bulkhead connectors they are connected to are kept clean Use a swab and alcohol to clean the rear extensions and the bulkhead connectors Be careful not to damage the center conductors of the bulkhead connectors Notice that these bulkhead connectors provide a direct path to the samplers The appropriate static precautions as outlined in the Microwave Connector Card and test set manual should be used to prevent damage to the static sensitive samplers ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations 8510C On Site Service Manual 10 3 Preventive Maintenance Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD 85101C Equipped with CRT Display A gasket between the CRT and glass filter limits air dust infiltration between them Therefore cleaning the outer surface of the glass filter is usually sufficient Use a soft cloth and if necessary a cleaning solution recommended for optical coated surfaces Agilent part number 8500 2163 is one such solution If after cleaning the outer surface of the glass filter the CRT appears dark or dirty or unfocused clean the inner surface of the filter and the CRT 1 Remove the softkeys cover a plastic cover through which the front panel softkeys protrude Carefully insert a thin flat screwdriver blade or your fingernail between the upper left corner of the softkeys cover and the glass filter see Figure 10 1 Be e
407. rt 1 Port 2 2 0 GHz 8 0 GHz 20 GHz 26 5 GHz ETerm ETerm What are the new Ldic Ld2c 0 25 dB 0 25 dB 0 25 dB 0 25 dB calculated values for port 1 and port 2 error terms Lf2c 0 40 dB 0 40 dB 0 40 dB 0 40 dB Crm1 Crm2 45 0 dB 41 0 dB 35 0 dB 31 0 dB Ctm1 Ctm2 0 02 dB 0 03 dB 0 04 dB 0 06 dB Cpf1 Cpf2 0 10 dB 0 10 dB 0 10 dB 0 10 dB Review the graph of the new error terms in the figures that follow The uncertainties are higher for the system using non standard cables than for the system using HP Agilent 85131F cables See Figure 8 5 and Figure 8 6 8 32 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 8 5 S21 Worst Case Uncertainty dB 521 Figure 8 6 521 Worst Case Uncertainty dB Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial 21 Magnitude Uncertainty Using Custom Cables 621 MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY DATA SHEET HP851 C HPHSISR 5052 TL 5 18 5 n 16 Dec 1992 pL FE ec pis Le 2 1 17 23 21 ae a as 7 I as Freq GHz a 1 ul i m 045 to 2 2 to 8 8 to 20 20 to 26 5 Length 0 0 cm 511 S12 S21 S22 05 f 32 01 S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref 40 000 045 2 048 2 B 836 8 20 060 20 26 5 189 21 Magn
408. s Table 5 13 85102 Board Location Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A2 NOT SHOWN PULSE OPT ONLY A3 NOT SHOWN PULSE OPT ONLY A4 NOT SHOWN PULSE OPT ONLY 5 85102 60203 1 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET NEW 28480 85102 60203 5 85102 69203 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET 85102 69203 A6 85102 60006 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY CLOCK NEW 28480 85102 60006 A6 85102 69006 BOARD ASSEMBLY CLOCK R E 28480 85102 69006 7 85102 60203 1 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET NEW 28480 85102 60203 7 85102 69203 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET 28480 85102 69203 8 85102 60008 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY 19 9 MHZ 1 0 NEW 28480 85102 60008 8 85102 69008 BOARD ASSEMBLY 19 9 MHZ L O R E 28480 85102 69008 9 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY 2 IF MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 10 85102 60010 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY TEST IF AMPLIFIER NEW 28480 85102 60010 10 85102 69010 BOARD ASSEMBLY TEST IF AMPLIFIER 28480 85102 69010 All 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY B1 IF MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 12 85102 60010 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY REF IF AMPLIFIER NEW 28480 85102 60010 SAME AS A10 USE PREFIX A12 12 85102 69010 BOARD ASSEMBLY REF IF AMPLIFIER 28480 85102 69010 SAME AS A10 USE PREFIX A12 13 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY 2 IF MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 SAME AS 9 USE PREFIX 13 14 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY A1 IF MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 SAME AS
409. s 4 109 green LEDs 4 101 voltages 4 102 display processor test 4 62 A4 display RAM test 4 62 5 multiplier test 4 63 5 processor EPROM test 4 61 5 processor RAM test 4 61 non volatile memory test 4 64 A7 data bus test 4 61 A7 disc controller test 4 63 A7 public HP IB test 4 62 7 system bus test 4 63 A1 timer clock RS 232 test 4 62 A9 interrupt system test 4 63 abbreviation in parts list 5 4 aborting plots and printouts 8 84 accessories 5 6 part numbers 5 6 accessories supplied 9 7 adapters test port 8 83 ADC cal failed 4 73 ADC not responding 4 73 addresses of system instruments 9 15 9 16 adjustments 7 1 background intensity 7 14 equipment required 7 9 equipment required for 7 3 failure during 7 2 function of 7 3 individual procedures clock 7 28 display degaussing demagnetizing 7 12 display intensity 7 14 IF amplifier 7 22 IF mixer 7 19 sweep ADC gain 7 16 vertical position and focus 7 10 individual synchronous adjuster 7 25 maximum intensity 7 15 procedures table of all 7 5 related 7 3 semi automated driver files for 7 4 extension files for 7 4 tools 7 3 warning 7 3 air conditioning of system 9 4 airflow 10 2 altitude requirements 9 3 amplifier adjustment to IF 7 19 applying power to instruments 9 15 9 19 assemblies exchange 5 2 attaching flanges to instrument 9 12 autorange cal failed 4 74 available service tools 5 8 B1 channel errors
410. s A14 A15 GSP Address Decoder Stimulus Loop 1 This test strobes the interface address lines between the CPU and the graphics system processor GSP for oscilloscope troubleshooting A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 1 0 board LED 1 is lit to indicate this test is active to help the troubleshooter who may not have a functioning display The scope pattern is not clear except to those familiar with the patterns of good working units GSP Data Line Stimulus Loop 2 This test sends a continuous loop of walking 1s to the CPU GSP interface data lines for scope troubleshooting LED 2 is lit to indicate an active test A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the 71 0 board Press the recessed front panel TEST button to exit this test Ramp Background DAC Loop 3 CRT or Ramp Background DAC Loop 3 LCD A continuous negative going staircase pattern should be seen at TP4 on the 4 or A14 LCD GSP board A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 1 0 board This signal is generated by applying a digital ramp to the background or backlight DAC LEDs 1 and 2 are lit to indicate that the test is active Ramp Intensity DAC Loop 4 CRT or Ramp Intensity DAC Loop 4 LCD A continuous negative going staircase pattern should be seen at TP5 on the 4 or A14 LCD GSP board A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 1 0 board This signal is generated by applying a digital ramp to the intensity or unused DAC
411. s Printouts Example 8 4 NOTES o N NOTE 8 60 Raw Test Port Errors System Specifications Test Port Errors Correction OFF suaBRA4ARASRORAORARRAZESERAENSEGEENTATSSEARASSOSEMEOESESESESERSRESUEREEREETAAnNEE HP8510B Enhanced Model 5 168003 2 4mm S Parameter 45MHz 40GHz HP836X016 83 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz HP8S SBA 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cables HP85133D pair short cables 7 4ma 2 4mm s 2 8 ss s Frequency 6Hz Description Of Error Tara iSymbl 045 2 2 20 20 36 36 40 Network Analyzer Test Set Source Calibration Kit Drift Source Frequency GHz Dsf 0 0940 2 002 0 000 0 002 Rau Fud Directivity dB i 14 00 77 00 7 08 7 00 Fud Reflection tracking 48 27 9000 8 0000 19 0008 Source match dB IRFs 10 00 18 30 7 00 6 50 Raw Fwd Crosstalk dB Rfc 85 20 85 00 71 00 65 00 Raw Fwd Transmission tracking dB Rft 119 0000 16 0000 12 0000 74 0000 Raw Fwd toad match dB SRF 18 00 10 00 7 00 7 00 low Freq Cutoff Source to porti 0 000 0 000
412. s explained above The differences are that the switch splitter is switched to the reverse path position and that the a2 sampler is used in the reference signal path A similar process occurs during reverse measurements when RF power is applied to port 2 of the test set The LO signal generated by the VTO driver is phase locked to the source so that the desired VTO harmonic is 20 MHz greater than the source frequency The phase locked loop process is described in the System Phase Lock Operation section of this chapter 85102 IF Detector The IF detector is the first half of the 8510 network analyzer It performs a second down conversion of the signals detects them and digitizes and multiplexes them for input to the display processor It also functions as part of the phase locked loop For the most part it is controlled by the display processor 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 7 Theory of Operation 85102 IF Detector The assemblies of the IF detector can be classified in four categories signal path control phase locked loop and miscellaneous Signal Path Assemblies The signal path assemblies down convert detect digitize and multiplex the signals Figure 3 4 Signal Path Assemblies of IF Detector IF Mixers A9 A11 A13 A14 buffer filter and mix the 20 MHz signals with the 19 9 MHz LO signal down to 100 kHz The assemblies are electrically and mechanically identical 19 9 MHz Local Oscillator A8 assembly provides
413. s in the 85102 There is a specific signal flow that corresponds to the arrangement of the boards in this instrument Therefore it is recommended that you use the Run All mode first whenever you suspect a problem or replace a board in this instrument This Run All mode will run all the tests in a specific order Later you can run the tests individually Also the Run All or any individual tests can be looped repeatedly to look for intermittent errors Again because of the interdependence of the boards it is possible to fail a specific test although the real failure is due to a problem on a different board This is because the other board provided a faulty signal to the board that appeared to fail 4 116 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program The following sequence is recommended to minimize the chance of erroneous test failures When running the tests separately run them in the order below 1 ADC control test A19 2 Sweep ADC A20 ADC A18 and 100 kHz IF amplifiers A10 A12 3 Cal DAC 17 Mixers 9 A11 A13 14 synchronous detectors 5 7 and all others If the Test Does Not Verify or Isolate the Failure If after running these service program tests you suspect a single board use the Run All mode first and then run the single board test afterward If running the test does not verify the failure refer to Other Failures That section contains additional information about som
414. s now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP478A is now model number Agilent 478A Safety and Regulatory Information Review this product and related documentation to familiarize yourself with safety markings and instructions 8510C On Site Service Manua before you operate the instrument This product has been designed and tested in accordance with international standards WARNING The WARNING notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION The CAUTION notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to the product or loss of important data Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Instrument Markings ICES NMB 001 1SM1 A When you see this symbol on your instrument you should refer to the instrument s instruction manual for important information This symbol indicates hazardous voltages The C tick is a registered trademark of the Australian Spectrum Management Agency This symbol indicates that the instrument requires alternating current ac input The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Comm
415. s show values that are already included in the data sheet or system specifications Their use is limited to inspecting the flowgraph error terms that exist between the 8 96 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications coupler or bridge and the sampler Test Set Rear Panel Extension Links The program will prompt you to use the long or short test set rear panel extension links depending on the test set and the cables you have selected A rule of thumb for these extension links is Reflection transmission test sets use short links parameter test sets use long links Trim Sweep Procedure The 8510 trim sweep procedure is especially designed for use with 8350B 8340 and 8341 sources not necessary for 8360 in ramp mode The procedure will improve the frequency accuracy of your system It does this by aligning more closely the 8510 frequencies to those of the sweeper Refer to 8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources in this reference section Uncertainty and Dynamic Accuracy Limits Upper or Lower The uncertainty and dynamic accuracy menu in the uncertainty portion of the software allows you to select lower or upper uncertainty limits The limits only apply to transmission measurements If you did select the upper limit for a reflection measurement its value would be the same as the lower limit For transmission measureme
416. sembly refer to Other Failures and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test Referto Unratioed Power Failures to check source operation System Bus Address Error This message is displayed if the address of any 8510C system instrument is wrong or not recognized by the 85101C CPU Probable cause of failure The source 19 test set 20 or plotter is at the wrong GPIB HP IB address or their line power is off GPIB cable is not connected GPIB cable or connector is faulty 851016 A7 1 0 assembly GPIB portion Testset A4 GPIB assembly Troubleshooting Run the 85101C service program test 2 A7 Runthe service program GPIB test for the test set A4 board e Check the cabling and the addresses on all instruments e Check the 8510C addresses Press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM HP IB ADDRESSES System Bus SRO Error The 8510C system bus SRO line is stuck and is not responding Probable cause of failure Test set A4 GPIB assembly Source GPIB assembly 85101C A7 1 0 assembly e GPIB circuitry of any peripheral on the bus Bad GPIB cable or connector 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 69 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Troubleshooting Run 8510C Service program test 2 A7 Run the service program test for the test set A4 GPIB board e Check all GPIB cables and all addresses Test Set GPIB HP IB Syntax Error The test set does not respond to a known good GPIB command Probable c
417. sing this software refer to Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications in this chapter However the performance verification must be performed with 8511 performance verification software shipped with 8511 frequency converters NOTE For 8510 systems that have their own system manual refer to that manual for performance verification instructions 8 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance Equipment The table below shows the equipment required to do the system performance verification and to run the specifications measurement uncertainties program Table 8 1 Equipment Required e 8510C network analyzer and accessories test set source For PC based Performance Verification Laptop or PC running BASIC for Windows Rev 6 32 or greater under Windows 95 98 NT GPIB card for PCs National Instruments or Hewlett Packard PCMIA card for Laptops National Instruments e For workstation based Performance Verification HP 9000 200 or 300 series controller except 9826 and 981 64 with 4 megabytes of available memory after loading BASIC 1 megabyte memory boards are available for all 200 and 300 computers Other controllers include HP Vectra 386 with an HP 82300C BASIC language processor card UNIX based workstation with Rocky Mountain BASIC RMB Various workstations with BASIC 5 0 or hi
418. so go to next page Self Test Failures If a self test failure message appears refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks If necessary see Self Test Failures Otherwise go to next page ss416c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 5 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Running Error Messages Running error messages are the messages numbered 15 or higher listed on the right side of the 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram They occur if the CPU detects an error during normal operation When an error is detected and a running error message is displayed the system usually continues to make measurements Before troubleshooting a running error message be sure it is consistent and repeatable Press ENTRY OFF to remove the message from the screen then press MEASUREMENT RESTART to initiate another sweep Many times a message such as PHASE LOCK LOST is only a momentary loss of lock that can be corrected on the next sweep If the message disappears there is no real problem If the message repeats go to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks and then if necessary to Running Error Messages Unratioed Power Failures A standard analyzer measurement is a ratio of two signals For troubleshooting purposes the frequency response of one signal only is checked in an unratioed absolute power mode through each of the signal paths Observed problems can then be i
419. so the power supply is now verified with a confidence level increased to 10096 If any of the test points does not measure 5 Vdc the supply is probably being loaded down by another assembly Switch off the instrument and try removing assemblies one at a time Switch on power after removing each and switch off power again before removing the next Check the 5 V LED on A15 after each assembly is removed When removing a particular assembly causes the LED to light that assembly is probably defective and should be replaced If removing assemblies does not cause the 5 V LED to light the fault is probably in the A15 regulator Replace A15 Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier Check the four green LEDs on rectifier A26 They should all be on If all the LEDs are off check the power line module and P1 connector plug one LED is out check the continuity of the corresponding fuse See Figure 4 19 e Ifan LED is off but its fuse is good 26 is bad replace it Ifyou change a fuse its LED is still out go to Check Connector P1 to check the continuity of P1 and the unloaded ac secondary voltages from transformer T1 e Ifthe LEDs are on this means that voltages are present but it does not necessarily mean they are at the correct values 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 93 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Figure 4 19 A26 Rectifier Fuse Locations
420. solated to the components in the faulty signal path Go to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks and then follow the procedures in Unratioed Power Failures on page 4 73 Other Obvious Failure Types Sometimes the nature of a failure may be obvious to a trained Agilent 8510 repair person and you can go straight to the troubleshooting section for that type of failure Obvious failure types in addition to self test failures running errors and unratioed power failures are power supply failures performance test failures and software failures These failures may or may not seem obvious It is not important to be able to recognize them the total troubleshooting sequence will isolate them Power Supply Failures If the analyzer appears dead or the display is dark or the fan is not operating properly or the front panel LEDs are either not functioning or all remain lit go to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then to Power Supply Failures on page 4 77 Performance Test Failures If you have performed the verification procedures in Chapter 8 and any part of the tests resulted in a failure go to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then to Performance Test Failures on page 4 96 Software Failures If you have trouble running the operating system or if there are problems controlling the system over GPIB go to Control Configurat
421. sor This code works in conjunction with configuration switches in the test set 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 5 Theory of Operation Test Sets The 4 board also controls several assemblies within the test set via a separate data address bus The bus enables the A4 processor to do the following Read the configuration switches Select the sampler s required to measure the desired signal Operate the front panel LEDs Program the switch splitter and any programmable attenuators Monitor the test set temperature and notify the display processor if it gets too hot Test Set Power On Sequence When power is applied to the test set the A15 regulator board produces a power on reset signal PWON PWON resets the control logic of the test set When the power supply voltages are at their required levels the PWON low to high signal transition resets the processor the GPIB chip and a data latch on the A3 summing amp board Resetting the processor initiates a test set self test program that checks the integrity of the ROM and RAM located on the A4 board Resetting this data latch turns on all of the samplers in the test set The general effect of PWON is to put the test set in a default state at the time of power on This allows the test set to function even if the A4 GPIB board is defective or if there is no communication between the 85101 and the test set Test Set Typical RF Path The RF signal from the source enters the test
422. sor and 85102 IF detector power supplies to the assembly level The procedures are designed to let you identify the bad assembly in either the 85101C or 85102 power supply in the shortest possible time The 85101C and 85102 supplies provide dc voltages to their own units independently It is assumed that you know which unit has the suspected bad supply If they are both suspected bad begin by troubleshooting the 85101C power supply 85101C Power Supplies Summary Included are a short power supply troubleshooting summary and a longer in depth procedure The summary is provided for troubleshooters who are familiar with the 85101C power supply circuitry The in depth procedure is provided for troubleshooters having minimum familiarity with the operation of the 8510C power supplies Refer to Figure 4 11 The 85101C display processor power supply consists of the following assemblies A10 preregulator assembly A3 post regulator board assembly All assemblies are related to A10 and A3 since power is supplied to each assembly Therefore a failure of any assembly can affect the power supply NOTE The 85101C equipped with an LCD uses the same A10 and A3 assemblies as an 85101C equipped with a CRT display The 65 V supply from the A3 post regulator is not used in the 85101C with an LCD and ends at the motherboard connector for A3 Refer to Figure 4 11 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 77 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Power Supply Failures Figu
423. sshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color convergence linearization alignment This is useful when aligning the LCD in the bezel 4 36 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure LCD Failures A16 Backlight Inverter Board Circuit Description The A16 inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the backlight lamp in the A15 LCD assembly This assembly takes the 5 Vdc from the 14 GSP and converts it to approximately 680 Vac steady state At start up the voltage can reach up to 1 5 kVac There are two control lines digital ON OFF analog brightness 100 6 intensity is 0 V 50 96 intensity is 4 5 V WARNING High voltage is present on the inverter board Be careful when measuring signals and voltages on the board Make sure the plastic cover on the inverter board is held securely in place by one of the mounting screws This cover protects against inadvertent contact with the high voltage generated by the inverter Verifying the Inverter Board and Backlight Lamp Remove the top cover of the instrument to facilitate troubleshooting Using Figure 4 5 as a reference measure the signals and voltages indicated in Table 4 4 If the signals and voltages measure correctly the inverter board is functioning properly Figure 4 5 A16 Inverter Board Test Point Locations DETAIL CN2 Probe Here for Metal Contact To A14 Board 9 14
424. st and reference amplifier boards A10 and A12 respectively to pass and amplify the 100 kHz IF signals Other causes of failure of this test may be Faulty A24 processor interface board e Faulty 100 kHz IF address decoder on the A6 clock board e Faulty 100 kHz Cal signal on the clock board e f both boards A10 A12 fail the clock is probably faulty Synchronous Detector Test 5 A7 6 This test verifies that both Ab and A7 synchronous detector boards are working properly It is also used to detect failures with the A17 sample and hold board circuitry However you must run the ADC test A18 and 100 kHz IF amp test A10 A12 before running this test If those tests pass then you can run this test and have confidence in the results Other causes of failure of this test may be Faulty A18 ADC and or A19 ADC control board Faulty A10 or A12 IF amplifiers e Faulty clock board 20 MHz Mixer Test A9 A11 A13 14 7 This test verifies the ability of the A9 A11 A13 and A14 mixer boards to downconvert the 20 MHz IF signals to 100 kHz This test is a good example of the use of the 20 MHz output of the 85102 Before running this test be sure that the 100 kHz IF amplifier test A10 A12 has passed Other causes of failure of this test may be e Faulty A10 A12 IF amplifier boards e Faulty 20 MHz signal from the A6 clock board e Faulty 19 9 MHz signal from the A8 LO generator Pretune Phase Lock Test
425. start and stop frequencies The sweep analog to digital converter ADC controls when to trigger the sample and hold amplifiers so that the data will be taken at the correct frequencies The A20 sweep ADC board generates a staircase waveform that tracks the sweep voltage from the source This procedure adjusts the sweep ADC gain to compensate for component tolerance in the staircase generation circuit 1 Sos 09 After loading BASIC into the controller memory insert the 85102 Service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC Type LOAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE When the program is loaded press RUN Press the softkey that selects the sweep ADC adjustment Switch off the analyzer power Configure the equipment as the controller display shows Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller The following prompt is displayed ADJUST GAIN R26 FOR 300 0 3mUnits Refer to Figure 7 4 for the location of A20R26 Adjust A20R26 so that the mUnit shown on the analyzer display is 300 0 3 Refer to Figure 7 5 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 15 Adjustments Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment Figure 7 4 Location of Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment les E 2 20 A
426. subparagraphs c 1 and c 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 for other agencies Documentation Warranty THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING CHANGED WITHOUT NOTICE IN FUTURE EDITIONS FURTHER TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW AGILENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH REGARD 0 THIS MANUAL AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AGI LENT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CON NECTION WITH THE FURNISHING USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD AGILENT AND THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS THE WARRANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation ii 8510C On Site Service Manual Contacting Agilent Any adjustment maintenance or repair of this product must be performed by qualified personnel Contact Agilent by internet phone or fax to get assistance with all your test and measurement needs Online assistance www agilent com find assist United States tel 1 800 452 4844 or 1 800 593 6635 for on site service of systems Lat
427. summing amp board provides the control voltages to tune the VTO to the correct LO frequency The usually operates at between 50 and 300 MHz The LO frequency is a harmonic of the VTO Should the VTO ever go out of range the processor will generate an error message VTO OVERRANGE These test sets have a narrow IF bandwidth of approximately 3 MHz Mixer Based Test Sets These test sets have mixers driven by two sources The second source enables the mixers to downconvert the RF signal to an IF signal according to this formula LO RF IF Note that the LO frequency must vary as the RF varies to maintain a constant IF of 20 MHz These test sets have a wider IF bandwidth than sampler test sets 8511 Frequency Converter The 8511 is a sampler based test set without signal separation components couplers or bridges Its four front panel test ports connect directly to four samplers it is basically a four channel frequency converter Its assemblies are otherwise identical to the other test sets The special applications of this test set are documented in its manual and application notes Test Set Control Path The test set and the display processor communicate over the 8510 system bus and the test set interface The A4 GPIB HP IB board is the control center of test set communications and logic It contains an 8 bit microprocessor a GPIB chip and an identification code in ROM to initialize and identify the test set to the display proces
428. t The four numbered LEDs 1 2 4 8 briefly flash They indicate the number of the current test TESTING appears on the display The disk drive LED blinks LOADING OPERATING SYSTEM appears on the display The system has completed the self test sequence It is now loading the operating system software from nonvolatile memory into RAM using a program in the self test ROM SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATE appears on the display The self test ROM has turned over control to the program stored in RAM The initialization process continues INST STATE RECALLED appears on the display with a graticule grid and measurement trace see Figure 4 7 The measurement operating system software is now running 4 42 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Figure 4 7 Typical Power Up Display Ra PTT TT TT Tt a Ty Tg EEEER NN BE PTT TT 4 The type of display that you see depends on the contents of instrument state 8 This power up state is factory set to 511 log mag display over a typical default frequency range of 2 GHz to 18 GHz However instrument state 8 can be changed Therefore your display may appear different Subtests Subtests are the buildings blocks of most self tests Subtests further isolate a self test failure by revealing which part of the self test failed This information can help to further ver
429. t 8 GHz 0 04 dB for frequency range ending at 20 GHz 0 06 dB for frequency range ending at 26 GHz The 521 phase measurements showed 0 1 around 0 at 1 GHz You find the cable s reflection magnitude stability Crm to be the following values 45 dB at 2 GHz 41 dB at 8 GHz 35 dB at 20 GHz 31 dB at 26 GHz 3 Question What are the new values for the following error terms Refer to Table 8 8 to verify answers Port 1 Ld1c Lf1c Crm1 Ctm1 Cpf1 Port 2 Ld2c Lf2c Crm2 Ctm2 Cpf2 Task Knowing the information above press Edit Specs Enter the new values for the above error terms Use the Next and Tab keys to edit values a Enter the error terms Lf1c Lf2c Cpf1 and Cpf2 as constants over the software s frequency breakpoints At any frequency you can calculate the actual total RF loss with the following equation where x 1 or 2 depending on the port used Lfxc x frequency in GHz b Usethe following equation to determine the phase stability Ctmx Cpfx x frequency in GHz After allowing the software to recompute the uncertainties look at the uncertainty curves How do they 8 26 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial compare with a system that uses Agilent 85131F cables TIP Remember to select User Parameters when generating the uncertainty curves for the non standard cables Using Non ldeal Test Device Exer
430. t Cables HP851318 NE Origin 12 20 88 Origin 12 20 88 HES Test Numbers a Lomments gt ww wasaannssss i 521 MAGNITUDE dB 571 PHASE deg 144 lt Factory User Diff Total Factory User Diff Total Freq Meas d Meas d Mag Uncert Meas d Meas d Phase Uncert IGH21 81 A B 1 Bi A B 1520 110 20 105 005 078 2 000 20 117 006 878 20 128 00 089 22 151 004 090 20 171 003 089 20 193 405 057 20 202 008 089 20 251 003 4881 20 262 308 148 20 282 006 148 7125 19 124 002 146 1 174 18 174 147 1 113 64 114 4147 55 28 53 2146 i 7 46 B 143 i 67 99 67 42 1 B8 25 87 10 407 007 246 128 69 128 20 3S6 043 256 170 68 170 20 32 57 B8 109 85 119 087 280 1 49 10 48 005 298 8 53 8 1 1 I 1 2 z 2 3 12 40 3 35 48 3 62 48 3 88 50 4 12 4 4 36 34 4 43 39 5 21 35 5 63 42 5 95 5 30 6 54 NOTE Total Uncert Factory System Uncertainty User System Uncertainty PASSED 521 Verification Measurement of the 70 dB Attenuator NOTES 1 Time and date of perform
431. t display two cycles of the 20 Hz sine wave then suspect the 85102 A17 A18 or 19 boards Perform all of the possible tests for these boards to isolate the failure Source Emulator Tripler Test This test uses a source emulator in place of the source to verify system operation when the source is suspected of having a fault A 60 MHz signal is injected into the test set to emulate the source The tripler is a 60 MHz bandpass filter specially designed for the 8510 It operates by passing the third harmonic of the 85102 20 MHz output signal to the test set However almost any source that has a 60 MHz signal can be used The 60 MHz bandpass filter is listed in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Procedure 1 Connect the 60 MHz bandpass filter to the 85102 20 MHz out BNC connector Then connect a flexible RF cable from the filter to the test set rear panel RF input connector Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET After the system has done a factory preset change the source GPIB address to 31 Press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM HP IB ADDRESSES SOURCE 1 Then press 31 x1 Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET MENUS MARKER STIMULUS CENTER 60 M u STIMULUS SPAN 100 k m STIMULUS MENU STEP to set the displayed frequency to 60 MHz Press PARAMETER MENU USER 1 a1 RESPONSE SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user al parameter The LCD CRT should display a trace at the marker value of approximately
432. t in personal injury Do not proceed beyond WARNING until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS SAFETY EARTH GROUND This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing terminal An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the product input wiring terminals power cord or supplied power cord set Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the product must be made inoperative and secured against any unintended operation BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product is configured to match the available main power source per the input power configuration instructions provided in this manual If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral grounded side of the mains supply The front panel LINE switch disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the instrument Before switching on this instrument make sure the line voltage selector switch is set to
433. tch error If it does the problem is most likely the cable or the RF source Reflection Tracking Erf and Err Tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference channel and the frequency response of the test channel Large variations in the reflection tracking E terms may indicate a problem in the reference or test signal path in the test set or bad connections during the measurement calibration procedure The calibration devices used to characterize the reflection tracking error terms are the short or offset short and the shielded open All reflection measurements of both high and low reflection devices are affected by the reflection tracking errors 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 131 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Error Terms Isolation Crosstalk Exf and Exr These are the uncorrected forward and reverse isolation error terms that represent the leakage between the test port paths The isolation error coefficients are characterized when fixed loads are connected to both test ports in the calibration procedure Any signal that appears in the test channel is coupled from the reference channel The crosstalk term should be very small It affects both reflection and transmission measurements primarily when the test channel signal is at a very low level especially transmission measurements where the insertion loss of the DUT is large for example gt 40 dB attenuation Load Match Elf and Elr These are the f
434. ted by the program crosstalk noise on trace noise floor power ref power max and power min Review the modify edit key descriptions of the menu selections in Handling Customized Error Terms in this section Using a Custom Calibration Kit Exercise 3a You have purchased a 3 5 mm broadband load calibration kit from another manufacturer You want to use this kit on an 8510SX system to make reflection measurements at 26 5 GHz The known return loss of a broadband load at 26 5 GHz is 35 dB There is t2 phase error on both the open and short terminations 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 23 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial These factors require that you change the following error terms to the values listed v Effective directivity of 35 dB v Port match of 35 dB v Reflection tracking of 0 024 TIP In the hardware configuration menu select the 85052D calibration kit and edit the effective terms Remember to select User Parameters when generating the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve Ll Task Generate an 511 magnitude uncertainty curve for this measurement L1 Question How can you verify that the 511 magnitude uncertainty curve is correct Answers are provided in Table 8 4 Using a Special Test Set Exercise 3b You want to compute the S21 uncertainty at 26 5 GHz for a customized high power measurement setup using the same 8511A A block diagram of the setup is shown in Figure 8
435. ted later in this chapter Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 7 NOTES NOTE Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Raw A1 Channel Errors System Specifications Al Channel Errors Correction OFF Network Analyzer HP851 B Enhanced Model Test Set 5168003 2 4mm S Parameter 45MHz 406Hz 2 Source HP838X016 4 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz Calibration Kit HP85SOSBR Z 4m Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cebles HP85133D pair short cables 2 4mn 2 4mm Eterm Frequency GHz Description Of Error Term iSymbl 045 7 2 70 20 36 36 49 low Freg Culoff Source to Al GHz 2 9 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 low Frey Slope source to At 0 00 9 09 0 00 0 92 0407 0402 0403 04023 1518 1518 41518 11518 8146 0146 0146 0146 Dc to dB 119541 sar f ghz Source to dB iLfsal Oc cenVertor Lf Al dB Freg ghz to I f Al dB iLfvial
436. ted version of the detailed procedure on the opposite page It is provided as a quick summary to be used by people who are already familiar with 8510 troubleshooting NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT display The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted Some schematics diagrams replaceable parts and replacement procedures may differ depending on the display In such instances display information CRT or LCD is documented separately If your 85101C display processor is equipped with an LCD you will find troubleshooting information for the A14 graphics display GSP A15 LCD assembly and A16 inverter board in the LCD Failures section Also included are the following diagrams for reference in troubleshooting 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with a CRT display e 8510C System Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with an LCD 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with a CRT display 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with an LCD e 85102 IF Detector Overall Block Diagram e 8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram e 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with a CRT display 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with an LCD 85102 A25 Motherboard Wiring Diagram This manual
437. tem phase lock operation 3 16 VTO monitoring 3 20 phase lock failure 4 78 phase lock lost 4 79 phase lock sequence 3 19 pixel faulty 4 47 plotting aborting 8 95 label information 8 100 pens 8 101 traces on the controller CRT 8 101 plotting and printing 8 100 port extension cables 9 17 power cables grounding 9 17 power failures unratioed 4 85 power supply 85101C simplified block diagram 4 98 power supply capacitors replacement 6 26 power supply failures 4 6 4 97 power switch on 9 19 preconfigured systems 9 12 pre operational checks control configuration and cabling 4 8 preregulator replacement 6 13 preset check during installation 9 20 pretune failure 4 79 pretune lost failure 4 79 pretune phase lock sequence 3 16 preventive maintenance 10 2 using error terms 10 6 printer adapters 9 19 printers HP laser printers 9 18 connections 9 19 parallel 9 19 serial printer setup 9 18 printing and plotting aborting 8 100 printout of example raw channel errors al 8 63 a2 8 64 b1 8 61 b2 8 62 problems image 4 46 problems intermittent 4 111 procedures table of adjustment 7 9 process checks description 8 6 processor error 4 52 program modifications 8 101 pulse cal failed on test reference channel s or both channels 4 80 random errors 8 4 sources of 8 74 ratioed and unratioed responses 4 86 raw error terms record 8 6 rear panel checks 4 8 rear panel replacement 6 13 re
438. tensity Black four bands of Green each band increasing in intensity Black four bands of Blue each band increasing in intensity Black If any one of the four bits for each color is missing the display will not look as described Test Pat 10 Displays a character set for showing the user all the different types and sizes of characters available Three sets of characters are drawn in each of the three character sizes 125 characters of each size are displayed Characters 0 and 3 cannot be drawn and several others are control characters such as carriage return and line feed Test Pat 11 Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the EXTERNAL display It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes Each stripe should be clearly visible A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together This is used to test the quality of the external monitor Test Pat 12 Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting using an oscilloscope It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 20 times across the screen Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 20 ramps instead of one staircase between each horizontal sync pulse This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing circuit of the A14 display interface board Test Pat 13 Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color convergence of the external monitor Test Pat 14 15 Displays cro
439. terpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 12 NOTES 8 68 COON O ON G 77 Beo etuork Analyzer Test Set Source Calibration Kit Calibration Technique fest Port Cables Qe re naRLRRMRONERAMZERARLAAIGCOARMASMEREREEEZEREKESUAIEZZEXEENEXINXAXENXET QUAS p Dota Lireo Oen More BORO GOR Wa HAGE O79 QUI mu 2001 7 RSG OAM eoe eSI D D 424 OBES 000055 ie Ga AGAT 957 ase 000421 940 A455 Ma 9004 2 040 046 240 ue 512 800 11 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Table Sti DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS REAL Se oT ee 17 Nov 1390 6527 m m 13 10 06 Device Lengths 10 0 cm 519 Calor Model 517 2 4mm 5 45MHz S GHz HPB3651A Synthesizer 45MHz 50 06H2 HP850568R 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade SL Sliding Load Cal HP85133F pair short cables 2 4mm 7 4mm May Lint 0031 egd1b52 009747 009 008234 000245 000401 800454 900505 080555 UeG 0 000647 WORSE 000563 090610 000 3 0
440. test menu press 1 9 2 MARKER Select the program file labeled 8510C and press LOAD FILE to load the operating system program into the network analyzer from the program 8510C on the disk In about a minute the operating system should be loaded and running Refer to How to Reload the Operating System on page 4 55 for more information on reloading the operating system If the memory board has not been initialized refer to the 85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board A6 Tests part of the Service Program section The program file 8360FPE is the 8360 series Front Panel Emulator program It is not necessary to load this program separately as it is loaded automatically when the operating system 8510C is loaded See the 8360 Service Program Menu on page 4 122 for details on using the 8360 front panel emulator 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 53 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Self Test Failures Disc Command 20 Record Program Disc Use this selection to record a backup copy of the operating system on an initialized see below blank disk Use DEFAULT TITLE to select the default program filename 8510 Use REPLACE MENU to overwrite an existing program file on the disk Slide the disk into the disk drive In the Main Service Functions test menu press 2 0 ZMARKER Press DEFAULT TITLE and press STORE FILE to record the operating system program from the network analyzer to a program 8510 onthe dis
441. the instrument detect a failure so it will show self test error 14 sub test 2 Press MARKER again to enter the power up self test menu Disable the write protect feature on the blank disk by sliding the tab to the closed position Insert the disk into the analyzer and press 2 1 MARKER The disk is initialized when the analyzer display shows INITIALIZATION COMPLETE Press 2 0 ZMARKER When the disk is recorded write protect it by sliding the tab to the open position Checking System Operation The following system operation checks confirm that the system is functional and ready for performance verification or operation or both These simple checks are optional and primarily serve to establish confidence in the integrity of the system 8510 Self Test Press the analyzer front panel TEST activator to run the self test sequence Observe the display for the following sequence TESTING LOADING OPERATING SYSTEM SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATE Preset Check Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET on the analyzer The display should show a trace similar to the figure below Figure 9 10 Typical Preset State Display EE EXT ep EL Ls A eL Lj EIE E eec ERE 045000000 GH 9 20 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Making System Connections S Parameter Test Set Check 1 Press 512
442. the test set to execute certain commands Also these tests verify operation of the 5 attenuator switch driver board for S parameter test sets only These tests can be run with the test set connected to the entire system and also with the test set only connected to the 85101C For more troubleshooting information about the test set refer to Unratioed Power Failures Preset Test Set 1 This test initializes the test set to its own preset state 0 dB attenuation Power to port 1 11 display e Active light on port 1 The test set must be at GPIB address 720 or just 20 on the switches If this test fails the failure message will remain on the display even if you run any other test or if you run this test again and it passes To clear the failure message from the display exit this menu and return Switch Active Light 2 This test toggles the front panel active light when the ZMARKER key is pressed This test verifies that the light is working properly Switch Port 1 2 Lights 3 This test switches the two front panel LEDs on an S parameter test set to display all four possible states 00 01 10 11 This test verifies that the A5 board can switch power between the ports separately and together Also the test set A5 attenuator switch driver board has two LEDs that should also light as you press the MARKER key to toggle the power to all four states Activate Port 1 2 Attenuator 4 This test alternately activates deac
443. the voltage of the mains supply the correct fuse is installed the supply voltage is in the specified range SERVICING Any servicing adjustment maintenance or repair of this product must be performed only by qualified personnel Adjustments described in this manual may be performed with power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed Energy available at many points may if contacted result in personal injury Capacitors inside this product may still be charged even when disconnected from their power source To avoid a fire hazard only fuses with the required current rating and of the specified type normal blow time delay etc are to be used for replacement 8510 Safety Information In order to maintain safe operation of the 8510 system read and follow the specific instructions in the 8510C On Site Service Manual Safety Licensing 8510 Safety Information Warnings Cautions and Notes found in the instruments and throughout this manual Hazardous Instrument Areas with Power On Each instrument in the 8510 system has areas that contain lethal voltages when the instrument has ac power applied Figure 2 1 and Figure 2 2 show each of the instruments and their hazardous areas A shock hazard exists when the covers are removed Also the protective earth grounding on this equipment must be maintained to provide protection from electrical shock Any service or adjustment performed with the
444. ting environment ambient air temperature does not exceed 55 degrees C 131 degrees F and that the 85101C fan is operating fthefan does not seem to be operating correctly refer to Fan Troubleshooting fthere does not appear to be a temperature problem it is likely that the A10 preregulator is bad 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 87 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Inspect the A8 Motherboard If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of the A10 preregulator turn off the 85101C and inspect the A8 motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts In particular check the following lines between the A10 preregulator and the A3 post regulator GNDDSENSE 5VDSENSE 5V DIG DGND Refer to the A8 motherboard wiring diagram to troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines The wiring diagram is supplied at the end of the main troubleshooting section If the 10 red LED is still on after doing the above checks and isolating the A3 post regulator by removing all of the assemblies the fault is most likely in the A3 post regulator or the A10 preregulator If after replacing A3 and A10 the fault still exists them replace the A8 motherboard with a new motherboard card cage assembly Determine Why the Green LEDs on A3 Are Not All On The green LEDs along the top edge of the A3 post regulator are normally on
445. tion and Specifications Performance Test Record 8 100 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation System Installation Overview wa Overview This chapter provides instructions for installing and interconnecting an 8510 system in either a cabinet or a bench top configuration System installation consists of the following steps 1 Preparing the site 2 Checking the shipment and unpacking the system 3 Configuring and connecting the system 4 Checking the system operation The basic system is defined as follows 8510C which consists of an 85101C display processor and an 85102 IF detector e 851x test set Microwave source Peripherals such as controllers plotters printers disk drives and millimeter devices may be added to the basic system Options The following options are available for the 8510C Option Number Description 008 Adds pulse capability 010 Adds time domain capability 908 Adds a rack flange mounting kit without front handles 910 Adds a duplicate manual set 913 Adds a rack flange mounting kit with front handles W30 Extended service warranty 2 year return to Agilent W31 Extended service warranty 2 year on site Scheduling Installation If you have ordered on site installation and verification be sure that all system components have been delivered unpacked and collected at the installation site See Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System on p
446. tions It is not possible to modify this program Contact an Agilent system engineer for more information If you experience a problem with the program contact Agilent with a description of the problem Ramp Mode Operation for Synthesizers Ramp sweep is tested in Frequency Test Procedures as part of the system performance verification The performance verification software sets the synthesizer to a step mode for a system using a synthesizer as the source Do not set the synthesizer to ramp sweep because the program will not correctly execute its commands in that mode However the program will switch the source back to the step mode Remote or Local Operation The program automatically sets the 8510 to local front panel operation whenever it expects you to press any keys on the 8510 For example this would happen when you are expected to make a measurement calibration Remote operation occurs whenever the program is controlling the 8510 over the GPIB bus System Hang Ups or Other Problems If the system or the controller will not respond during verification press LOCAL andPRESET on the 8510 and re run the program If a printer is connected to the system cycle the power to all the instruments including the printer Test Set Channel Signal Path Specifications a1 b1 a2 b2 These specifications refer to the errors contributed by the test set from the test port through the coupler and onto the sampler down converter The table
447. tivates port 1 and 2 attenuators This test is used together with the following test to verify that the attenuators in the S parameter test set are functioning Increment Active Attenuator 5 This tests the test set attenuator of the activated port selected by test 4 above by incrementing attenuation in 10 dB steps 0 to 90 dB You may be able to hear the relays clicking as the values are changed The value of the sum of the ON green LEDs on the 5 attenuator switch driver board should equal the number indicated on the display 4 120 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program Select New GPIB HP IB Address 6 This test changes the address that the 85101C will seek when performing future test set GPIB commands Remember it does not change the address of the actual test set DIP switches If you use this routine to change the 8510C test set address remember to change the switches on the test set to match the changes you make 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 121 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Service Program 8360 Service Program Menu This menu accesses the menus and corresponding functions resident in the 8360 series sources This is done by communicating with the source over the GPIB sending commands to and receiving responses from the source GPIB HP IB Test 1 This tests the communication between the 85101C GPIB interface and the 8360 source GPIB interface The 85101C sends a command t
448. tivity Ers effective source match Err effective reflection tracking Efc Erc effective crosstalk effective load match Eft Ert effective transmission tracking Crm Ctm cable stability deg GHz Abi Ab2 dynamic accuracy F frequency The sources for dynamic accuracy error effects are from errors during self calibration gain compression in the microwave frequency converter sampler at high signal levels errors generated in the synchronous detectors localized non linearities in the IF filter system and from LO leakage into the IF signal paths Sources of Random Errors The random error sources are noise connector repeatability and dynamic accuracy There are two types of noise in any measurement system low level noise noise floor and high level noise phase noise of the source Low level noise is the broadband noise floor of the receiver which can be reduced through averaging or by changing the IF bandwidth High level noise or jitter of the trace data is due to the noise floor and the phase noise of the LO source inside the test set Connector repeatability is the random variation encountered when connecting a pair of RF connectors Variations in both reflection and transmission can be observed 8 74 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties The listing below shows the abbreviations used for random errors in
449. to a failure of the 8360 series source It indicates a failure of the source CPU CPU power supply or a phaselock unlocked condition Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information IF Cal Failed The 85102 A6 clock board provides a 100 kHz calibration signal to IF amplifiers ATO and A12 The 85101C CPU uses this signal to calibrate the 85102 IF amplifiers If the calibration error exceeds a certain limit the CPU displays this message on the display Probable cause of failure e 85102 100 kHz cal signal from A6 clock 85102 A10 or A12 IF amplifier e 85102 5 or A7 synchronous detector e 85102 A17 sample hold 4MHzfrom the 85102 A6 clock assembly to the A7 and 5 sync detector assemblies 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 63 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e Run 85102 service program tests 4 A17 5 A10 A12 and 6 5 7 Both the test and reference channels may appear faulty even though only one channel may have problem Swap the 5 and 7 boards and also the 10 and 12 boards as they the same to help determine if one or both of these matched boards are faulty fthe service program found no fault with any assembly refer to Other Failures and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test Further troubleshooting When the IF Cal Failed running error message is displayed the 85102
450. to and greater than 3139A will cause problem 83623 Couplers only will not cause problem 83624 Couplers only will not cause problem Workaround Increase your source power and use test set attenuators or use a source that has a coupler in its leveling loop The problem is caused by dc switching spikes from the test set RF pin diode switch getting back into the sources leveling loop and causing an unleveled condition If this is not satisfactory there are three upgrade kits available the 8514B 8515A 85110A 08510 60119 8517B 08510 60118 and the 85110L 08510 60121 test sets The upgrade kit will eliminate the RF switching spikes from getting back into the source leveling loop by installing a dc return between the RF input and RF pin diode switch inside the test set Contact an Agilent customer engineer for installation of these kits 4 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Upgrading an Agilent 8340 8350 Source 8340 41 and 8350 series sources are out of support life and no longer recommended for use in 8510C systems 8340 41 sources can work with the newer revisions of 8510C firmare C 07 xx and C 08 xx within feature limitations and with a minimum of bugs provided they have a source firmware date of 1992 or later The firmware revision for all 8340 41 series synthesized sweepers appears when the instrument power is switched on Please consult with your Agilent customer engineer for mor
451. to be installed Type RUN to start the program The initial screen displays the program revision and the data revision numbers These numbers are also listed on the disk label Refer to these numbers if you contact Agilent about your software product 12 Follow the instructions on the controller display to set the date and time When the correct date and time are set type Y at the prompt 13 The hardware configuration menu is displayed with a highlighted field around the active selection Use the Next and Previous keys to change the selection in the highlighted area Use the cursor keys to move the highlighted box to each piece of hardware Match the list of system hardware to your system configuration and select the calibration technique NOTE If the test set is an 8516 the source selection must be 834X016 or 8360X016 Older 8340 sources may require modification to work with the 8516 NOTE When generating specifications for 8511 systems select no source no cal kit no cables and no verification kit See Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications later in this chapter 14 To load the data files from the disc press Done 15 The program presents the main menu From here you can select one of four other menus System configuration System specifications System uncertainty Verify system A brief explanation of the menu choices follows System Config This menu presents th
452. tor kit 1 Connect the equipment as shown in the figure below NOTE If the source and test set operate below 500 MHz connect the test set output to the 10 Hz to 500 MHz BNC connector on the frequency counter The input switch on the frequency counter must also be in the 10 Hz to 500 MHz position Figure 8 11 CW Frequency Accuracy Setup SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER DO o o FREQUENCY COUNTER INPUT SWITCH 500 MHz 10 Hz 500 MHz 26 5 GHz 55440 2 To preset the instruments press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET 3 To set the frequency from the analyzer front panel press STIMULUS CENTER MENU SINGLE POINT and enter the start frequency of the source or test set whichever is higher Measure the frequency with the counter and record this value on the test record located at the end of this chapter 4 From the analyzer front panel enter the stop frequency of the source or test set whichever is lower For an 83640 or 83651 omit this step and follow the appropriate next step 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 41 Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures NOTE Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz input on the frequency counter The input switch must also be set to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz position Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at th
453. ts Figure 5 23 85102 Bottom Internal 3 places 2 places 2 places 22 used 55438 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 2200 0165 3 SCREW MACH 4 40 25IN LG 82 DEG 00000 Order by desc 2 2360 0117 2 SCREW MACH 6 32 375 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 3 85102 00036 1 BRACKET L REAR 28480 85102 00036 4 2360 0202 2 SCREW MACH 6 32 625 IN LG 100 DEG 00000 Order by desc 5 0380 0018 2 SPACER RND 25 IN LG 194 IN ID 28480 0380 0018 6 85102 00035 1 BRACKET L FRONT 28480 85102 00035 7 2200 1272 26 SCREW SM 440 5 ETPNTX 28480 2200 1272 8 5021 8403 1 FRAME FRONT 28480 5021 8403 9 2200 1271 8 SCREW SM 440 375ETPNTX 28480 2200 1271 10 0460 0778 1 TAPE INDL 75 IN W 25 IN T POLYU FM 00000 Order by desc 11 85102 00033 1 BRACKET R FRONT 28480 85102 00033 12 85102 00034 1 BRACKET R REAR 28480 85102 00034 13 2200 1272 8 SCREW SM 440 5 ETPNTX 00000 Order by desc 14 2190 0011 8 WASHER LK INTL T NO 10 195 IN ID 28480 2190 0011 15 2680 0129 8 SCREW MACH 10 32 312 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 16 85102 20053 1 COVER SAFETY 28480 85102 20053 5 46 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 24 85102 Front 4 places 2 places 4 places Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 1600 1423 4 VERTICAL LOCK FRONT 28480 1600 0367 2 85102 80116 1 DRESS PANEL
454. tting the time on your 8 95 Emor 8 95 Connections and Connector Maintenance 8 96 Controller Displays and High Resolution 8 96 8350B Sweep Oscillators as System 8 96 Bo SP ETE ADV Pappe b RR 8 96 8511 Frequency Converter Test Beta 2 2 22 2 4 8 96 BUS iesus dene DC ER cease RAE PRI 8 97 Controller Displays with Limited Scrolling 8 97 DUT Length cm and Default S Parameter Values 8 97 Explanation of the Wording on Tables ise eed RE r rbir dI GREATER XA 8 97 Magnitude Errors Due to Device Frequency 8 97 Measurement Calibration Method 8 98 Phase Errors Due to Device Electrical 8 98 dee ERIS Pad REN Pd dd
455. tton This re initializes the system reruns the self tests sequence and if no failures occur displays the power up instrument state number 8 If the operating system does not reload properly from RAM you can reload it from disk But do so only as a last resort Refer to Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc on page 4 53 If the Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc or the Main Service Functions test menu cannot be accessed because of an operating system or loading error then turn off the 85101C display processor Hold down the MARKER key on the front panel while turning on the 85101C Keep the ZMARKER key pressed until the keyboard self test failure message appears on the display Then release the key Press and release the MARKER key again and the Test Menu will appear Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc can now be used to reload the operating system If it does not solve the problem contact an Agilent customer engineer for assistance 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 55 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Running Error Messages Running Error Messages as Built In Diagnostics Running error messages appear on the 8510C display whenever the 85101C CPU detects an error during normal operation As a built in diagnostic test the CPU is constantly monitoring the overall system operation especially that of the phaselock between the 85102 IF detector the test set and the source Internal firmwar
456. u u uuu CR Aes ba Re aep RUE th do BE OS Adan pa gus 10 6 11 Instrument History DUE I MERERETUR 11 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents 11 Contents Contents 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Service and Equipment Service and Equipment Overview Overview This On Site Service Manual is a complete guide to test repair adjustment and installation of the 8510C network analyzer It was written for qualified service personnel Previous knowledge of a network analyzer system is assumed but specific knowledge of the 8510 system is not required This manual addresses troubleshooting to the faulty board or assembly not to the component level When the faulty board or assembly has been isolated contact Agilent and order the new part refer to Contacting Agilent on page iii In some cases an exchange assembly is available which costs less than a new part Due to the assembly level repair strategy schematics and individual component lists are not included in this documentation NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted Some troubleshooting procedures schematics replaceable parts and removal procedures may differ depending on the display installe
457. ual 4 95 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Performance Test Failures Performance Test Failures Overview A performance test failure occurs whenever the performance verification data is not within specification limits If you have performed the verification procedures in Chapter 8 and any part of the tests has resulted in a failure follow the steps below Procedure 1 The measurement calibration is the first thing to suspect If the failure was an S11 or 522 measurement suspect the sliding load open and or short connection made during the calibration If the failure was an S21 or 12 measurement suspect the test port cable and connectors 2 Check the calibration devices to be sure they are clean properly gaged and not worn out If the device has a collet or slot make sure it is not damaged Make sure all pin depths are correct The manuals for the various kits include the device specifications Refer to the connector care section for information about making connections and caring for calibration devices 3 Check the verification devices to be sure they are clean properly gaged and not worn out If a test set connector is out of tolerance when gaged it may be repaired or shimmed to bring it into tolerance refer to the appropriate kit manual If a test set connector is shimmed or repaired recalibrate before repeating the verification 4 Check the ambient temperature System performance is specified at an ambient temperatur
458. unds DO NOT attempt to lift the cabinet Do not allow anyone in front of the cabinet when itis being rolled down the ramp 4 Have at least two people roll the cabinet down the ramp carefully Hold back on the front edges of the cabinet with a person staninding on either side of it to avoid getting in the way of the heavy rolling cabinet 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 9 System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Repacking If it is necessary to ship any of the instruments the 8510 system pack each instrument separately in double wall cardboard carton made of 350 pound test material Place enough shock absorbing material around all sides of the instrument to prevent any movement inside the container Containers and materials similar to those used for factory shipments are available from Agilent See Contacting Agilent on page iii If an instrument is being returned to Agilent for service please attach a tag indicating the nature of the problem and the person to contact for more information about the service required Identify the instrument by model number and full serial number and list the other system instruments it is used with 9 10 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Configuring and Connecting the System Line Voltage and Fuses Set the line voltage for each instrument according to the voltage of the ac power source Typically line vo
459. unity If it is accompanied by a year it indicates the year the design was proven The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB 001 du Canada This text indicates that the instrument is an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product CISPER 11 Clause 4 This symbol indicates that the power line switch is ON This symbol indicates that the power line switch is OFF or in STANDBY position iv 8510C On Site Service Manual Safety Earth Ground This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing terminal An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the product input wiring terminals power cord or supplied power cord set Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the product must be made inoperative and secured against any unintended operation Before Applying Power Verify that the product is configured to match the available main power source as described in the input power configuration instructions in this manual If this product is to be powered by autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral grounded side of the ac power supply Battery Information The 8510C uses a lithium poly carbon monoflouride battery to power the instrument clock The battery is located on the 7 1 0 bo
460. upply Troubleshooting Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies The following paragraphs systematically check the assemblies to find the bad one Measure the voltages on A10W1 and at A3J1 Turn off the 85101C and put the A3 post regulator on an extender board See Figure 4 16 NOTE The A3 post regulator assembly has its own special extender board for troubleshooting Agilent part number 85101 60236 The connector pin numbers are reversed from extenders for the other board assemblies Figure 4 16 A3 Post Regulator Extender Board If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT ribbon cable W1 from the 11 CRT display may remain disconnected from the 4 GSP board during this procedure Disconnect A10 preregulator cable A10W1 from the A3J1 post regulator connector Turn on the 85101C and measure the voltages on the connector pins with a small probe Compare the measured voltages with the voltages listed in Figure 4 17 fthe voltages are not within tolerance replace the A10 preregulator Ifthe voltages are within tolerance the A10 preregulator is working properly Continue with this procedure Turn off the 85101C and connect A10 preregulator cable A10W1 to the A3J1 post regulator connector Turn on the 85101C and measure the voltages on the pins of A3J1 Compare these voltages with the voltages listed in Figure 4 17 Ifthe voltages are not within tolerance either the post regulator or an assembly connected to it is loadin
461. ures by the order they appear in this chapter Table 7 2 lists all adjustable components by reference designator name and the function adjusted Table 7 3 lists adjustment procedures that interact between assemblies and lists the adjustment procedures that must be done when an assembly is replaced or repaired NOTE Allow the analyzer system to warm up for one hour before making any adjustments The 85102 IF detector adjustments are semi automated Each adjustment procedure requires a controller connected to the 8510 bus labeled GPIB on the display processor rear panel The 85102 and Test Set Service adjustments disk is also required The system source must be connected to the system bus to do the 85102 adjustments A test set is not required Yet if a test set is not connected the following cautions are displayed on the analyzer CAUTION SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR and CAUTION FAILURE Both error messages may be safely ignored The 85102 IF detector adjustments are independent of one another You only need to do the adjustment procedure associated with the module that has been replaced 7 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations Safety Considerations This instrument is designed according to international safety standards However this manual contains information cautions and warnings that must be followed to insure safe operation Service and adjustments should be done only by qualifi
462. us 2 2 22 222 gt 4 75 Faile Fault Indigestion ON 4 75 x ml c r UEM 4 75 Failure RUAN sas sy eg ew hak dr di p Ab didt cilc ca ap das 4 75 Failure Gd sede 4 75 pr qe qud Ra pd ax do ed 4 75 8510C On Site Service Manual Contents 3 Contents E a Dn ddp 4 77 eos 4 77 Ll poe cates rm 4 77 Optional Function Not installed p05 2 lobe e RI RE RR ERR 4 78 Phase MOOK PAWN sicegccicncced dda deus ddl wane 4 78 Prase onk 2 eek See ees A usta 4 79 Pretune Failure Pretune Lost 4 79 Pulse Cal Failure On Test Reference Channel s or Both 4 80 Source GPIB HP IB Syntax Emor TU E ATA E ARTT AREA 4 80 Source Sweep bis SoG cones WEE E ERE E E dE 4 80 Sues HAB ci ocior ve nese Nant ee p REI
463. ustomized by the user That is systems already customized at the factory as special systems are warranteed however if you customize the system at your facility the performance warranty cannot be applied 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 13 Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance Figure 8 1 Flowchart for Selecting to Modify Specifications Run program and define Standard hardware configuration Configuration that most closely matches the special system Yes Run program and define the system hardware configuration Edit system specifications Yes term Recall File Select System Specifications System Uncertainties E or Verify System Recall No Modify Data Save as a file for system verification Select System Specifications System Uncertainties or Verify System 8 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance Choosing to Edit Specifications 1 After installing the software program press Hardware Config from the System Config menu Select hardware models that most closely match the equipment you are using Exact model numbers may not match but similar capabilities frequency range power range and so forth need to be matched as closely as possible Selections such as no source and no calibration kit are available if there are no similar models of equipm
464. varies with kit type NOTE Systems with an 8350 as a source use a shorted airline instead of the 25 ohm mismatch airline This is because of the sweeper s phase and magnitude errors explained in 8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources in this reference section Use the flush short from the calibration kit Plotters and Printers The verification program requires that the printer be connected on the controller s GPIB The plotter can be on either the 8510 system bus default state in the software configuration menu or the controller s GPIB When it is connected to the 8510 system bus plots can be made from the 8510 display or from the controller display However the 8510 does not have to be connected to a controller to generate specifications Therefore without an 8510 connected and running you would connect the plotter to the controller s GPIB Plot Label Information If you set the date and time when you first run the program the correct date and time when the plot is made appears in the upper right corner of the plot Plots will also be labeled with the system hardware models However some of the sources will not have their correct A B or C labels For example 8340B sources will be labeled as 8340A This is only on plots and does not mean that the program is faulty The program must eliminate the slash that occurs after hardware configuration labels such as 8340A B 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 95 Performance Ver
465. vice Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Running Error Messages Disc Media Wearing Out Replace Soon This indicates that further use of the disk may cause loss of data The external drive counts the number of disk revolutions and records that number on the disk When a certain number of revolutions has occurred the disk drive causes this caution error message to appear The message is not prompted by a measure of a disk s magnetic properties and is meant only to advise the user of a potential disk media failure Most probable cause of failure Disk media in an external disk drive is old Failure Check System Bus Configuration This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source This is an indication of incorrect power level flatness correction only Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure Fault Indicator On This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure Overmodulation This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source It appears when the RF output of the source is being overmodulated Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure RF Unlocked This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure Self Test Failure This message refers
466. w Ne SWEEP ADC ie LT 5 AN A20 R26 7 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment Figure 7 5 Display of Sweep ADC Adjustment A20R26 ADJUSTMENT 500 3mU 10 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 11 If you are unable to adjust A20R26 within the given specification and the following prompt is displayed refer to the troubleshooting chapter ADC CONTROL GAIN is beyond limit press CONTINUE 12 Switch off the analyzer power and return all the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration 7 17 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Procedure 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Equipment Spectrum analyzer 4407 Function generator 33250A 4 ft BNC to SMB cable assembly 2 5062 7230 Adapter male N to female BNC 1250 0780 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure The IF mixers convert the 20 MHz first IF signals from the test set to 100 kHz second IF signals which go to the IF amplifiers The 20 MHz IF signals are mixed with the 19 9 MHz signals from the 19 9 MHz LO board A8 The 20 MHz IF signals are also buffered and sent to the IF counter A21 All four IF mixers are identical In the following procedure the signal generator simulates the test set The signal is fed into th
467. weeper models However some 8360 instruments must be upgraded to take advantage of certain 8510C system functions Refer to Table 4 1 for upgrades required for these functions Table 4 1 8360 Upgrade Summary Agilent Model Serial Prefix Required for Test Port Flatness Correction or Required for Quick Receiver Cal Step 83630A 83650A All No modification required 83651A lt 3103A 83601A upgrade kit 83621A 3103A 08360 60167 firmware kit 83631A SIOA to 08360 60201 firmware kit 2 3112A No modification required 83620A 83622A lt 3103A 08360 60167 firmware 5 83623 3104A to 3111A 08360 60201 firmware kitt note 3 83624A 3112A to 3144A No modification required note 3 83640A 2 3145A No modification required 83642A 1 Fully compatible at time of shipment 2 Includes installation 3 Quick Step cannot be retrofitted to these models 4 8360 series requires firmware gt 23 Oct 90 The firmware revision for all 8360 series synthesized sweepers appears when the instrument power is switched on 5 8360 series requires firmware gt 06 Mar 91 The firmware revision for all 8360 series synthesized sweepers appears when the instrument power is switched on 6 Receiver Cal requires 8510C rev C 07 00 or greater 4 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Firmware Revisions Operation Internal
468. where it found the IF Recall that the sweep linearity of sweepers like the Agilent 8350 and its associated plug in is approximately 50 MHz This wide range almost invariably forces the 8510 to enter an IF search routine The frequency inaccuracy of the sweeper displaces the IF and forces the search For example assume a start frequency of 500 MHz The 8510 pretunes the VTO to produce an LO of 520 MHz 20 MHz above the RF and it expects to find the IF at 20 MHz required for phase lock But if the sweeper RF is actually 478 MHz the IF would be 42 MHz not 20 MHz as calculated The 8510 would not find the IF initially But after retuning the LO to 498 MHz it would find the required 20 MHz IF LO VTO RF Sweeper IF LO RF Calculated 520 500 20 Actual 520 478 42 Required 498 478 20 Finally and here s where the learning takes place the processor learns remembers the required LO frequency for an IF of 20 MHz and phase lock It then uses that value on subsequent sweeps It sweeps faster because it need not recalculate pretune frequencies or search for the IF The process is the same for the start frequency and all of the band crossings The process is used after the system has maintained phase lock through all of the band crossings of the complete sweep 3 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages
469. xtremely careful not to scratch or break the glass Pull the cover forward and off 2 Remove the two screws that are now uncovered Figure 10 1 Removing the Glass Filter Carefully insert a small thin flat screwdriver blade or fingernail here DISPLAY BEZEL SOFTKEYS COVER SCREW one of two behind cover 3 Remove the display bezel assembly by pulling out the end that is now free Pivot the bezel around its left edge until it is released 4 Clean the CRT surface and the inner glass filter surface gently 5 Allow the surfaces to dry and then reassemble the instrument 85101C Equipped with an LCD The LCD is covered by a protective glass and bezel assembly Clean the surface of the glass and bezel using a sort cloth and if necessary a cleaning solution recommended for optical coated surfaces Agilent part number 8500 2163 is on such solution 10 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Preventive Maintenance Degauss Demagnetize the Display CRT Only Degauss Demagnetize the Display CRT Only If the display becomes magnetized or if color purity is a problem cycle the power several times Leave the instrument off for at least 15 seconds before turning it on This will activate the automatic degaussing circuit in the analyzer display If this is insufficient to achieve color purity a commercially available demagnetizer must be used either a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser can be used Follow the manufa
470. y It takes approximately five seconds to complete When the test is run the message Board Initialization in Progress will be displayed When the EEPROMs have been initialized the message Initialization Completed will be displayed After the test it may be necessary to recalibrate the display and the beeper frequencies Complete Memory Board Unformatted Write Read Test 2 This test checks the ability of non volatile memory EEPROMs to correctly store data This test takes approximately two minutes to complete The test writes to and reads from each EEPROM and reports where the first error occurred by giving the memory bank position including upper most significant or lower least significant byte in the bank The subtest number that failed is reported Normally a good memory will report subtest 0 Press ZMARKER to re initialize memory and return to the main menu of the nonvolatile memory board tests Complete Memory Board Formatted Write Read Test 3 This test prompts the user for a hexadecimal bit pattern to write into and read from memory Then it prompts for the start and stop page numbers Normally you would start at page 0000 and stop on the last available page in memory These page numbers depend on how many EEPROMs are loaded in the A6 EEPROM board Running test 8 will show how many pages are in your A6 EEPOM board provided the board successfully initialized In the 85101C there is error correction firmware
471. y differs in 8510C models with CRT and LCD displays 85102B Replacement Procedures Front panel Rectifier board A26 Power supply capacitors C1 C2 C3 and C4 Rear panel Adjustments and Performance Tests When an assembly is replaced adjustments may be necessary to assure the analyzer meets its specifications Refer to Figure 7 3 to identify the adjustment s required after replacing an assembly In addition to any necessary adjustments performance verification may be needed depending on the assembly replaced 6 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures Overview WARNING The ac line voltage inside the instrument can if contacted produce fatal electrical shock DISCONNECT BOTH AC POWER CORDS FOR ALL DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES With the ac power cables connected to the instrument the ac line voltage is present on the terminals of the line power modules on the rear panels and the LINE power switch whether the switch is ON or OFF Be aware that capacitors inside the instrument may remain charged for 5 seconds even though the instrument has been disconnected from its ac power source Table 6 1 Disassembly Tools Required Tool Agilent Part Number Large Pozidrive 8710 0900 Small Pozidrive 8710 0899 Torx driver T 10 8710 1623 Torx driver T 15 8710 1622 Nut driver 1 4 in 8720 0002 Nut driver 7 16 in 8720 0006 Allen wrench No 6 1 16 in 5020 0289 Small flat blade screwdriver 8730 000
472. y from 20 MHz In summary if the IF is not detected if the check step fails or if the IF is not found after the IF search routine the processor displays this error message NO IF FOUND 3 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation Main Phase Lock Sequence After a successful pretune sequence the processor switches from pretune to main phase lock During the switch timing is very important Any drift in source frequency decrease in power or fluctuation in the pretune loop could prevent phase lock Figure 3 7 Simplified Main Phase Lock Loop IF DETECTOR e TEST SET SENSE RF IN THRU IF DETECTOR TO DISPLAY PROCESSOR As shown above the S H on the test set VTO summing amp holds the pretune voltage and VTO frequency constant The main phase lock tracks the error signal of the phase detector to acquire the IF about 20 MHz Then it locks the IF to the 20 MHz reference signal Once the IF is locked on 20 MHz the processor begins the sweep The phase locked loop remains locked while holding the IF at a zero phase error for the ramp output of the main phase lock board If the loop cannot lock the processor displays this error message PHASE LOCK FAILURE Monitoring Phase Lock While making the measurement sweep the processor monitors the IF count and power If phase lock is lost during the sweep the processor displays this error message PHASE LOCK LOST T
473. ystem Command 15 Run Main Program The processor runs the self test sequence but disregards does not stop for or report any failures Then it loads the operating system from memory to RAM and begins program execution System Command 16 Memory Operations CAUTION You can destroy the operating system in memory with this selection Agilent recommends that you do not use this selection unless assisted by a qualified Agilent customer engineer This routine allows direct access to individual memory locations Thus you can observe or change data If you destroy the operating system in memory reload the operating system with disk command 19 below System Command 17 Rerun Self Test The processor runs the self test sequence once but stops if there are any failures If there are no failures it loads the operating system and begins program execution System Command 18 Repeat Test Loop The processor runs the self test sequence continuously The LCD CRT displays the number of times the sequence has passed run without failure and failed This selection is a powerful mode for troubleshooting intermittent failures Press the recessed TEST button to exit the test loop Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc Use this selection to load or reload the operating system Slide the operating system disk into the disk drive Press SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU to enter the Main Service Functions test menu In the Main Service Functions

Agilent Technologies 8510C Network Analyzer

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents